Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
FOREWORD
The Proclamation to define the powers and duties of the Central and Regional Executive Organs of the Transitional Government of Ethiopia No. 41/1993 empowers the Ministry of Works and Urban Development to prepare the Country's Building Code, issue Standards for design and construction works, and follow up and supervise the implementation of same. In exercise of these powers and in discharge of its responsibility, the Ministry is issuing a series of Building Code Standards of general application. The purpose of these standards is to serve as nationally recognized documents, the application of which is deemed to ensure compliance of buildings with the minimum requirements for design, construction and quality of materials set down by the National Building Code. The major benefits to be gained in applying these standards are the harmonization of professional practice and the ensuring of appropriate levels of safety, health and economy with due consideration of the objective conditions and needs of the country. As these standards are technical docum~nts which, by their very nature, require periodic updating, revised editions will be issued by the Ministry from time to time as.appropriate. The Ministry welcomes comments and suggestions on all aspect of the Ethiopian Building Code Standards. All feedback received will be carefully reviewed by professional experts in the field of building construction with a view to possible incorporation of amendments in future editions.
INTRODUCTION
This Code Standard for the Electrical Installation of Buildings is part of the Building Code of Ethiopia: This Code Standard for the Electrical Instaijation of Buildings is mairily adopted from lEE Regulations for Electrical Installations and Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, to suit the Ethiopian conditions. Other publications quoted are shown in the respective sections of the Code and the Ethiopian Authority for Standardization maintains registers of a number of foreign national and international standards. The Code embr~ces several aspects of electrical installation work and sets standards and provisions for safe utilization of electricity. The Technical Committee for Code Standards for the Electrical Installation of Buildings comprises of the following Institutions representing balanced interest of all segments of the public concerned with the subject matter: Ministry of Works & Urban Development (MWUD) Building Design Enterprise (BDE) Ethiopian Electric Light & Power Authority (EELP A) Addis Ababa University, Faculty of Technology (AAU) Ethiopian Authority for Standardization (BAS).
- ---
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1
1.1 1.2 1J
Section 2
2.1
Gen~ral Requirements
Administrative 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.1.7 2.1.8 2.1.9 2.1.10 2.1.11 2.1.12 2.1.13 2.1.14 Authority for rules Pennit Application for inspection Posting of penn it ', Notification re-inspection Plans and specifications Connection authorization Re-inspection Renovation of existing installation Use of approved equipment Deviation or postponement Powers of rejection Installation of electrical equipment Damage and interfer. ~e
i . i
20 20 20 20 20 20 21 21 21 21 22 22 22 22 22 23 '.' 23 23 23 23 24 24
2.2
Technical 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 Conventional symbols Co-ordination
Location and requirement of substation Rooms (spaces) required Location and requirements of distribution boards Location and requirements of PBX/PABX rooms
2.3
Planning and designing 2.3:1 General 2.3.2 2.3.3 Layout and installation drawing Design " , ,
25 25 25 25 26 26 27 ,. ,. 27 27 27 28
2.4
Marking of equipment 2.4.1 General 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 Workmanship and materials
Section 3
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
Illumination
Scope Normative references Definitions Lighting requirements 3.4.1 IllumiQance 3.4.2 Luminance 3.4.3 Glare' 3.4.4 3.4.5 , " '.. " ' 29 29 30 35 35 35 36 36 , .. , 36 37 37 37 38 38 38 39 39 39 40 40 42 42 42 , 43 43
3.5
Emergency lighting requirements 3 .5.1 Escape lighting 3.5.2 Safety lighting for particular hazardous workplaces 3.5.3 Standby lighting Lighting requirements for various types of buildings 3.6.1 General 3.6.2 Industrial 3'.6.3 Offices.,., 3.6.4 Hotels and restaurants, 3.6.5 3.6.6 Educational establishments Hospitals , . ""
3.6
'
'
3.7
Outdoor lighting requirements 3.7.1 Illuminance 3.7.2 3,7.3 3.7.4 Colour r~ndering group
Limitation of glare : ' .' Lighting of outdoor fixed location work spaces
II
Se~tion 4
Conductors
',' "
66. 66 67 69 69 69 70 70 70 70 70 " 70 71 71
74
Ph~e conductors in a.c. Circuits and live conductors in d.c. circuits .. Neutral conductors ,
4.5
Ampacity of wires, cables and flexible cords 4.5.1 4.5.3 '4.5.4 Conductor operating temperature Cables connected to bare conductors or busbars Voltage drop ~ 4.5.2 . Cables connected iri parallel
Annex (preface) Annex A (Normative) - Correction factors Annex B (Normative) - Type of cable and ampacity
85 90
Section 5
5.i 5.2 5.3 5.4
5.5
III
5.6
Wiring methods 5.6.1 5.6.2 Underground consumer's service conductors Overhead consumer's service conductors
5.7
Section 6
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
6.5
Services and feeders 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 6.5.6 6.5.7 6.5.8 Single-family dwellings Apartment and similar multi-family buildings Schools Hospitals Hotels, motels, dormitories, and buildings of similar occupancy Other types of occupancy Branch circuits Feeder demand factors for lifts
Section 7
Scope Normative references System and circuits earthing 7.3.1 7.3.2 Direct current. systems Alternating - current systems
IV
7.4
Location of system earthing connections 7.4.1 D.C. systems 7.4.2 A.C. systems 7.4.3 Isolated systems , , , '.' 7.4.4 Single service supply to two or more buildings or structures ., 7.4,5 Conductors to be earthed , , 7.4.6 Current over earthing conductor ,, ,
159 159 159 159 160 160 , .. 160 161 161 161 161 161 164 164
Bonding 7.5.1 Non-current carrying metal parts , , , 1.5.2 Exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment ....... 7.5.3 Non-metallic wiring systems 7.5.4 Non-electrical services 7.5.5 Extraneous fixed metalwork
7,6
Method of earthing 7.6.1 7.6.2 7.6.3 7.6.4 7.6.5 7.6.6 Effective earthing Common earthing conductor Common earthing electrode Underground service Short section of raceway Fixed equipment ,
, _ , '. , ,,.,
, .. ", \. , , , , ,., , ,
164 164 164 165 165 ,. 165 166 166 166 166 167 167 167 167 168 168 168 169
7.7
Bonding methods 7.7.1 7.7.2 7.7.3 7.7.4 7.7.5 7.7.6 7.7.7 Clean sUifaee
Bonding at service equipment ......................... Means of assuring continuity at service equipment Metal annour or tape of service cable, Bonding at other than service equipment Loosely jointed metal raceways Bonding jumpers
7.8
Earthing electrodes .. , 7.8.1 7.8.2 7.8.3 General, , Service pipe electrode, Artificial earthing electrodes
7.9
Earthing and bonding conduc;tors 7.9.1 7.9.2 7.9.3 7.9.4 7.9.5 7.9.6 General Installation of system earthing conductors Installation of equipment bonding conductors Earthing conductor size for d.c. circuits Earthing conductor size for a.c. system Bonding conductor size
171 171 172 173 174 174 174 175 175 175 175 176 176
7.10
Earthing and bonding conductor connections 7.10.1 7.10.2 7.10.3 7.10.4 7.10.5 Bonding. conductor connection to raceways Earthing conductor connection to water pipe electrodes Earthing conductor connections to other than water pipe electrodes Bonding conductor connection to circuits and equipment Earthing conductor cQJ111Cction electrodes to
..
Section 7
7.11 Scope 7.12 Normative references 7.13 Definitions 7.14 Materials 7.14.1 General 7.14.2 7.14.3 7.14.4 7.14.5 7.15 Form 7.15.1 7.15.2 7.15 Galvanic compatibility Corrosion protection Mechanical protection Use of aluminium and size Air termination Conductors Earth termination ,
7.15.4 Minimum dimension 7.16 Air termination 7.16.1 General 7.16.2 Support 7.16.3 Metallic projections 7.16.4 Metallic materials 7.16.5 Structure within zone .of protection ' 7.16.6 Air termination on roof 7.16.7 Air termination on reinforced concrete structure
VI
7.17
Down conductor 7,17.1 General " ,., 7.17.2 Routing 7,17.3 Recommended number
, , '
, ,
7.17.4 Mechanical protection 7.17.5 Corrosive soil .................................... 7.17.6 External routes not available 7.17 .7 Lift shafts 7.17.8 Re-entrant loops . , 7.17,9 Sharp bends 7.17.10 7.1 7.11 7.17.12 7.18 , ' : Bonding to prevent side flashing Bonds Testpoints , ...................................... , ' , . , .. , , :., , , , , . , .. , , , , , , , .. , ,,. , '.' "
Earth termination
7.18.1 Termination, 7.18,2 Resistance to earth 7.18.3 Earth electrodes. 7.18.4 Connection point 7.19 Common earthing 7.19.1 Common earth potential 7.19.2 Common earth bonding , .. ,.".', ,
7.20 Use of reinforcement for earthing in concrete Structures .. , .. : .. , 7.20.1 General, , , ,', . , . , , ,, 7.20.2 Electrical continuity . , . , -7.20.3 Prestressed concrete members 7.20.4 Precast concrete members 7.21 ,, ' ,
, .. , , , .. , .. 193 193 "" .. , .. 193 , ' ".,. 194 " . , . 194 194 194 ' , 194 194
Structural ~teel framing for lightning protection 7.21.1 General '.' 7.21.2 Air termination ,.,., 7.21.3 Connection ' , 7.21.4 Earthing .. , 7.21.5 Interconnection , ,.,
VII
General requirements 8.3.1 Methods of-installatiOns 8.3.2 Wiring in ducts and plenum chambers 8.3.3 Underground installations 8.3.4 Conductors in hoistways Conductors 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 Types of conductors Radii of bends in conductors Conductor joints and splices Supporting of conductors
223 224 224 225 226 226 226 227 228 228 228 228 229 22? 229 229 229 229 230 230 230 231 231 231 232 233
8.4
8.5
Open wiring 8.5.1 Open and clipped direct 8.5.2 Spacing of conductors 8.5.3 Conductor supports 8.5.4 Spacing of supports
8.6
Exposed wiring on exterior of buildings and between Buildings on the same premises
Bare bus bars and risers Installation of boxes, cabinets, outlets and terminal fittings 8.8.1 Number of outlets per circuit 8.8.2 Outlet boxes 8.8.3 Conductors in boxes 8.8.4 Terminal fittings Cables, conductors and wiring methods
8.9
VIII
Section
9.1
9.2
Protection
and Control 237 237 237 237 238 238 238 239 240 240 240 241 241
Scope Normative references General requirements 9.3.1 Protective and control devices 9.3.2 Types and ratings of protective and control devices
'
9.3
./I
; 9.4
9.5 9.6
9.7 9.8
Fuses Circuit breakers Control devices Switches Protection and control of miscellaneous apparatus
9.9 Section 10
10.1 Scope 10.2 Normative references 10.3 Classification 10.3.1 General 10.3.2 Class 1 extra-low-voltage
245 245 246 246 246 \ 246 246 247 247 247 247 247
. 248
power circuits
10.3.3 Class 2 low-energy power circuits 10.3.4 Hazardous location 10.3.5 Circuits to safety control devices 10.3.6 Circuits in communication cables 10.4 Class 1 circuits 10.4.1 Limitation of Class 1 circuits 10.4.2 Methods of installation for Class 1 circuits 10.4.3 Overcurrent protection of Class 1 circuits 10.4.4 Location of overcurrent devices in Class 1 circuits .; 10.4.5 Class I extra-low-voltage power circuit ~ources including Transfonners 10.4.6 Conductor material and sizes 10.4.7 Insulated conductors for Class 1 wiring " 10.4.8 Conductors of different circuits in the ,same enclosure, cable, or Raceway 10.4.9 Mechanical protection of remote-control circuits 10.4.10 Class 1 circuits extending aerially beyond a building
IX
, protection
10.5.2 Methods of installation on supply side of overcurrent Transformers or other devices for Class 2 circuits 10.5.3 Marking 10.5.4 Overcurrent protection for Class 2 circuits 10.5.5 Location of over current devices
'"
10.5.6 Conductors for Class 2 circuit wiring 251 10.5.7 Separation of Class 2 circuit conductors from other circuits 251 10.5.8 Conductors of different Class 2 circuits in the same cable, enclosure, or raceway 252 10.5.9 Penetration ofa fire separation 252 10.5.10 Conductors in vertical shafts and hoistways ; . 252 10.5.11 10.5.12 10.5.13 10.5.14 Class 2 conductors and equipment in ducts and plenum chambers .. 252 Equipment located on the load side of overcurrent protection, transformers, or current-limiting devices for Class 2 circuits , , , 252 Class 2 circuits extending beyond a building Underground installations , , 253 253
, .. ,
11.3.1 Fusible equipment 11.3.2 Connection to identified terminals or leads 11.3.3 Equipment over combustible surfaces 11.3.4 Installation of ventilated enclosures 11.3.5 Outdoor installations 11.4 Electric heating and cooking appliances 11.4.1 Location of non-portable appliances 11.4.2 Rating of portable appliances 11.4.3 Appliance exceeding 1500w 11.5 Heatingequipment ; 11.6 Submersible pumps 11.7 Motors and associated ,circuits 11.7.1 11.7.2 11.7.3 11.7.4 11.7.5 Wiring methods and conductors Overcurrent protection Overload and overheating protection Undervoltage protection ~ Control ,
11.8 Air conditioning and refrigerating equipment 11.8.1 General 11.82 Branch circuit 11.8.3 Disconnecting means 11.8.4 Supply cords 11.9 Storage batteries 11.9.1 Location of storage batteries 11.9.2 Ventilation of battery rooms or areas 11.9.3 Battery vents 11.9.4 Battery instillatio~ 11.9.5 Wiring ' ,
'.'
268 268 268 269 269 ',' 269 269 269 269 269 ; .......... 270
12.3.1 Division of Class I locations 12.3.2 Division of Class II locations 12.3.3 Division of Class III locations 12.4 General requirements 12.4.1 Electrical equipment 12,.4.2 Marking .. "
...........................
12.4.J Non-essential electrical equipment 12.4.4 Equipment rooms 12.4.5 Cable trays 12.5 Class I locations 12.5.1 Installations in Class I, Division 1 locations . 12.5.2 Installat~ons in Class I, Division 2 locations 12.6 Class II locations '.'
12.6.1 Installations in Class II, Division 1 locations 12.6.2 Installation in Class II, Division 2 locations ............... 12.7 Class III locations 12.7.1 Installations in Class III, Division 1 locations 12.7.2 Installations in Class III; Division 2 locations
XI
Section 13 Fhimmable Liquid Dispensing and Service Stations, Garages, Bulk Storage Plants, Finishing Processes and Aircraft Hangars
13.1 Scope 13.2 Nonnative references 13.3 Gasoline dispensing and service stations 13.3.1 Hazardous areas 13.3.2 Wiring and equipment within hazardous areas 13.3.3 Wiring and equipment above hazardous areas 13.4 Commercial garages, repairs and storage 13.4.1 Hazardous areas 13.4.2 Wiring and equipmentin hazardous areas 13.4.3 Wiring above hazardous areas 13.4.4 EqUIpment above hazarqous areas 13.5 Residential storage garages 13.5.1 Non-hazardous location. 13.5.2 Hazardous location . ; 13.5.3 Wiring 13.6 Bulk storage plants 13.6.1 , Hazardous areas ' :
.
294 295 295 295 296 297 297 297 298 298 298 298 298 299
299 299 , ..
0 .'
13.6.2 Wiring and' eq~ipment in hazardol,ls areas 13.6.3 Wiring and equipment above hazardous areas 13.7 Finishing processes 13.7:1 Hazardous locations
0'
,0
..
; ........
13.7.2 Wiring and' equipment in hazardous areas 13.7.3 Wiring and equipment aqove .hazardous areas 13.8 Aircraft; hangars .:. 13.8.1 Hazardous areas.. .. ... . 13.8.2 Wiring .and equipment in ,hazardous 'areas ... 13.8.3 Wiring not within' hazardous area. " '.' 13.8.4 Equipment-not within hazardous' areas
0 0
o'
.'
.'
'.
'
'0'
o.
0.'
'
,;
'
308 308
XII
14.3 Definitions 14.4 Circuits in basic care areas 14.4.1 Branch circuits 14.4.2 Bonding to earth in basic-care areas 14.4.3 Socket outlets in basic-care areas 14.5 Circuits in intermediate and critical-care areas 14.5.1 Branch circuits 14.5.2 Bonding to earth in intermediate and critical-care areas 14.5.3 Receptacles in intermediate-and critical-care areas 14.6 Isolated systems 14.6.1 Sources of supply 14.6.2 Single-phase isolated circuits 14.6.3 Three-phase isolated systems 14.7 Essential electrical systems ' ~ \ " , ' , : '.' ' '.' .: ' '.....
308' 31 ,311 312 313 313 313 313 314 314 314 315 315 315 316 , 316 311
14.7.1 Circuits in essential electrical systems .. ,\ 14.8 Transfer switches 14.9 Emergency supply
Section
,'
15 Installation of Lighting Equipment 15.1 Scope 15.2 Normative references 15.3 Interior lighting :quipment : 15.3.1 General ' '.' ' ........................ ' .' ~ " , . '.. ~.~.. , : , . :.' .. '.' . " 3 18 318 318 318 320 323 323 326 326 327 327 328 331 334
15.3.2 Location of lighting equipment 15.3.3 Installation. of ligpting equipment 15.3.4 Wirin~ of lighting. equipment
15.3.5 Earthing of-lighting equipment :." 15.3.6 Electric-discharge lighting systems operating at 1000V or less 15.4 q~tdoor lighting equipment 15..4.1 General, '.' ., : ; ,
15.4.2: Permanent outdoor floodlighting installation 1,5.4.3 'Exposedwirin~ for permanent outdoor lighting Annex A (Normative) .' ; .. ,
XIII
' , -,' ~ .. , , , ,, ., , , , .. : , .. , . , , , ,
,:,.
~ , , .. , ,
, ,,
, . , ........ ,
,., .,
347 , , .. , . .'.,
348,'
16.4.4 Selection of fITe detectors , ': , , .. , -. , 349 16.4.5 Sitting of detectors ,."" .. ,." .. '., '.' 350 16.4.6 Sitting of heat' sensitive (point) detectors, .... , .. , '. , , . , '. , , . , , 35 16.4.7 Vibration combined with rapid temperature change .. '.'
, , , .. 353
16.4.8 Sitting ofheat-sensitive.(line) detectors. , . , .... , ., , ; " .. ~54 16.4.9 Sitting of smoke-sensitive detectors ... ,.,.".,.:.""., . 354 16.4.10 Audible and visual alarms , .,,, ., , . , . , , .. , . 354
16.5 Cables and wiring .,' .. ,.,., 16,5.1 Cables" ,-.. ,-.,., 16.5.2 Wiring method .. , . , . , 16.6 Equipment bonding .... , ...
,., , . .-,,.,
', .. , , .. ,
, ,,356_ 356 , , , , 357 , , , . ", . , 359, 359 .. 35~, 359 359 359, 360
, ,. , , ,.,
16.6.1 Exposed non-current carrying'metal Pt 16.6.2 Bonding conductor .. , ., 16.7 Power supply system .. , 16.7.1 Operating voltage, 16.7.3 Current supply 16..8 Fire pumps 16.8.1 Conductors -, . , , .. ,., , , , , , . , .. , . , . , , , , , ,. , , , . , .. , , .. ,., , , , , .,., , 16.7.2 Sources of power . ,
, ,', .. ",
, .. .' . , , ., , , .. , , ,
'. , . , , . , . , , .. , , ,
16.8,3 Consumers' service mr fire pumps 16.8.4 Protection , , Annex A (Informative) _Annex B (Informative)
XIV
'
'
17.4 High-voltage luminous discharge tube signs and outline Lighting 17.4.1 Enclosure .' :
'.<
~ . '.. : .. '.: .. , :
3i7
377 378 378 378 379 : 379 379 380
, ,
'
18.4.1 Installation of conductors 18.4.2 Minimum size of conductors 18.4.3 Motor circuit conductors 18.5 Wiring 18.5.1 Wiring methods
xv
18.6 Installation of conductors 18.6.1 Number of conductors in raceway 18.6.2 Supports 18.6.3 Different systems in one raceway or travelling cable 18.6.4 Wiring in hoistway 18.6.5 Electric equipment in garages and similar occupancies 18.6.6 Sidewalk lifts 18.7 Travelling cables " 18.7.1 Suspension ~ ,_ 18.7.2 Hazardousjclassified) location 18.7.3 Protection against damage 18.7.4 Installation 18.8 Disconnecting means and control 18.8.1 General 18.8.2 Type 18.8.3 Location 18.8.4 Phase protection 18.9 Overcurrent protection .. ~ 18.9.1 Control and opet~lting circuits 18.9.2 Motors 18.10 Machine room 18.10.1 18.10.2 18.11 ; , : \ ,
' ~
380 380 380 380 381 381 381 381 381 382 382 382 382 382 383 383 383 ; 383 383 384 384 384 384 384 384 385 385 385 385 385 386 386 386 386 386
Earthing " 18.11.1 Metal raceway attached to cars 18.11.2 Electric lifts 18.11.3 Non-electric lifts 18.11.4 Method of bonding Overspeed , 18.12.1 Overspeedprotection 18.12.2 Motor-generator overspeed device Emergency power 18.13.1 Supply 18.13.2 Disconnection 18.13.3 Hydraulic lifts disconnecting means
18.12
18.13
XVI
18.14
Machine rooms and hoistway pits lighting and Auxiliary 18.14.1 Machine room llU4.2 Hoist pits
Section 19 Theatrelnstallation
19.1 Scope 19.2 Normative references 19.3 Wiring method 19.4 Fixed stage switchboard 19.4.1 Fuses 19.4.2 Overcurrent protection 19.4.3 Dimmers 19.4-4 Control of stage and gallery pockets 19.4.5 Conductors ' :: : ; 388 388 388 389 389 389 390 390 390
19.5 Portable switchboard on stage 19.5.1 Construction of portable switchboards 19.5.2 Supply for portable switchboard 19.6 Fixed stage equipment 19.6.1 Footlights 19.6.2 Metal work 19.6.3 Clearance at terminals 19.6.4 Mechanical protection of lamps in borders, etc 19.6.5 Suspended fixtures 19.6.6 Connections at lampholders 19.6.7 Ventilationfor mogullampholers, ~ 19.6.8 Conductor insulation for field-assembled fixtures 19.6.9 Branch circuit overcurrenf protection 19.6.10 Pendant lights rated more than lOOW 19.6.11 Cables for border lights 19.6.12 Wiring to arc pockets 19.6.13 Socket outlets and plugs 19.6.14 Curtain motors 19.6.15 Flue damper control
391 391 391 391 391 391 392 392 392 392 392 392 392 393 393 393 393 394 394 394 394 395 395 395
19.7 Portable stage equipment 19.7.1 Fixtures on scenery 19.7.2 String or festooned lights
19.7.3 Flexible conductors fr?m portable equipment 19.7.4 Portable equipment for stage effects
XVII
Section 21 Motion Picture Studios, Projection Rooms, Film Exchanges and Factory
21.1 Scope 21.2 Normative references 21.3 General 21.3.1 Wiring method 21.4 21.5 Viewing, cutting and patching table fixture Film-vaults and storage rooms 21.5.1 Equipment in film vaults and storage rooms 21.5.2 Wiring method in film-vaults 21.5.3 Lighting fixtures in film-vaults 21.5.4 Film-vault circuits 402 402 402 402 403 403 403 403 403 404
XVIII
~_.
------
~I
21.6 Motion picture projection rooms .. 21.6.1 Lamps in projection rooms 21.6.2 Arc lamp current supply 21.6.3 Ventilation 21.7 Motors and generators Section 22 Diagnostic Imaging Installation 22.1 Scope 22.2 Nonnative references 22.3 Definitions 22.4 High-voltage guarding 22.5 Connections to supply circuit 22.6 Disconnecting means 22.7 Transfonners and capacitors 22.8 Control 22.10 Bonding Systems -
"
Section 23 Electrical Communication 23.1 Scope 23:2 Nonnative reference 23.3 General 23.3.2 Hazardous locations
409 409 409 409 410 410 410 410 410 410 410 411 411 4.12 412 412 412 413
23.3.1 Circuits in communication cables 23.3.3 Approved transfonners 23.4 Inside conductors 23.4.1 Conductors arrangement 23.4.2 Insulation 23.4.3 Earthing conductors with an outer metal covering 23.4.4 Separation from other conductors 23.4.5 Penetration of a fire separation 23.4.6 Communication cable in hoistways 23.4.7 Communication conductors in ducts and plenum chambers 23.4.8 Data processing systems 23.4.9 Conductors under raised floors 23.4.10 Conductors in concealed installations 23.4.11 Type CFC under-carpet wiring system _
XIX
23.5
Equipment 23.5.1 Communication equipment in bathrooms 23.5.2 Equipment in air ducts, plenums, or suspended ceilings 23.5.3 Exposed equipment and terminations 23.5.4 Earth circuits 23.5.5 Communication systems in hospitals
414 414 414 : 415 415 415 415 ~ 415 415 416 416 ; 416 " '~
23.6
Outside conductors 23.6.1 Overhead conductors on poles 23.6.2 Overhead conductor$ on roofs 23.6.3 Lightning conductors 23.6.4 Swimming pools
23.7
l . 416
417 417
23.8' Earthing 23.8.1 Bonding of cable sheath 23.8.3 Earthing electrode 23.8A Earthing electrode connection 23.8.5 Bonding of electrodes : ." : 23.8.2 Cable-sheath bonding conductor
417
A18
Antenna Installation
Scope ",: :.~ Normative references'.: Technical requirements' 24.3.1 Mechanical 24.3.2 Electrical
24.4
Equipment 24.4.1 Community antenna distribution amplifiers and other power sources 24.4.2 Exposed equipment and terminations 24.4.3 Equipment earthing
24.5
Community antenna distribution network 24.5.1 Conductor 24.5.2 Voltage limitation 24.5.3 Hazardous locations
xx
)
24.5.4 Supports 24.5.5 Earthing of outer conductive shield'of a coaxial cable 24.5.6 Earthing conductor 24.5.7 Earthing electrode 24.5.8 Earthing electrode connection 24.6 Conductors within buildings ~ ; 24.6.1 Separation from other.~onductors '" .. ; 24.6.2 Conductors ina vertical shaft .. ; . ; ................ 24.6.3' Penetration of aJire separation : ;' , '
''24.6.4 Commuriityantenna distributionconductorsin ducts and plenum Cambers .. 426' 24.6.5 Raceways ' '.' .................. 426 24.7 Conductors outside of buildings 24.7.1 Overhead conductors on poles 24.7.2 Overhead conductors on roofs 24.7.3 Conductors on buildings 24.7.5 Swimming pools 24.8 Underground conductors . 24.8.1 Direct buried systems 24.7.4 Conductors entering buildings ' , .......................... ' ; : ; " 426 426 . ',' 426 426 427 '. 427 427 427 428 429 429 429 429 430 431 ---
.............................
'~
24.8.2 Underground raceway .............................. . 24.8.3 . Underground bluck dIstribution 24.9 Lightning arresters for receiving stations 24.9.1 Lightning arrester ., 24.94 Earthing conductor .24.9.3 Earthing electrode Annex A (Informative)
XXI
25.4.4 Bonding to earth 25.4.5 Junction and deck boxes 25.4.6 Transformers and transformer enclosure 25.4.7 Socket outlets 25.4.8 Luminaries and lighting equipment 25.4.9 Earth-fault circuit breakers 25.5 Permanently installed swimming pools 25.5.1 General 25.5.2 Conduit type 25.5.3 Circuit segregation 25.5.4 Drainage 25.6 Storable swimming pools 25.6.1 Electrical equipment 25.6.2 Pumps 25.7 Hydromassage bathtub 25.7.1 Protection 25.7.2 Control 25.7.3 Other electric equipment 25.8 Spas and hot tubs 25.8.1 Bonding to earth 25.8.2 Controls and other electrical equipment 25.8.3 Leakage current 25.8.4 Field-assembled units Annex A (Informative) ~ '
449 450 451 452 452 454 455 455 455 455 455 455 455 456 456 456 456 457 457 457 457 458 458 460
Section 26
26.1 26.2 26.3
Graphical Symbols
Scope Normative references Definitions 462 462 462
XXII
Appendix I Inspection and testing Appendix 2 Fonns of completion and inspection certificate
A-I A-9
XXIII
ECTION
1.1
SCOPE
(1) This Code applies to the design, selection, erection, ~nspection and testing of electrical installations for residential, commercial, public and industrial premises including prefabricated buildings, construction sites, exhibitions, fairs and other temporary installations up to and including lOOO.OY a.c. or
I500.0Y
d.c.
(2) This Code does not apply to: a) electric traction equipment, b) electrical equipment of automobiles, c) electrical equipment on board ships, d) electrical equipment in aircraft, e) public street-lighting installations, f) installations in mines, g) radio interference installation, suppression equipment, except so far as it affects safety of the signalling, control and the like,
systems for distribution of energy to the public, or power generation and transmission for such systems.
1.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(I) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standards on Electrical Installation of Buildings. a) IEC 364-1:1972 Electrical Installations Definitions. of Building, Part 1, Scope, Object and
EBCS-10 1995
International Electrotechnical Vocabulary. Requirements for Electrical Installations, lEE Wiring Regulations, Sixteenth Edition. Canadian Electrical Code, Part I, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Sixteenth Edition.
d) C 22.1:1992
(2) At the time of publication of this Building Code Standard, the editions indicated were valid. All references are subject to revisions, and parties to agreement and based on this Ethiopian Building Code Standard are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the references indicated below. The Ethiopian Authority for Standardization maintains registers of a number of foreign national and international standards.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
(1) For the purpose of this Code, the following definitions shall apply. acceptable accessible (as applied to wiring methods) acceptable to the Authority enforcing this Code. not permanently closed in by the structure or finish of the building and capable of being removed without disturbing the building structure or finish. . accessory a device, other than current-using equipment, associated with such equipment or with the wiring of an installation. ambient temperature the temperature of the air or other medium where the equipment is to be used. a steady value of current which can be carried by a conductor a specified value. under specified conditions without its steady state temperature exceeding
ampacity
EBCS-10 1995
appliance
arms's reach
a zone of accessibility to touch, extending from any point on a surface where persons usually stand or move about, to the limits which a person can reach with his hand in any direction without assistance.
barrier
a part providing a defined degree of protection against contact with live parts, from any usual direction of access.
basic insulation
insulation applied to live parts to provide basic protection against electric shock and exclusively for functional purposes.
a protective conductor providing equipotential bonding. that portion of the wiring installation between the final
overcurrent device protecting the circuit and the outlet(s). building void, accessible a space within the structure or the components of a building accessible only at certain points. building void, non-accessible a space within a structure or the components of a building which has no ready means of access. bunched cables cables are said to be bunched when two or more are contained within a single conduit, duct, ducting, or trunking or, if not enclosed, are not separated from each other by a specified distance. bus a conductor which serves as a common connection for the corresponding conductors of two or more circuits. busway .a raceway -consisting of metal troughing (including elbows, tees, crosses, in addifion to straight runs) containing conductors, the conductors being supported on insulators. (
)
EBCS-10 1995
cabinet
an enclosure of adequate mechanical strength, composed entirely of noncombustible and absorption-resistant material, designed either for surface or flush mounting, and provided with a frame, mat, or trim, in which swinging doors are hung.
cable bracket
a horizontal cable support system, consisting of elements fixed at one end only, spaced at intervals along the length of the cable and on which the cable rests.
cable channel
an enclosure situated above or in the ground, ventilated or closed, and having dimensions which do not permit the access of persons but allow access to the conductors and/or cables throughout their length during and after installation. A cable channel mayor may not form part of the building construction.
cable cleat
a component of a support system, which consists of elements spaced at intervals along the length of the cable or conduit.
cable coupler
a means of enabling the connection or disconnection, at will, of two flexible cables. It consists of a connector and a plug.
cable ducting
a manufactured enclosure of metal or insulating material, other than conduit or cable trunking, intended for the protection of cables which are drawn-in after erection of the ducting ..
cable ladder
a cable support consisting of a series of supporting elements rigidly fixed to main supporting members. The supporting elements occupy less than 10% of the plan area.
cable tray
a cable support consisting of a continuous base with raised edges and no covering. A cable tray is considered to be non-perforated, where less than 30% of the material is removed from the base.
cable trunking
a manufactured enclosure for the protection of cables, normally of rectangular cross-section, of which one side is removable or hinged.
EBCS-1 0 1995
cable tunnel
an enclosure (corridor) containing supporting structures for conductors and/or cables and joints and whose dimensions allow persons to pass freely throughout the entire length.
a device comprising a fuse element or several fuse elements connected in parallel enclosed in a cartridge usually filled with arc-extinguishing medium connected to terminations. See fuse link. and
circuit
an assembly of electrical equipment supplied from the same origin and protected against overcurrent by the same protective device(s).
circuit-breaker
a device capable of making, carrying and breaking normal load currents and also making and automatically breaking, under predetermined conditions, abnormal currents such as short-circuit currents. are suitable for frequent operation. It is usually
circuit-breaker (linked)
a circuit-breaker the contacts of which are so arranged as to make or break all poles simultaneously definite sequence. or in a
a protective conductor connecting exposed conductive parts of equipment to the main earthling terminal.
Class I equipment
equipment in which protection against electric shock does not rely on basic insulation only, but which includes means for the connection of exposed conductive parts to a protective conductor in the fixed wiring of the installation.
EBCS-1 0 1995
Class II equipment
'equipment in which protection against electric shock does not rely on basic insulation only, but in which additional safety precautions such as supplementary
J
insulation ate provided, there being no provision for the connection of exposed metalwork of the equipment to a protective conductor, and no refianc-e upon precautions to be taken in the fixed wiring of the installation.
conduit
a part of a closed wiring system for cables in electrical installati()fis, allowing them to be drawn in and/or replaced, but not inserted laterally.
cutren/-permit
a written petrfiission from Authority having jurisdiction to a supply authority to the effect that electric energy may be supplied to a particular installation.
conneC/or
the part of a cable coupler or of an appliance coupler which is prOVided with female contacts and is intended to be attached to the end of the flexible cable remote from the supply.
contractor
servant or agent, by
himself or his 'associates, employees, servants or agents perfOIinS or engages to perform either for his own use and berrefit Or for that of 'another and for o-r without remunefation Code applies.
current-carrying capacity of a conductor
the maximum
by a
cowductot under specified conditions without its steady state temperature exceeding a specified value.
cu"ent-usmg
equipment
equipment which converfs electrical energy into another form of energy, such as light, heat, or motive power.
EBCS-10 1995
danger
risk of injury to persons (and livestock where expected to be present) from: a) b) fire, electric shock, and bums arising from the use of electrical energy; mechanical movement of electric~lly controlled equipment, in so far as such danger is intended to be prevented by electrical emergency switching or by ~lectrical ~witching for mechanical maintenance of nop-electrical parts of such equipment.
the magnitude of the current (r.m.s. valll,e for a.c.) to be carried by the circuit in normal service. contact of perSOnSor livestock with live parts which may result in electric shock.
direct contact
distribution board
an assembly containing switching or prote~tive devices (e.g. fuses or circuit-breakers) associated with one or more outgoing circuits fed from one or more incoming circuits, together with tenninals for the neutral arid protective circuit conductors. signalling and other control devices.
includ~d in the board Qr may be provided s~parately. distribution circuit circuit cQnn~cting the origin of the installation to: a) an item of switchgear, b) an item of controlgear, or c) a distribution board to which one or more final circuits or items of current usmg equipment are connected. (~ee also final circuit.)
A distribution circuit may also connect the origin of an installation to an outlying building or separate sometimes called a sub-main. double insulation insulation comprising insulation. installation, when it is
EBCS-1 0 1995
duct
a closed passageway formed underground or in a structure and intende~ to receive one or more cables which may be drawn in.
ducting earth
(see cable ducting) the conductive mass of the Earth, whose electric potential at any point is conventionally taken as zero.
earth electrode
a conductor or group of conductors in intimate contact with, and providing an electrical connection to, earth.
the resistance of an earth electrode to earth. a fault current which flows to earth. the impedance of the earth-fault current loop starting and ending at the point of earth fault. (a) the circuit protective (c) the earth return path; (d) the path through the earthen neutral point of the transformer and the transformer winding; and the phase conduCtor from the transformer to the point of fault. The earth fault loop comprises the conductor; followiBg, starting at the point of fault: (b) the consumer's earthing terminal and earthing conductor;
earth-leakage
current
in a circuit
and extraneous-
conductive-parts are maintained at substantially the same potential by bonding, such that, under fault conditions, the differences in potential between simultaneously accessible exposed extraneous-conductive-parts will not cause electric shock. earthing and
the act of connecting the exposed-conductive parts of an installation to the main earthing terminal of an installation.
EBCS-10 1995
--
--
--------~---------------------'---
earthing conductor
a protective conductor connecting the main earthing terminal of an installation to an earth electrode or to other means of earthing.
electric shock
a dangerous physiological effect resulting from the passing of an electric current through a human body or livestock.
electrical equipment
as generation, apparatus,
conversion, measuring
transmission, distribution or utilization of electrical energy, transformers, instruments, protective devices, wiring materials, accessories, appliances and luminaries. electrical installation an assembly of associated electrical equipment supplied from a common origin to fulfil a specific purpose and having certain coordinated characteristics. earth electrodes located at such a distance from one another that the maximum current likely to flow through one of them does not significantly affect the potential of the other(s).
electrically independent
earth electrodes
)
electrode boUer, electrode water heater
equipment for the electrical heating of water or electrolyte by the passage of an electric current between electrodes immersed in the water or electrolyte.
emergency switching intended to stop a dangerous movement. rapid cutting off of electrical energy to remove any unexpected hazard to persons, livestock, or property.
enclosure
a part providing
an appropriate
degree of protection
of
equipment against certain external influences and a defined degree of protection against contact with live parts from any direction. equipment (abbr., see electrical equipment).
EBCS-1 0 1995
equipotential bonding
external influence
any influence external to an electrical installation which affects the design and safe operation of that installation.
fault
a circuit condition in which current flows through an abnormal or unintended path. This may result from an insulation failure or the bridging of insulation. Conventionally the impedance between live conductors or between live conductors and exposed or extraneousconductive-parts at the fault position is considered negligible.
a current resulting' from a fault. a conductor or group of conductors that transmit electrical energy from a service supply, transformer, switchboard; distribution centre, 'generator, or other source of supply to branch circuit overcurrent device.
final circuit
fIXed equipment
equipment fastened to a support or otherwise secured in specific location. a wiring system designed to provide mechanical flexibility in use without degradation of the electrical components.
10
EBCS-10 1995
funcJionaJ earthing
any extra-low voltage system in which not all of the protective measures required for SELV have been applied.
fuse
a part of a fuse designed to melt when the fuse operates. a part of a fuse, including the fuse element(s), which requires replacement by a new or renewable fuse link after the fuse has operated and before the fuse is put back into service.
a room or location in which air is heated to a high temperature and in which the rekrtive humidity is normally low, rising for short periods of time only when water is poured over the heater.
indirect contact
contact of persons or livestock with exposed-conductive-parts live by a fault and which may result in electric shock.
made
installation (abbr., see electrical installation). insulation suitable non-conductive material enclosing, surrounding, or
supporting a conductor. isolation a function intended to cut off for reasons of safety the supply from all, or a discrete section, of the installation by separating the installation or section from ~very source of electrical energy. isoilltor a mechanical switching device which provides the function of isolation.
EBCS-10 1995
11
live part
a conductor or conductive part intended to be energised in nonnal use, including a neutral conductor.
luminaire
bquipment which distributes, filters, or transfonns the light from one or more lamps, and which includes any parts necessary for supporting, fixing and protecting the lamps, but not the lamps themselves, and where necessary, circuit auxiliaries together with the means for connecting them to the supply. For the purpose of the regulations a lamp holder, however, supported is deemed to be a luminaire.
a means, comprising an LSC outlet and an LSC plug, providing mecl1a.n-malsupport for a lu.minaire and the electrical connection to and disconnection from a fixed wiring installation. a combination of one or more low-voltage switching devices together with associated control, measuring signalling protective, regulating equipment, etc., completely assembled under the responsibility of the manufacturer with all the internal electrical and mechanical interconnection and structural parts. The components of the assembly may be electro mechanical or electronic. The assembly may be either type-tested or partially type-tested.
the tenninal
}lrotective conductors, including equipotential bonding conductors, and conductors for functional earthing if any, to the means of earthing.
mechanical maintenance
of equipment,
EBCS-1 0 1995
neutral conductor
a conductor
contributing' to the transmission of electrical energy. nominal voltage (see voltage, nominal). obstacle a part preventing unintentional preventing deliberate contact. origin of an installation the position at which electrical energy is delivered to an electrical installation. a current exceeding the rated value. For conductors the rated value is the current-carrying- capacity. overcurrent detection \ contact with live parts but not
overcurrent
a method of establishing that the value of current in a circuit exceeds a predetermined value for a specified length of time.
an overcurrent occurring in a circuit which is electrically sound. the official written permission of the Authority having jurisdiction on a form provided for the purpose, authorizing commenced on any electrical installation. work to be
phase conductor
a conductor of an a.c. system for the transmission of electrical energy other than a neutral conductor. The term also means the equivalent conductor of a d.c. system unless otherwise specified in this Code.
plug
a device, provided with contact pins, which is intended to be attached to a flexible cable, and which can be engaged with a socket-outlet or with a connector.
point
a termination
current-using equipment. portable equipment electrical equipment which is moved while in operation or which can easily be moved from one place to another while connected to the supply.
EBCS-1 0 1995
13
the value of overcurrent at a given point in a circuit resulting from a fault of negligible impedance between live conductors having a difference of potential under normal operating conditions, or between a live' conductor and an exposed-conductive-part.
protective conductor
a conductor used for some measures of protection against electric shock and intended for connecting together any of the following parts (refer to Figure 1.1): (a) exposed conductive parts (b) extraneous conductive parts (c) the main earthing terminal (d) earth electrode(s) (e) the earthen point of the source, or an artificial neutral.
;-
raceway
an enclosed channel designed expressly for holding wires, cables, or busbars, with additional function as permitted in this Code.
a system in which the nominal phase to phase voltage does not exceed 110.0V ahd the nominal phase to earth 'voltage does not exceed 63.5V.
reinforced insulation
single insulation applied to live parts, which proyides a degree of protection against electric shock equivalent to double insulation standard .
. 14
EBCS-10 1995
Protective conductors circuit protective conductor main equipotential bonding conductors earthing conductOr supplementary equipotential bonding conductors(where required)
.1
2
3
4
B M C P T E
Main earthing terminal Exposed conductive part Extraneous conductive part Main metallic water pipe Earth electrode Other means of earthing
residual current
the vector sum of the instantaneous values of current flowing through all live conductors of a circuit at a point in the electrical installation.
a mechanical switching device or association of devices intended to cause the opening of the contacts when the residual current attains a given value under specified conditions.
residual current which causes the residual current device to operate under specified conditions.
EBCS-10 1995
15
the surface area of ground (around an earth electrode) on which a significant voltage gradient may exist. a location comprised mainly of metallic or conductive surrounding parts. within which it is likely that a person will come into contact through a substantial portion of his body with the conductive surrounding parts and where the possibility limited. of preventing this contact is
a final circuit arranged in the form of a ring and connected to a single point of supply.
safety service
an electrical system for electrical equipment provided to protect or warn persons in the event of a hazard, or essential to their evacuation from a location. an extra-low voltage system which is electrically
1iLV
separated from Earth and from other systems in such a way that a single fault cannot give rise to the risk of electric shock. service the conductors and equipment for delivering energy from the electricity supply system to the wiring system of the premises served. shock (see electric shock). a current passing through the body of a person or livestock such as to cause electric shock and having characteristics likely to cause dangerous effects. short-circuit current an overcurrent resulting from a fault of negligible
shock current
impedance between live conductors having a difference in potential under normal operating conditions.
simultaneously accessible parts
conductors or conductive parts which can be touched simultaneously by a person or, in locations specifically intended for them, by livestock.
16
EBCS-10 1995
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING"CODESTANDARD
Simultaneously
a device, provided with female contacts, which is intended to be installed with the fixed wiring, and intended to receive a plug. A luminaire track system is not regarded as a socket-outlet system.
spur
a branch from a ring final circuit. electrical equipment which is either fixed, or equipment having a mass exceeding 18.0kg and not provided with a carrying handle. independent insulation applied in addition to basic insulation in order to provide protection against electric shock in the event of a failure of basic insulation. any municipal supplying corporation, power commission, or energy company intended or person for sale or
stationary equipment
supplementary
insulation
supply authority
electrical
a mechanical device capable of making, carrying and breaking current under .normal circuit conditions, which may include specified operating overload conditions, and also of carrying for a specified time currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such as those of short-circuit. It may also be capable of making, but not breaking, short-circuit currents.
switch, linked
a switch the contacts of which are so arranged as to make or break all poles simultaneously or in a definite sequence.
switchboard
an assembly of switchgear with or without instruments, but the term does not apply to groups of local switches in final circuits.
switchgear
an assembly
switching
apparatus
for
EBCS-10 1995
17
system
an electrical system consisting of a single source of electrical energy and an installation. For the purpose of this 'Code, the .system adopted shall be IT system. A system having one point of the source of energy directly earthen, the exposed-conductive-parts of the installation being connected to. earth electrodes electrically ihdependent of the earth electrodes of the.source, (see Figure 1.2).
an enclosure containing" equipment for the purpose of taking a temporary electrical supply safely from an item of street furniture.
conductors,- or 600.0Y a.c. or 900.0Y d.c. between conductors and earth. The actual voltage of the installation may differ from the nominal value by a quantity within normal tolerance.
18
EBCS-10 1995
SOURCE OF ENERJi
1I
L2
L3
~
CONSUMERS
SOURCE EARlH
rI
,
I
I I
-----, J'~'~\.-I I I
,
I
I.
EXPOSED CONDUCTJV
, I
I , I
I EQUf'tolENl IN INStALLAllON -
I
I
,
.J
__
,
INSlAUAllOi
INSlALLAlI~
fAR1H
ELE:ClROOE
(see reduced low voltage system). an assembly made up of cable or busbars and parts which secure and, if necessary, enclose the cable or busbars.
wiring system.
ETHIOPIAN
EBCS-10 1995
19
SECTION
9ENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1
ADMINISTRATIVE
2.1.2 Permit
(1) Electric~l contractors or others responsible for the carrying out of the work shall obtain a permit from the Authority having jurisdiction before commencing work with respect to installation, alteration, repair, or extension of any electrical equipment.
20
EBCS-10 1995
2.1.8 Re-inspection
(1) The Authority having jurisdiction reserves the right to re-inspect at any time electrical installation notwithstanding any previous inspection and acceptance, if and when it considers suc~ action to be necessary.
EBCS-1 0 1995
21
permission shall be obtained befo~ proceeding with the work, but this special permission shall apply only to the particular installation for which it is given.
22
EBCS-1 0 1995
1.1
1.1.1
TECHNICAL
Conventional Symbols
(1) Graphical symbols that are to be used in all drawings, wiring plans, etc for electrical installations of buildings shall be as indicated in Section 26 of this Code.
1.1.1
Coordination
(1) Proper coordination and collaboration between the architect, building engineer and the electrical engineer shall be effected from the planning stage of the installation.
(2) The provisions that will be needed for tile accommodation of substation, transformer, switch
room, lift wells and other appurtenant rooms, service cable ducts, rising mains and distribution cables,sub-distribution boards, openings and chases in floor and walls for all required electrical installation, etc, shall be specified in advance.
2.1.3
(1) The ideal location of an electrical subsbttion for a group of buildings would be at the load centre and shall be located on the ground floor.
(2) In multi-storeyed buildings, the substation shall preferably be installed on the lowest floor
level, but direct access from the street for installation or removal of the equipment shall be provided. The floor level of the substation or switch room shall !>eabove the highest flood level ofthe locality. 'In this case, the load centre would be somewhere between the geometrical centre andthe air-conditioning plant room. (3) The availability of power lines nearby may also be kept in view while deciding the location of the substation.
2.2.4
(I) In allocating area of a substation, it shall be noted that the flow of electric power is from su~ly company's room to high tension room, then to transformer and finally to the low voltage switchgear room. The layout of rooms shall be in accordance with this flow.
EBCS-10 1995
23
(2) The following rooms are required in a substation: a) Switchgear Room - Supply 60mpany's switchgear room and/or space for meters. b) Transformer Rooms - The number and size of transformer rooms shall be ascertained from the total power requirement of the consumer. c) Low-Voltage Switch RoomS - The floor area requirement in respect of low voltage
d) Stand-by Generators.
A room space not less than 6.0m x 9.0m may be provided for
e) Location of Switch Rooms - In larg~ installations other than where a substation is provided, a separate switch room shall be provided; this s,hall be located as closely as possible to the electrical load centre and suitable ducts shall be laid with minimum number of bends from the point of entry of the supply to the position of the main switchgear. The switch room shall also be placed in such a position that rising ducts may readily be provided therefrom to the upper floors of the building in one straight vertical run~ In larger buildings, more than one rising duct and horizontal ducts may also be required for running cable from the switch room to the foot of each rising main. Such cable ducts shall be reserved for .the electrical services only which may, however, include medium and low voltage installation, installations should be suitably segregated. 2.2.5 Location and Requirements of Distribution Boards such as call-bell system,s; telephone
(1) The electrical control gear distribution boards and other apparatus, which are required on each floor may conveniently be mouuted adjacent to the rising mains, and adequate space should be provided at each floor for this purpose. 2.2.6 Location and Requirements of PBXlPABX Rooms shall be obtained from the
relevant authority and adequate space should be provided for installation of t!te boards.
24
EBCS-10 1995
2.3
2.3.1 General
(1) The design and planning of an electrical installation shall take into account all the prevailing conditionswhich may include some .or all of the following: a) Type of supply. b) Envisaged load having regard to the requirements of the owner or occupant. c) The probable modifications and future extensions. d) The degree of electrical and mechanical protection necessary. e) The probable operation and maintenance cost taking into account the electricity supply tariffs available.
)
2.3.3 Design
(1) The design of electrical installation shall ensure: a) the protection of persons, livestock and property; b) the proper functioning of the electrical installation for the intended use. (2) The information required as a basis for design shall be: a) nature of current: a.c. and/or d.c.
EBCS-10 1995
ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
OF BUILDtNGS
b) nature and number of conductors: i) for a.c.: - phase conductor(s); - neutral conductor; - protective conductor. ii) for d.c.: - conductors equivalent to' those listed above. c) d) e) f) g) h) i) voltage and voltage tolerances; frequency and frequency tolerance; maximum current allowable; prospective short-circuit current; nature of demand; emergency supply or supplies; environmental conditions.
(3) The design shall comply with the requirements of this Code.
(1) Each piece of electrical equipment shall bear such of the following markings as may be necessary to identify the equipment and ensure that it is suitable for the particular installation: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) The maker's name, trademark, or other recognized symbol of identification. Catalogue number or type. Voltage. Rated load amperes. Watts, volt-amperes, or horsepower. Whether for a.c., d.c., or both. Number of phases. Frequency in Hertz. Rated load speed in revolution per minute. Designation of terminals. Whether for continuous or intermittent duty. Evidence of approval. Such other marking as may be necessary to ensure safe and proper operation.
D
k) 1) m)
26
EBCS-10 1995
(2) Each service box, at the time of installation, shall be marked in a conspicuous, legible, and pennanent manner to indicate clearly the maximum rating of the overcurrent device which may be used for this installation. (3) At each distribution point, circuit breakers, fuses, and switches shall be marked, adjacent thereto, in a conspicuous and legible manner to indicate clearly: a) which installation or portion of installation they protect or control; b) the maximum rating of overcurrent device that is permitted.
2.4.5 Maintainability
(1)An assessment shall be made of the frequency and quality of maintenance the installation canreasonably be expected to receive during its intended life. (2)Where an authority is to be responsible for the operation of the installation, that authority shallbe consulted.
EBCS-10 1995
27
this Code, having regard to the frequency and quality of maintenance expected: a) Any periodic inspection and testing and maintenance and repairs likely to be necessary during the intended .life can be readily and safely carried out. b) The effectiveness ensured. of the protective measures for safety during the intended life
IS
c) The reliability of equipment fot proper functioning of the installation is appropriate to the intended life.
2.4.6 Enclosures
(1) Degree of protection provided by enclosures for ~lectrical equipment shall be in accordance with mc 529.
28
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION
LJ..JUMINA TION
3.1
SCOPE
(I) This Section of the Code gives guidance on design and installation of artificial lighting systemsin interio.rs; it also applies to artificial lighting of outdoor areas.
3.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(l) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisionsof the Ethiopian Building Code Standards on Electrical Installation of Buildings. (a) BS 8206: 1985 DIN 5035:1990 Part 1 - Lighting for Building. Part 1 - Artificial Lighting, Terminology and General Requirements. Part 2 - Artificial Lighting, Recommended Values for Lighting Parameters for Indoor and Outdoor Workplaces. Part ~ - Artificial Lighting of Interiors, Hospital Lighting. Part 4- Artificial Lighting of Interiors, Special Recommendations for Lighting Educational establishments
(b)
Part 5 - Artificial Lighting of Interiors, Emergency Lighting. Part 7 - Artificial Lighting ofInteriors, Lighting of Rooms with VDU Workstation or VDU Assisted Workplaces.
EBCS-10 1995
29
3.3
DEFINITIONS
.
(1) For the purpose of this Section of the Code, the following definitions shall apply in addition to the terms defined in Section 1.
the arithmetical mean of the illuminance in a room or in a room zone being defined as that area of a room in which the same type of activity is performed at a number of work-places or which is used for similar purposes.
En'
the reciprocal of the light loss factor. the ratio of the luminous flux reflected from a surface to the luminous flux incident on it.
general lighting
average
illuminance
with
a certain
degree
of
localized lighting
illuminance
work
area (see
local lighting
lighting for individual workplace in addition to the general lighting produced by placing luminaries close to the visual task and supplemented by a general lighting (see Figure 3.1).
30
EBCS-1 0 1995
SECTION 3: ILLUMINATION
1\/
/\
1\
\/
. 1\
.._---_
..---.-
- :-;-.-.
\/
/\
\/
1\
\
" I \ I \ I \
I
I
A
I \
I \
;. a) grouped
b)awitched
/\ 1\
V \
/ V \
B
1\ 1\
I/\ \
/ \
/\
EBCS-10 1995
31
glare
a condition in which vision is affected by an excessive luminance and/or excessive differences in luminance in the visual field (i.e; parts of this field are excessively bright).
Note:
disability glare, defmed as glare causing an actual physiological reduction in visual capability (impaired, perception of contrasts and forms), and
discomfort glare, defined as glare considered solely in terms of its psychological effect on the occupant. Discomfort glare experienced by the occupant of a room increases with time and leads to premature fatigue and a reduction in performance, performance attitude, and well-being.
direct glare
reflected glare
glare and contrast reduction caused by reflection of high luminance from glossy surfaces.
Note:
The main disturbances caused by such reflection are contrast reduction, and impaired accommodation and fusion.
colour appearance
the chromaticity of an ilIuminant and is generally expressed as the colour impression received when looking at a light source.
Note:
The colour of the light emitted by a near-white into three classes (see Table 3.1).
temperature (CCT). Each lamp type has a specific CCT; but for practical use, they have been grouped
5300 3300
Correlated colour temperature Intermediate whlte)- TW Warm (white) (daylight(white) NW Cool WW CCT CI18S
H
32
EBCS1 0 1995
SECTION 3: ILLUMINATION
c%ur rendering
Note:
the relationship between the original colour of an object and the colour in which it is rendered by artificial lighting.
The ability of light source to render colours of s~ace accurately can be conveniently quantified by' the CIE general colour rendering index. This index is based on the accuracy with which a set of test colour'are reproduced by the lampt of interest relative to how they are reproduced by an appropriate standard light source, identical agreement being given a value of tOO.Ou. Each lamp type has a specific CIE general colour rendering index; but for practical use they can be divided into a number of groups (see Table 3.2)
Typical application
R.>90
Wherever accurate colour matching is required; e.g. colour printing inspection. Wherever accurate colour judgements are
18
necessary and/or good colour rendering Is , essential to appearance; e.g. shops and other commercial premises.
60 < R~<80
Wherever moderate coiour rendering Is required.
40< R. < 60
Wherever colour rendering is 01 little significance but marked distortion 01 colour is acceptable.
20 < R. < 40
Wherever colour rendering Is 01 no Importance at all and. marked distortion 01 colour is acceptable.
emergency lighting
lighting designed to become operative promptly if the power supply to normal artificial lighting fails. an emergency lighting required for reasons of safety (general safety, prevention of accidents).
safety lighting
t For tabular florescent lamps apparent colour and colour rendering characteristics, refer to Table 3.4.
EBCS-10 1995
33
escape lighting
a specified minimum illuminance for emergency escape purposes, thus, permitting buildings and plant to be safely evacuated at any time during their utilization.
hazardous WOI'kplacu
sll/ety /igllting
lor partial/Ju
safety lighting designed to ensure that the work performed at such workplaces can be safely terminated in the manner required and the workplaces themselves evacuated' without danger.
Note:
Particular hazardous workplaces are those which represent an immediate risk of accident or a potential source of danger to third parties if the supply to the 'lighting should fail, raised platfonns, stages, race-courses and arenas counting as particularly hazardous workplaces. theatre
standby lighting
an emergency lighting which can assume the function of normal artificial lighting for a limited period so as to enable normal activities to continue. the interval between a failure in the power supply to, the normal artificial lighting and the provision of the required illuminance by the emergency lighting. the period of time for which an emergency lighting system is designed to operate. the minimum period of time during which an emergency lighting system shall still be capable of achieving the minimum illuminance specified for the given application.
systems.
response time
Note:
lI$efullife
the duration of an emergency lighting system from the date of its commissioning up to the point in time at which it only achieves the limit duration of operation. a luminary which mayor may not be provided witll its own power supply and which is used for safety lighting.
safety luminaries
,34
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 3: ILLUMINATION
a moulded luminaire bearing a graphical symbol to serve as an escape sign; it indicates and assist the ide~tification of. escape route.
3.4
3.4.1
LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS
D1umin~nce
(1) Recommended illuminance for different types of interiors, tasks and workspaces given in Table 3.5 and Table 3.6 shall be taken as the recommended minimum values on which the design and assessment of lighting install~ions are to be based. (2) For indoor workplaces that are manned full-time, a minimu~ rated illuminance of 200.01x shall be provided unless other factors (such as nature of operation, physiological reasons) require different values. (3) (it) In interiors designed for permanent human occupation, a minimum rated illuminance of
100.01x is required.
(b) If tasks are performed at fixed-location workplaces outdoors that correspond to tasks performed indoors (e.g. operation of wood-work machines), then a rated illuminance specified for such tasks in Table 3.5 for indoor workplaces shall be provided. / (4) At no stages in the useful life of the lighting installation shall the mean illuminance, E, obtained at the workplaces be less than 0.8 times the value ofthe rated illuminance; at no single workplace shall illuminance ever fall to less than 0.6 times the rated illuminance.
3.4.2 Luminance
(1) Reflectance in the working zone shall be planned so that the ratio between task luminance (inner field) and that of the surrounding of the task are no greater than approximately 3: 1. (2) Reflectance of from 0.2 to 0.5 are recommended for working surfaces such as bench and, ------------dt?,sk tops.
.
EBCS-10 1995
35
3.4.3 Glare
(1) Glare shall not be caused by lamps 0/ luminaries (direct glare) nor by reflection of high luminance from glossy surface (reflected glare). (2) Lamps with a high luminance (e.g. filament lamps and high discharge lamps) shall always be shielded. \I (3) In case of luminaries for local workplaces lighting, a direct view of the lamps shall be precluded by shielding or by arranging them in a suitable position.
36
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 3: ILLUMINATION
3.5
(1) The minimum illuminance of the safety lighting for escape routes shall be 1.0/x.
This
requirement applies to the centre line of an escape route along a horizontal plane O.2m above floor level.
(3) The rated duration of operation shall at least equal to the time that will be specified by safetY law to be enacted by the concerned government body. (4) The limit duration of operation shall be % (for l.Ohr) or % (for 3.0hr) of the rated duration. (5) Safety luminaries for escape routes shall be sited according to their luminance distribution so as to meet the requirements specified for safety lighting and in such a way that they cannot easily be rendered ineffective. (Principal locations for the sitting of safety luminaries are, thus, near the exits of escape routes and at poil}ts where it is necessary to emphasize the positions of potential hazards.)
(I) The minimum illuminance for such workplaces shall be O.1En (rated illuminance specified for the task and room of such workplaces in Table 3.5) but not less than IS.O/x. (2) The minimum illuminance for platform and theatre stages shall be 3.0/x, and I5.0/x for arenas and race-courses.
3.5.2.2
Colour rendering
(1) The colour rendering shall at least be equivalent to Group 3 so as to ensure that safety colours remain recognizable as such.
EBCS-1 0 1995
37
3.5.2.3
Response time
(1) The response time of safety lighting shall not exceed a maximum of 6.5s. (2) In case of raised platform, theatre stages, arenas and race-courses, the maximum response time shall be 1.0s.
3.5.2.4
(1) For workplaces, the lighting shall be effective for as long as the hazard subsists, with a minimum duration of 1.0min. (2) For raised platform, theatre stages, race-courses and arenas, the rated duration of operation shall at least be equal to the duration required by law.
3.5.2.5
(1) Safety luminaries shall be sited so as to ensure that the required illuminance is provided over the entire area in which hazardous tasks are carried out.
3.6.1 General
(1) The design objectives for lighting shall be to provide both good task visibility and a satisfactory visual environment. (2) (a) The lighting of workspaces shall ensure good visibility of the visual objects. (b) The lighting of workplaces shall also be conducive to concentration and performance attitudes, counteract premature fatigue and permit any potential hazards to be clearly recognized.
38
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 3: ILLUMINATION
shall be provided.
3.6.3 Offices
(I) As indicated on rated illuminance tables, for general offices illuminance of 500.01x and for drawing offices illuminance of 750.01x shall be provided. (2) Where VDU (Visual Display Units) are used, the illuminance shall be restricted to 500.01x or less to minimize the high brightness reflection from the screen and large luminance differences between screen, any source documents and the backgrounds against which these items are seen. (3) Where localized lighting is used, the ratio of illuminance between adjacent areas shall not be more than 3: 1 with a minimum illuminance for lUtycontinuously occupied area of 200.0/x. (4) Where locallightingjs used, the ratio of illuminance between task area and the surrounding area shall not exceed 3: 1. (5) A glare limiting index of 19 is appropriate for general office rooms and an index of 16 is desirable for drawing offices because of the more demanding nature of work. (6) Where daylight makes a substantial contribution, lamps with a CCT of 4000.0k or above should be used.
EBCS-10 1995
39
(4) Escape lighting shall be provided for public rooms, staircases and corridors and provisions shall be made for emergency lighting and exit signs.
special subjects shall be equipped with a supplementary lighting system to increase the vertical illuminance.
3.6.6 Hospitals
(1) The guideline values for hospital lighting set in Table 3.8 shall apply to all rooms and zones of a hospital. (2) The lighting of bedded areas shall be conducive to the well-being of the patient, while also ~nabling examination or treatment to be carried out. To achieve these goals: a) (i) the general lighting illuminance shall be nursing staff.
(ii) the mean luminance as perceived by the recumbent patients shall be limited to
IOO.Olx
40
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 3: ILLUMINATION
b) (i) Each bed shall be equipped with a rigidly mounted, adjustable luminaire. A rated illuminance of
(ii) 300.0lx
To avoid glare in multi-bed wards, the luminance of reading luminaries in the field vision of other patients shall not exceed IOOO.Ocd/m2
of
c) (i) For the examination and treatmen~ of patients at.the bedside, a rated horizontal illuminance of 300.Olx, inclusive of the general lighting, shall be provided O.ISm above the longitudinal axis of the plane of the bed surface. (ii) At no point along the axis in (i) above shall the illuminance be less than (iii)
ISO.Olx.
The uniformity ratio of illuminance Emin:Eishall here not be less than 1:2.
S.Olx
d) (i) Night watch lighting with illuminance of approximately keeping patients under observation during the night. . (ii) In wards occupied by infants, a rated illuminance of (3) (a) General lighting with a rated illuminance of
500.0lx
20.0lx
is recommended.
properties shall be provided for examination and treatment. (b) In addition to the general lighting an illuminance of at least required at the site of examination.
(4) IOOO.Olx
is generally
"
(a) The lighting in operating theatre shall always be designed in conjunction with the lighting of the operating theatre field. (b) In view of the illuminances of
20,OOOlx
to
IOO,OOO.Olx
the surrounding lighting shall be designed to reduce the adaptation problems which would be caused by extreme difference in the luminance between operating field and the surrounding area. (c) The illuminance of the surrounding light shall not be less than I.Om above floor level.
IOOO.Olx
at a height of
(5) (a) Standby lighting system shall be provided for the operating theatres, anaesthetic rooms, sterilizing sinks and recovery rooms.
EBCS-10 1995
41
(b) The standby lighting of the -operating table should be equal in all respects to the normal lighting of this area, and should be of the maintained type to ensure continuous illumination.
800
900
Plane'a;-'
be~ lurf.lce l
C> C>
0'
::
gl ....
lG
3.7
3.7.1
(1) For outdoor workspaces, circulation areas/zones and work roads, the recommended rated illuminances in Table 3.6 shall be provided and they are to be taken as the recommended minimum values. (2) If the type of application of interest to the user is not listed, the recommended specified for a similar space shall be applied analogously. 3.7.2 Colour Rendering Group values
(1) At fixed location workspaces, the colour rendering capability shall at . least meet the requirements of Group 3t; safety colours and colours used for classification purposes shall be recognizable as such.
Data on the group to which lamps belong with respect to their colour rendering capability are given in product lists of manufacturers.
42
EBCS-1 0 1995
SECTION 3: ILLUMINATION
(2) If the outdoor workplace is floodlight, the luminaries used shall be so located and arranged that hazards due to direct glare are precluded.
EBCS-10 1995
43
I1c
i;~' :
VI
.J:>. .J:>.
Table 3.3 Typical characteristics of lighting sources used for general lighting
Hot cathode Characteristics Tungsten Filament Tungsten halogen Low-pressure sodium High-pressure sodium tul;lular fluorescent Cold cathode High-pressure mercury fluorescent Mercury halide
tubular
fluorescent
8 to 18
18
to 24
100 to 175
65 to 120
35 to 90
40 to 60
35 to 55
65 to 85
25 to 1500
100 to 2000
10 to 200
50 to 1000
to
125
20 W/mto 30 W/m
50 to 2000
250 to 10000
Range of nominal life (h) Colour rendering group 1000 to 2000 1A 2000 to 4000 1A 6000 to 12000 6000 to 12000 5000 to 10000
20000
5000 to 10000
5000 to 10000
Non existent
2 or 4
depending on lamp pressure
should be consulted.
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Operating
position
Horizontal
Any
Any
Some restrictien
6 to 12
4 to 7
5
10
3600 to 4400
3
Not applicable
10
4000
CCT(K)
2200
2700 to 6500
Note:
Detailed information about any specific lamp type should be obtained from the manufacturer.
Table 3.4 Tubular fluorescent lamps apparent colour and colour rendering characteristics of lamps in general use
Lamp name EmphasizesColour2givenCool colour extent. reds slightly subdued, blues subdued and shifted 18 light/colour all blues blues and, 1A Apparentgreens coloursblue-violets, 3 3 Warm redsemits I offices and shops extent, group Equal to InorthskyIntermediate less extent, Commercial/public Typical application greens to isviolets; some yellows Emphasizes subdues Warmto and deep towards violet 1 is homes; f'nd less particularly where a yellows yellows oranges, Cool oranges,and and similar emphasis 1A rendering matching and BSneeded officesrequiredto daylight reds complyingis with good Similar to Inorth 18 light; emphasizes Ibutgreen whereproportionbuildingsmatching admitted tungsten yellows, and, greens; critical, Factories, significant Factories, Hotels, rendering colourshops, where good,required,required and shops as deep is [subdues areas, critical rendering replacement north sky e.g. colour shops, restaurants, hotels required for Used but 95:Part fl<Jt or matching is and to rendering or homes but not with Colour rendering characteristicsSocial where finecolour of judgements matching wheredaylight Used colour colour a similar are together critical, filament lamps shift towards violet hospitals, art galleries and museums high luminous efficacy
"
VI
"
0\
illuminance
appearance
1 Colour rendering 3 3 IAdjustment spaces; 3ww,nw 3ClassEn of areas. of circulationEn2of Remark illuminancedirect ww,nw shed entrance For personsglare2 interior. rated shed of is 2 Only = 4 3 entrancethe!is Only luminaries adjoining areatoof The area En2 luminariesColour to be En1~0.15the6 adjoining interior ww,nw 3 The interior 'limitation adjoining tEn of the adjoining 3 illuminated spaces 0,2 Ent
I
--
"
00
2
Rated Type of interior and/or task illuminance
En
3
Colour appearance
I
4
Colour! rendenn
--
5
.
6
Remark
in~
1_
I
'I
----1
I
group_
I
I
I
I
I I
300
ww,nw
I Workplace-oriented
general lighting;
minimum of 0.8 En at workplace 3.2 Offices 3.3 Open-plan offices with average 1000 750 rooms 300 100 200 500 Data processing rooms ~ ww,n', ww,nw ww,nw ww,nw
V'IW,nw
500
ww,nw
2A
High reflectance: ceiling: 0.7 minimum, walls/partitions: 0.5 minimum, permitted local workplace lighting
2
2A 2A
2,
2A 2A
En referred to working
plane of
3.8
ww,nw
drawing board of 75 to the horizontal at the centre point of the board and a height of 1.2m.
~ \0
v. o
than 0.1 mm 6.1 Production plants of small parts manual not requiring 7.1 Hammer-forging Colour V deviations plant stations intervention machining plants permissible deviations mm cold rolled sectional strip mills, foundrl&! less than 0.1greater 1 limitation 2 Cliiss glare 3 2A wvr,nw32A ww,nw 1 ww,nw,tw g, Colourexceed 5oo.01x 2 may 3451rendering operational Whereww,nwgroup for direct required of 6 appearance
(conte'd)
100 50 200 200 300 500 500 300 750 200 illuminance,
En'
Vl
9.1
group 42 watch 351A limitation machines; 1A 1 500 1 nw,tw1 2 6 ww,nw,tw ww,nwappearance ww,nw Jewellery recommended of and glare turning, Electrical Localww,nw,tw Industry (conte'd) Industry,3131B Work engineering2A at Colour 2A3 workplace lighting 2 Woodworking woodworking direct clock making Class Colour rendering 11.6 winding work coils andrebating, slotting, mediumcalibration chamfering, dressing, marquetry Industry components gauge sawing,sinking armatures with cutting, wire of 11.1 10.1 Manufacture of jewellery Steam pits
lighting
___
OOO+OI}o(. WW.OW
lC)CaJ _ClIrk,?,I~~ -
1-
,lighting
side.
~I-
edge
runners, grinding
5
Class of direct glare limitation
InJ!
Remark
13
Leather
Industry
(conte'd) 750
13.4 Leather dyeing (mechanical) 13.5 Quality control 13.5.1 Medium standard 13.5.2 High standard 13.5.3 Very high standard 13.6 Colour matching
2A
For surface inspection tasks, provide supplementary lighting with oblique lighting incidence. Local workplace recommended.
18 18 18
1A
1,
1 1
Shield from light sources with a different iIIuminant. Local workplace lighting recommended.
and processing
of textiles
--
Workplaces Combing,
and work zones at baths and in areas drawing, teasing, sizing, card jute and spinning, hemp spinning spoiling and 500 750 750 1000 colour matching 1000 1500 300 300 knitting, and 200 washing, ironing, devilling and
ww,nw
ww,nw ww,nw
3
2A
winding, twisting, braiding, weaving Comb pricking; 14.6 Millinery 14.7 Trimming;
2A 2A 2A 2A 1A 2A
H.5
perching;
lighting
burling
For colour matchIng tasks, shield from light sources with a different illuminant.
I
VI VI
nw,tw
ww,nw
10 20
1 of thepath -.. cross traffic and a speed limit of 50.0km/h or uminance, En path. heavy 30.0km/h 2 Parking 3.1 Container transshipment areas circulation areas areas roads with loading and unloading zone or with 1.3.2 Works 1.1 GatesOpen storage areas and 3.1.1
Rated 50 20 Sn~ 3 5 in
!!
ance,
I I i i I I
I required in containers.
0\
ance,
EN
Table 3.7
Colour appearance 3 32 1 stacksRemarks glareplatforms 5 aids ww:nw ww,nw ww,nw wW,nw ww,nw Room for If necessary, class of 6 2 teachingcabinetsand collections lighting for Community objects 4direct1 supplementary and shelves. rooms 23 restriction exhibited, lighting for Quality rendering) Colour property group 3.6 above
(conte'd)
Ix 2 4 in Rated
35 I Remarks property rendering restriction Colour glare Quality class of direct appearance Colour
group
4 General,teachlng rooms 4.1 Rooms for pre-schooling purposes 4.2 Teaching rooms, if not included under 4.3 below 4.3 Teaching rooms with a day-light factor ..Q (see DIN 5034 Part 1) less than 1% at the most unfavourable working position, teaching rooms used chiefly in the evening or specially for adult education 4.4 Open-plan teaching spaces - with high reflectance' - with medium reflectance 300 300' ww,nw ww,nw
2 2
50ci
I
ww,nw
750 1000
I I
ww,nw ww,nw
2 2
1t
1) At the working positions, a minimum of O.BS is required. 2) The TIluminancerequired if the room is put to other uses can be attained by switching parts of the lighting system 3) High reflectance is deemed to be at least 0.7 for the ceiling, at least 0.5 for the walls or room dividers.
l-_,nw
ww,nw ww,nw ww,nw ww,nw ww,nw
ww,nw I I I I I
1t
l
i
I I
II
Kitchens for teaching purposes Rooms for manual training Rooms for handicrafts, sewing, typewriting Drawing, painting Physics, chemistry and biology Laboratories, demonstration rooms Technical drawing'
I
I
2 2 2
1
I
I I
I
2 2
1
2 2
1 1 1
4) En with respect ofuse at 75 from the positioned as for the drawing-board horizontal, the centre of the board being 7at a height of 1.2m
6 Lecture theatres 6.1 Lecture theatres with windows 6.2 Lecture theatres without windows
- --1-I
700
---lI I I
~._~
I
J.----.--+----:
I
---
500 750
ww,nw ww,nw
2
I
t The
values of the luminance restriction curve belonging to the next highest nominal illuminance
shall be observed
Room type
of
I um nat on
I General lighting I Reading lighting Night watch lighting Examination lighting
...
-i--~- t
i
I
Ratad
I I
'I
U hI
colour
I I
I I
illuminance, n~ E I ..
200
='
91t ng
renderinggro up
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
i i
co our
ww
I
i
I
-r~-ww
I
--,
L
!
I Remarks
Reduced
Infants ward
L
I
300
: I
ww ww ww ww
:
I !
I
I I
r--'I
Approximately
5.0~
'I I
200
I'
I I .
and
I :
I
I 500
L-I
20
>1000
I~
I i I
ww,nw
1
1
I I I
ww,nw,
--+
I i
I
----~
I---~---I
I I
I I I
examination
1 1
I ,
or
hting
1 1
For ophthalmic
examination
1
1 1 1 If required, switchable controllable illuminance or to give lower values
1 1
for radiographic
examination
Table 3.8
colour Rated colour nwtw1 11 WW 1nw ww 300 Illuminance: desired to 500 100 100000.0Ix, lighting, ww,nw restriction 1ooo.01x General lighting for changing of direct minimum;glarefrom patients 1000 lightinglighting ww,nw Workplace Remarks 20000rendering Reduced glare for if General room required. class for Quality Type of activity / Type of in Ughting group1) Wash rooms treatment rooms (conte,d) rooms areas Medicinal preparation baths treatment Intensive theatre examinations Operating care areas Dialysis for dermatological suites for dentalrooms examinations
s.. !!
illuminance
s..
SECTION
CONDUCTORS
4.1
SCOPE
1) This Section of the Code specifies the nom inal cross-sectional areas of conductors in electric cables and cords used for lighting, appliance and power supply circuits for a nominal voltage not exceeding 1.0kV. 2) The conductors include solid and stranded copper and aluminium conductors in cables for fixed installation and flexible copper conductors. 3) The provisions of this Section do not apply to conductors for telecommunication purposes.
4.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standards on Electrical Installation of Buildings. (a) BS 767]:]992 Requirements for Electrical Installation, lEE Wiring
Regulations Sixteenth Edition. (b) BS 6360:]991 (c) IEC 228:1976 (d) IEC 50(46]):]984 (e) IEC 364-5-523:1993 Specification for Conductors in Isolated Cables and Cords. Conductors of Insulated Cables. International Electrotechnical Vocabulary. Electrica] Installation of Buildings.
66
EBCS-1 0 1995
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
Canadian Electrical Code, Part I, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Sixteenth Edition.
4.3
DEFINITIONS
j
(1) For the purpose of this Section of the Code, the following definitions shall apply in addition to those terms defined in Section 1. conductor (of a cable) plain conductor a part of a cable which has the specific function of carrying current. a metal conductor in which the wire or wires are not coated with an additional metal. metal coated conductor a conductor in which eacn individual wire is covered with a thin layer of a different metal or metal alloy. solid conductor a conductor consisting of a single wire. (A Solid conductor may be circular or shaped otherwise.) shaped conductor stranded conductor a conductor the cross-section of which is other than circular. a conductor consisting of a number of individual wires, all or some of which generally have a helical form. (The stranded conductor may be circular or shaped otherwise.) flexible conductor a stranded conductor having wires of diameters small enough and so assembled that the conductor is suitable for use in a flexible cable. concentric conductor a conductor so constructed as to surround one or more insulated conductors. insulation (of a cable) insulating materials incorporated in a cable with the specific
function of withstanding voltage. extruded insulation insulation consisting generally of one layer of a thermoplastic or thermosetting material and applied by extrusion process.
EBCS-1 0 1995
67
insulation consisting of compressed mineral powder. an electrical screen of non-metallic and/or metallic material
an electrical screen of non-metallic material covering the insulation. a surrounding earthed metallic layer to confine the electric field within the cable and/or to protect the cable from external electrical influence. (Metallic sheaths, armours and earthed concentric conductors may also serve as shields).
an assembly comprising a conductor with its own insulation (and screen if any).
sheath (jacket)
a uniform and continuous circular covering of metallic or nonmetallic material, generally extruded.
oversheath
a non-metallic sheath applied over a metallic covering, constituting the outer-most sheath of the cable. a covering consisting of a metal tape(s) or wires, generally used to protect the cable form external mechanical effects. a cable having only one core. a cable having more than one core. a .cable having more than one core. a multicore cable having cores or groups of cores arranged in parallel flat formation.
armour
single-conductor
flexible cable
a cable which is required to be capable of being flexed while in service and of which the structure and materials are such as to fulfil this requirement.
68
EBCS-1 0 1995
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
cord
a flexible cable with a limited number of conductors of ~mall crosssectional area. an insulated cable designed to be suspended overhead and outdoors. a cable with or without a shield or a metallic sheath, intended to give off heat for heating purposes.
4.4 4.4.1
SIZE OF CONDUCTORS Phase Conductors in a.c. Circuits and Live Conductors in de circuits
(1) The minimum nominal cross-sectional area of conductor shall be: a) .1.0mm2 for cables and insulated copper conductors for power and lighting circuits; b) 10.0mm2 for bare copper conductors for power circuits; c) 16.0mm2 fo~ bare aluminium conductors for power circuits; .. d) O.5mm2 for flexible cables of copper conductors for extra low voltage.
4.4.2
Neutral Conducton
,.
l
(1) For a polyphase circuits in which imbalance may occur in normal service, the neutral conductor shall have a cross-sectional area adequate to carry the maximum connected load between the neutral and anyone ungrounded conductor. (2) For a polyphase circuit in which serious imbalance is unlikely to occur in normal service, other than a discharge lighting circuit, multicore cables incorporating a reduced neutral conductor may be used. When single-core cables are used in such circuits, the neutral conductor shall have a cross-sectional area appropriate to the expected value of the neutral current. (3) In a discharge lighting circuit, the neutral conductors shall have a cross-sectional area not .less than that of the phase conductor(s).
EBCS-10 1995
69
4.5 4.5.1
AMP ACITY OF WIRES, CABLES AND FLEXIBLE CORDS Conductor Operating Temperature
(1) The current to be carried by any conductor for sustained periods during normal operation shall be such that conductor operating temperature given in the appropriate table of currentcarrying capacity in Annex B of this Section is not exceeded.
4.5.2
(1) Except for a ring final circuit, cables connected in parallel shall be of the same construction, of cross-sectional area, length and disposition, without branch circuits and arranged so as to carry substantially equal current.
4.5.3
(1) Where a cable is to be connected to a bare conductor busbar, its type of insulation and/or sheath shall be suitable for the maximum operating temperature of the bare conductor or busbar.
4.5.4
Voltage Drop
(1) The size of conductors shall be, such that the voltage drop between the supply terminal and. fixed current-using equipment shall not exceed 4% of the nominal voltage of the supply line, when the conductors are carrying the full, load current.
70
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
(2) Flexible cord shall not be used: a) as a substitute for the fixed wiring of structures and shall not be: i) pennanently secured to any structural member; or
ii) run through holes in walls, ceilings, or floors; or iii) run through doorways, windows, or similar openings; b) at temperature above the temperature rating of the cord or at a temperature sufficiently low as to be liable to result in damage to the insulation or overall covering; c) for the suspension of any device weighing more than 2.3kg unless the cord and device assembly are marked as capable of supporting a weight upto 11.Okg. (3) Flexible cord shall be protected by insulating bushing or in some other acceptable manner where it enters or passes through the enclosure wall or the partitioning of a device or enters a lampholder. (4) Where a flexible cord is used as an extension cord or to plug into an appliance or other device, no live parts shall be exposed when one end is connected to a source of supply and the other end is free.
4.7
OLO
OF CONDUCTORS
V'
(1) Colour identification of conductors shall be as specified in Tables 4.1 anr 4.2
4.8
(1) Any cable must be capable of withstanding the maximum expected short-circuit current in its circuit for the maximum expected disconnection time of its protective device without exceeding the maximum pennissible temperature given in Table 4.3 ,,/
EBCS-10 1995
71
Phase Phase Function of of Blue Brown Phase Brown Brown or blackcorecore .Green-and-yellow' Colour(s) Green-and-yellow Green-and-yellow
Table 4.2
Colour identification of cores of non-flexible cable and bare conductors for fixed wiring
Function
Protective (including earthing) conductor Phase of a.c. single - phase circuit Neutral of a.c. single or three-phase circuit Phase R of 3- phase circuit Phase Y of 3-phase a.c. circuit Phase B of 3-phase a.c. circuit Positive of d.c. 2-wire circuit Negative of d.c. 2-wire circuit Outer (positive or negative) of d.c. 2-wire circuit derived from 3-wire system Positive of 3-wire d.c. circuit Middle wire of 3-wire d.c. circuit Negative of 3-wire d.c. circuit
I Colour identification
Green and yellow red or yellow or blue black red yellow blue red black red red black blue
72
EBCS-1 0 1995
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
above 300.6m2
EBCS-1 0 1995
73
ANNEX
PREFACE TO THE TABLES IN ANNEX At AND ANNEX Btt FO,R CABLES AND FLEXIBLE CORDS
A.I BASIS OF TABULATED CURRENT -CARRYING CAPACITY
The current-carrying capacity set out in Annex B takes account of IEC Publica~ion 364-5-523(1983), so far as the later is applicable. For types of cable not treated in the IEC publication (e.g. annoured cables), the current-carrying capacity of Annex B is based on data provided by ERA Technology Ltd.ttt, and the British Cable Makers' Confederation (see also ERA Report 69-30 'current Rating Standards for Distribution Cables"), The tabulated current-carrying' capacity relates to continuous service and is also known as the full thermal current rating' of the cable, corresponding to the conductor operating temperature indicated in the headings to the tables concerned. It is intended to provide for a satisfactory life of conductor and insulation subject to the thermal effects of carrying current for sustained periods in normal service. A cable may be seriously damaged, leading to early failure, or its service life may be significantly reduced, if it is operated for any prolonged period at a temperature higher than the indicated value. In addition, there are other considerations affecting the choice of the cross-sectional area of a conductor, such as the requirements for protection against electric shock, protection against thermal effects, overcurrent protection (see A.5 below), voltage drop (see A.7 below) and the limiting temperatures for terminals of equipment to which the conductors are connected.
t
tt
Annex A: Correction factors Annex B: Current-carrying capacity and voltage drop ERA Technologies Ltd, Cleave Road, Leatherhead, Surrey KT22 7SA
ttt 74
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
shown in Annex A of Section 8, in an ambient air temperature of 30C. The curr<?nt-carrying capacity given in the tables for a.c. operation apply only to frequencies in the range 49.0 to 61.0Hz. For other conditions, appropriate correction factors are to be applied as described below. The current ratings given for, single-core armoured cable are for the condition of armour bonded at 'both ends and to earth.
A.2
CORRECTION
FACTORS
FOR CURRENT-CARRYING
CAPACITY
capacity of a cable for continuous service is affected by grouping" by by partial or total enclosure in thennal insulating and for a.c., by
A.2.1 Grouping
-..I
Tables A.I, A.2 and A.3 give the correction factors to be applied to tPe tabulated currentcarrying capacity where cables or <rcuits are grouped.
Tables A.4 and A.S give the correction factor to be applied to the tabulated current-carrying capacity depending upon the actual ambient temperature of the location in which the cable is to <beinstalled.
In practice, the ambient air temperatures may be detennined by thennometers placed in free air as close as practicable to the position at which the cables are installed or are to be installed, subject to the provision that the measurements are not to be influenced by the heat arising from the cables; thus, if the measurements are made while the cables are loaded, the thennometers should be placed about 0.5m or ten times the overall diameter of the cable, which ever is the lesser, from the cables, in the horizontal phme, or 150.0mm below the lowest of the cables. Tables AA and A.5 do not take account of temperature increase, if any, due to solar or other infra-red radiations; where cables are subject to such radiation, the current-carrying, capacity may need to be specially calculated.
EBCS-10 1995
75
A.3
The current-carrying
in specified conditions without the conductors exceediQg the permissible limit of steady state temperature for the type of insulation concerned. The values of tabulated current represent the effective current carrying capacity only where no correction factor is applicable; otherwise, the current-carrying and thermal insulation, Irrespective
l!S
capacity corresponds
to the
tabulated value multiplied by the appropriate factor or factors for ambient temperature, grouping applicable. protective device associated with the conductors
concerned, the ambient temperature correction factors to be used when calculating currentcarrying capacity (as opposed to those used when selecting cable sizes) are those given in Table A.4.
A.4
CAPACITY
T<i OTHER
the current-carrying capacity of a cable for continuous service, under the particular installation conditIons concerned. It the value of current tabulated in Annex B for the type of cable and installation
method concerned, for a single circuit in an ambient temperature of 30C. , ~ Ib the design current of the circuit, i.e. the current intended to be carried by the circuit in normal service.
76
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 4: -CONDUCTORS
In
the nominal current or current setting of the device. protecting the circuit against overcurrent. the operating current (Le. the fusing current or tripping current for the conventional operating time) of the device protecting the circuit against overload.
/"
12
G -
A correction factor to be applied where the installation conditions differ from those for which values of current carrying capacity are tabulated in Annex B. The various correction factors are identified as follows:
c.
Cg Cj
for ambient temperature for grouping for thermal insulation for operating temperature of conductor.
Ct
In all circumstances, Iz must be not less than Ib, and In also must be not less than lb. Where the overcurrent device is intended to afford protection against overload,
12
must not
exceed 1.451. and In must not exceed Iz (see A.5 below). Where the overcurrent device is intended to afford short circuit protection only, greater than Iz and
12
In can be
A.5
OVERLOAD PROTECTION
Where overload protection is required, the type of protection provided does n9t affect the current-carrying capacity of a cable for continuous service (lz), but it may affect the choice of conductor size. The operating conditiQns of a cable are influenced not only by the limiting conductor temperature for continuous service, but also by the conductor temperature which might be attained during the conventional operating time of the overload protection device, in the event of an overload.
This means that the operating current of the protective device must not exceed 1.45Iz. Where the protective device is a fuse or a miniature circuit-breaker, this requirement is satisfied by selecting a value of Iz not less than In In practice, because of the standard steps in nominal rating of fuses and circuit-breakers, it is
often necessary to select a value of In exceeding lb' In that case, because it is also necessary for
EBCS-10 1995
77
Iu,
may be dictated by the overload conditions and the current-carrying conductors will not always be fully used.
The size needed for a conductor protected against overload by a semi-enclosed fuse can be obtained by the use of a correction factor, 1.45/2=0.725, which results in the same degree of protection as that afforded by other overload protective devices. This factor is to be applied to the nominal rating of the fuse as a divisor, thus indicating the minimum value of the conductor to be protected.
-4
required of
overload conditions and the current-carrying capacity (IJ of the conductors cannot be fully used.
A.6
Having established the design current (Ib) of the circuit under consideration, the appropriate procedure described in A-6.1 to A-6.4 below will enable the designer to determine the size of the cable that will be necessary to use. As a preliminary step, it is useful to identify the length of the cable run and the permissible voltage drop for the equipment being supplied, as this may be an over-riding consideration (see A.7 below). The permissible voltage drop in mV, divided by Ib and by the length of run, will give the value of voltage drop in mv/Alm which can be tolerated. A voltage drop not exceeding that value is identified in the appropriate table and the corresponding cross-sectional area of conductor needed on this account can be read-off directly before any other calculations are made. The conductor size necessary from consideration of the conditions of normal load and overload is then detennined. multipliers. All correction factors affecting Iz (that is, the factors for ambient
-4
temperature, grouping and thermal insulation) can, if desired, be applied to the values of
as
This involves a process of trial and error until a cross-sectional area is reached
which ensures that Iz is not less than Ib and not less than Iu of any protective device that is intended to select. In any event, if a correction factot for protection by a semi-enclosed fuse is necessary, this has to be applied to Iu as a divisor. It is, therefore, more convenient to apply all the correction factors to In as divisors. This methojl is u"sed in A.6.1 through A.6.3 and produces a value of current and that value (or the next larger value) can readily be located in the appropriate table of current-carrying capacity and the corresponding cross-sectional area of conductor can be identified directly. noted that the value of
-4
It should be
78 ~EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
necessary to know Iz where the size of conductor is chosen by this method; but if it is desired to identify Iz the value is determined by the method indicated in A.3 above. However, this method cannot be used. for cables installed in enclosed trenches (Installation Methods 18, 19 and 20 of Annex A, Section 8) because the correction factors given in Table
A3
are related to conductor cross-sectional areas. For such cables, it is, therefore, necessary to use the process of trial and error described above, selecting on a trial basis a particular size of cable from, for instance, voltage drop considerations.
AA. (CJ
capacity (~)
(2) The size of cable to be used shall be such that its tabulated current-carrying give in Equation device adjusted as above:
(AI) below is not less than the value of nominal current of the protective
~J!
(3) For groups -
-I)
Ca~:
(Ampere)
(AI)
divide the nominal current of the protective device (In) by the correction factor for grouping
(Cg)
(A2)
Alternatively,
it may be selected in accordance with the following formulae, provided that the
EBCS-10 1995
79
------~--~----~---~--~~---~--~---~----~--~---~
(A.3)
and
(AA)
I: +0.48/;
t'c;; Ct."
(Ampere ).
[1~/ e2l
The
size of cable to be used shall be such that its tabulated single-circuit current-ca.rrYing
capacity (It) is not less than the value of It calculated in accordance with Equation (A.2) ab~ve or, where Equations.(A.3) and (A.4) are used, not less than the larger of the resulting two values
of~.
Where correction factors C. and/or Cj are applicable, they are to be applied as divisors to the value of It determined by the above formulae.
A.6.2
(1) For single circuits divided the nominal current of the fuse (In) by any applicable correction .factor for ambient temperature (CJ given in Table A.Sj then further divide by any applicable correction factor for thermal insulation, (Cj); then further divide by 0.725.
J ~
The size of cable to be used shall be such that its tabulated current-carrying capacity (~) is not less than the value of nominal current of the fuse adjusted as above:
(A. 5)
80
EBCS-10 1995
/'
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
(2) For groups divided the nominal current of the fuse In by 0.725 and by the applicaole correction factor for grouping
(Cg)
given in Tables
Alternatively, it may be selected by the following formulae, provided that the circuits of the group are not liable to simultaneous overload.
(A7)
and
(AS) (Ampere)
The size of cable to be used shall be such that its tabulated single-circuit current-carrying capacity (It) is not less than the value of It calculated in accordanc; with Equation (A6) above or, where Equation (A7) and (AS) are used, not less than the larger of the resulting two values
of It.
(J)
Where correction factors C. and/or Cj are applicable, they are to be applied as divisors to -the value of It determined by the above Equation.
EBCS-10 1995
81
Equation (A.9) below for the installation method concerned is not less than the value of Ib adjusted as above: (A.9)
(Ainpere)
A.7
In the tables, values of voltage drop are given for a current of one ampere for a metre run, i.e, for a distance of 1.Om along the route taken by the cables, and represent the result of the voltage drops in all the circuit conductors. The values of voltage drop assume that the conductors are at their maximum permitted nolffial operating temperatures. The values in the tables, for a.c. operation, apply only to frequencies in the range 49.0Hz to 61.0Hz; and for single-core armoured cables, the tabulated values apply where the armour is bonded to earth at both ends. - The values of voltage drop for cables operating at higher frequencies may be substantially gre&ter. For a given run, to calculate the voltage drop (in mY) the tabulated value for the cable concerned has to be multiplied by the length of the run in metres and by the current the cable is intended to carry; namely, the design current of the circuit (Ib) in amperes. For three-phase circuits, the tabulated mV/AIm values relate to the line voltage and balanced conditions have been assumed.
82 _' EBCS-10
1995
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
For cables having conductors of 16.0mm2 or less cross-sectional area, their inductances can be ignored and (mV/Alm)r values only are tabulated. For cables having conductors greater than 16.0mm2 cross-sectional area, the impedance values are given as (mV/Alm)z, together with the resistive component (mV/Alm)r and the reactive component (mV/Alm)x The direct use of the tabulated (mV/Alm)r or (mV/Alm)z values, as appropriate, may lead to pessimistically high calculated values of voltage drop or, in other words, to unnecessarily low values of permitted circuit lengths. For example, where the design current of a circuit is capacity of the cable chosen, the actual significantly less than the effective current-carrying
voltage drop would be less than the calculated value because the conductor temperature (and, hence, its resistance) will be less than that on which the tabulated mV/Aim had been based. As regards power factor in a.c. circuits, the use of the tabulated mV/Aim values, (for the larger cable sizes, the tabulated (mV/Alm)z values) to calculate the voltage drop is strictly correct only when the phase angle of the cable equals that of the load. When the phase angle of the cable does not equal that of the load, the direct use of the tabulated mV/Aim or (mV/Alm)z values leads to a calculated value of voltage drop higher than the actual yalue. In some cases, it may be advantageous to take account of the load power factor wher calculating voltage drop. Where a more accurate assessment of voltage drop is desirable the following methods may be used. (a) Correction for operating temperature shall be carried as follows: For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area 16.0mm2 or less, the design value of
Ct,
given by
230
+ t p
(CC - ~)(t
a
12
c= t
- 30)
p
(A. 10)
230
+ tp
where ~ is the maximum permitted normal operating temperature, DC. Equation (A. 10) applies only where the overcurrent protective device is other than a fuse and where the actual ambient temperature is equal to or greater than 30C.
EBCS-10 1995
83
Note:
For convenience, the above fonnula is based on the resistance-temperature C for both copper and aluminium conductors.
For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area greater than 16.0mm2, only the resistive component of the voltage drop is affected by the temperature and the factor Ct, is therefore applied only to the tabulated value of (mV/Alm), and the design value of (mV/Alm)z is given by the vector sum of
Ct
For very large conductor sIzes where the resistive component of voltage drop is much less than the corresponding reactive part (i.e when x/r~3) this correction factor need not be considered. (b) Correction for load power factor For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area of 16.0mm2 or less, the design value of mV/Aim is obtained approximately by multiplying the tabulated value by the power factor of the load, CDS ~. For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area greater than 16.0mm2 the design value of mV/Aim is given approximately by:
CDS ~
[tabulated (mV/Aim),]
For single-core cables in flat formation, the tabulated values apply to outer cables and may underestimate for the voltage drop between an outer cable and the centre cable for crosssectional areas above 240.0mm2 and power factors greater than 0.8. (c) Combined correction for both operating temperature and load power factor From (a) and (b) above, where it is considered appropriate to correct the tabulated mV/Aim values for both operating temperature and load power factor, the design values of mV/Aim are given as follows: i) For cables having conductors of 16.0mm2 or less cross-sectional area:
Ct
CDS ~
(tabulated mV/Alm)
ii)For
(tabulated mV/Alm),)
84
EBCS-10 1995
ANNEX
(NORMATIVE)
CORRECTION FACTORS
Table A.I: Correction factors for groups of more than one circuit of single-core cables, or more than one multi~ore cable
;/.1
horizontal (method 11) Number touching (Method 11) cables of circuits or multicore
([0 be - --, -,-- ,-, , , -0.67 0.69 0.70 0.71 0.73 0.90 0.39 0.38 0.90 7 6 3 20 14 9 16
applied to the corresponding current-carrying capacity for a single circuit in Tables B.I through B.8, B.9 through B.16, B.l7 throughB.l9, B.20, B.2?, B.28, B.31 through B.38, B.39 through B.46t)
Il.-
0.6 0.66 0.94 0.77 0.76 0.62 0.81 0.7 0.90 0.65 0.90 0.50 0.66 60.45 0.90 0.72 0.75 0.79 0.43 0.52 0.54 0.57 0.60 0.65 50.90 40.46 10 12 0.41 16 0.72 I0.91 0.73 0,74 0.77 0.70 0.71 ../'
7~.
0.60 0.66
l;",
J.:r
J,b
'c9-<f
J.-'t
3cs
When cables having differing conductor operating temperatures are grouped together, the current rating shall be based upon the lowest operating temperature of any cable " in the group.
Spaced by a clearance between adjacent surfaces of at least one cable diameter (D.) where the horizontal clearances between adjacent cable exceeds 2D., no correction factor need be applied. Not applicable to mineral insulated cables, see Table A.2.
tt
#
00
V\
Table A.2 Correction factors for mineral insulated cables installed on perforated tray
(To be Applied to the Corresponding Current-Carrying Capacity for Single Circuits for Reference Method 11 ~ Table B.27)
U'f~(~~!St
91.0 0.901 Arrangement of cables spacedt .0.95Number of multicore cables touching t 3 -6 4 1;0 0.75 0.80 0.70 0.75 1.0 0.85 2 cables touching or circuits 1.0 Multiconductor 1 Single conductor cables spaced cableser1of trefoil
l
Numb
"C
I ~
, I
.!
"C
~ C ~ I
.!
~
t
tt
Spaced by a clearance by between adjacent surfaces of at least one cable diameter (Dc) Spaced by a clearance between adjacent surfaces of at least one cable diameter ( 2De).
l l
Notes to Tables A.I and A.2 (i) The factors in the Tables are applicable to groups of cables all of one size. The value of current derived from application of the appropriate factors is the maximum current to be carried by any {)f the cables in the group. If, due to known operating conditions, a cable is expected to carry not more than 30% of its grouped rating, it may be ignored for the purpose of obtaining the rating factor of its grouped rating, it may be ignored for the purpose of obtaining the rating factor for the rest of the group. For example, a group ofN loaded cables would normally require a group reduction factor of Cgapplied to the tabulated~. H,owever,if M cables in the group carry loads which are not greater than O.3CgLt mperes the other cables can be sized by using the group rating a factor corresponding to (N-M) cables.
I 1
1 ~
I;,
(ii)
(iii) When cables having differing conductor operatihrgtemperatures are grouped together, the current rating shall be based on the lowest operating temperature of any cable in the group. (iv) Where the horizontal clearances between adjacent cables exceeds 2Dc, no correction factor need be applied.
86
EBCS-10 1995
~[qq7
The correction factms tabu1atedbelow relate to the di'l""ition of cable illustrated m lrem No. 18 to lrem No. 20 of Annex A, Soroon 8, and are "1'Plicable to the curren~~.
12 or 13 of Annex A, Section 8, as given in the relevant tables of this Annex.
1 cross-
0.93single-1or 9 0.92cables8orcore' 0.88cables4 four0.91two-core 0.90cables two0.87 three0.89 3 oror four100.56 or 0.81 0.76 0.87 0.71 0.82 0.79 0.84 0.85 0.75 8single-core 3cables, or 0.67 0.73 0.81 0.66 0.72 0.63 0.90 11single-core 0.61 0.56 0.83 0.88 0.89 0.57 0.52 0.60 7 0.68 0.51 0.69 0.74 0.48 0.53 0.63 0.67 0.59 0.78 0.66 0.72 0.80 0.73 0.82 5 0.50 0.41 0.43 160.81cablestwo0.83 0.85 0.59 0.74 0.80 0.65 0.49 0.55 ~0.656orcables, 0.86 cables, 0.80 0.82 0.78 0.77 0.69 0.78 0.49 0.86 0.54 0.62 0.64 6 12 4two-core 0.46 0.76 9 0.44 0.47 three-24or cables, fouror 0.84 single0.77 0.58 0.70 corecorecables,12 three-single-coreor corecables,four-4 core threethree- 4 cables core or3 three\9.86 cables cables,two-core2or 2 cables,core core cables, cables, cables, four48two-core 3 1828four-core12 6 6
Method Installation 20 18 6 single- core cables Installation Installatior:l Method Method 19 12 single-core
{
0)
~ ~
'0
o
~J
t
(Y:)
when cables having different conductor operating temperatures are grouped together, the current rating shall be based on the lowest operating temperature of any cable in the group.
-J
00 00
Table A.4 Correction factors for ambient temperature where protection is against short-circuit
. Note
This table applies where the associated overcurrent protective device is intended to provide short-circuit protection only. Except where the device is a semi-enclosed fuse, the table also applies where the device is intended to provide overload protection.
------ -- 0.41 0.29 0.96 0.50 0.65 0.76 0.54 0.31.0 0.40 0.60 0.75 0.80 0.92 0.30 0.43 0.60 0.58 0.52 0.90 800.94 950.91 8530 60 55 35 0.95 0.94 0.32 0.93 0.35 0.79 0.87 0.55 0.77 0.67 0.89 '0.50 0.35 0.97 0.71 0.47 0.70 0.88 90of 0.91 75 0.85 0.41 0.82 65 45 40 70 50 0.61 0.63 0.31 0.45 0.57 0.50 0.84 1.02 Type0.74insulation 1.02 1.04 1.03 1.03 25
Ambient temperature c
NOTE:
(i) Correction factors for flexible cords and for 85C or 150C rubber insulated flexible cables are give in the relevant table of current-carrying capacity. (ii) This table also applies whep determining the current-carrying capacity of a cable.
(t) These factors are applicable ~~ly to rating in Columns 2 through 5 of Tables B.l and B.2.
- - -- 1.03 25 0.86 0.83 0.97 0.49 0.84 0.39 0.48 0.68 0.89 0.42 0.86 0.96 0.41 0.58 0.71 0.88 30 1.04 90 80 75 60 55 45 40 95 85 65 35 0.98-1.021.0285 0.72 1.03 0.62 0.56 0.69 0.79 0.87 0.91 0.93 0.95 0.94 0.80 0.90 0.92 0.85 0.89 0.76 1.0 0.55 0.77 0.82 0.96 0.43 0.64 70 1.02 50
Table A.5 Correction factors for ambient temperature where the overload protective device is a semi-enclosed fuse 85 0.90 80 70 60 70, sheath 105, sheath temperature Ambient temperature
FC]
./
Note:
These factors are applicable only to ratings in columns 2 to 5 of Tables B.I ~d B.2. Correction factors for flexible cords and for 85C or 150Crubber-insulated flexible cables are given in the relevant table of current-carrying capacity.
ANNEX
Table B.1 Single-core P.V.C. insulated cables, non-armoured,
(copper conductor) Current-carrying
2.5 cross-
B (NORMATIVE)
capacity (Amperes)
..mV -Trefoil - Reference Method 1 (dipped (free -Of ac.-2 d.c. single-phase 1154cables 10302 Of d.c. Of 626 3 4 d.c. flal 546 Of Of cables 720 sing! cables, Of 12 ac. ac. ac.10.52ac. d.c. flalOf 119 46 136 57 192 261 161 32 3ac. flal and 14.5 cables 162 151 125 101 42 207 232 164 171 134 106 73 216 99 239 269 210 245 273 394 326 346 400 320 65 50 341 300 264 254 246 234 167 219 172 191 162 151 137 156 141 60 356 419 369 361 262 69 146 112 126 306 362 396 330 166 409 460 521 424 436 561 659 545 456 367 465 615 472 266 311 273 214 197 404 130 104 463 709 569 549 69 240 -mV- e-phase 19.5 cables 1138 1086 611 21 24 656 467 953 25 749 982 533 1166 1070 826 652 732 634 920 635 792 1265 -mY 943 655 971 mV' 34Vertical 26 2 61 66 36 31 76 56 41 37 26 79 43 3.mVcables, Of 10 - Of 5-cabI flal and 212 ac. 3;.\ 7a16 es 4touching 12 11 1079 1337 1149 914 1420 1216 15.54 cables, 11touching mV 15.5 13.5 17.5 16 20 114 110 223 129 349 296 564 504 316 303 594 515 59 mV 27 679 694 776 723 1020 692 904 795 -mY trefoil 47 67 Of ac.etc.) 3 flal 1058 i{ I~ single-phase three-phase single-phase spaced it conduitcables~ethod in trunking in ttYee-phase (endosed -ReferenceReference MethodHOfizontaJ I air) vertical) 33 n 32ac. cables,spaced perforaled on a wall or3horizontal Of and ttYee-phasetrefoil touching phase ttYee three touching and2 cables, three-phase ~V phase cable tray Reference Method 4 (endosed in Reference
II.~. ~\
,I
'l',V
-{
I,
p. .. O<,>.eoc. by - ooen"Ii-enclo~
E' se. .
see
: 70C
or
4 cables
- thr~phase
ac.
Reference Methods
~
~
Spacing larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex A, section 8) will result in larger voltage drop.
With or without protective conductor. Circular conductors are assumed for sizes up to and including 16.0mm2 Values for larger sizes relate to shaped conductors and may safely be applied to circular conductors. Note: Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex.
~--------------------SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
x0.57 Conductor0.25 Two-core three-phase four-core cable 0.135 0.25 0.46 mV 9.5 0.1000.1557.3 phase 2.4 0.21 0.185 0.145 0.160 1.2518 38 0.210.150 '0.105 0.165.135 0.180 0.24 0.1151.7544 3.8 0.29 0.150 11 2.8 25 0.130 0.29 0.550.145 0.145 0.260.130 0.63 7.3 Three-or 0.330.21 1.500.35 0.800.43 1.100.81 0.34 0.41 0.65 0.94 1.75 1.25 01.50 0.165 0.155 1.10 .145 .130 .135 .140 0.63 4.4 1.75 18 0.93 0.410.29 0.50 0.125 44 29 6.4 0.170 0.140 0.36 1.25 0.47 29 -~ .J... 0.1850.1900.93,11 cable single-a.c. Qz0.30 0.234.4 15 mV 0.38 2.8 cable mV a.c. Two-cored.c.
mm2
EBCS-10 1995
93
\0 ~
,
Current-Carrying Catpacity (Amperes):
Conductor flatcables4 296spaced 7720 4 flat 1041 1441 447 1008 919 1218 843 763 687 594 525 624 943 976 710 893 891 669 805 622 349 313 269 723 575 490 469 399 648 492 465 816 1627 975 1390 777 809 1174 728 676 721 673 338 340 357 285 632 674 851 885 618 578 616 719 748 640 385 396 415 383 327 515 456 525 548 422 528 566 593 550 547 967 872 771 997 AVertical, 245 cables 205 179 259 225 212 230 216 217 286 279 294 287 238 103 or 2touching 4phase 3trefoil 11 9 7 Reference 5Aspaced a.c.193cables, Referencecables, three-phase or 342 d.c. 1685 1035 737 8fO 567 668 401 360 309 501 945 856 731 280 332 657 707 324 425 489 511 568 905 824 231 8 229 272 189 181 12 11 63flat Vertical a.c.886andflat perforated12Methodtray on a a.c. 229 Horizontal 2Horizontala.c. Method cables, ,263 Vertical cables d.c. 2three~phase cables, three-phase 2 3 or 4 single-phase a.c. shingleflat808or and cable touching spaced single-phase cables Horizontal a.c. Reference Method 12 (free air)
operating
temperature:
700c
cross-
Note:
Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex.
t, Spacings larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex A. Section 8) will result in larger voltage drop.
\0
VI
1269a.c. or d.c. two-core cable, single-phase 2 62 332 110 128 356 72 190 516 231 38A Reference Reference 45 35 41 33 53 5 4 3 ,83 three a.c. 222 cable, 118 175 145 89 163 445 310 251 378 510 207 241 590 67 290 336 469 97 77 102 151 157 125 409 476 386 306 267 291 439 348 592 683 540 621 547 49 A1 26 19 31 42 18 21 28 135 405 58 192 22 A 25 core (Clipped 11 or three-phase or four Method 1 Method tray), cable perforated direct) horizontal or vertical (on aReference Method 13 (free 1core cable, three or three-phase a.c. four air)
Note:
Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A. 6.2 of the Preface to this Annex.
96
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
EBCS-10 1995
97
00
\0
insulation, non-armoured,
Ambient operating
temp~rature: temperature:
30C 90C
I area
spaced,
Note:
Where the conductor is to 'be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex. The current-carrying capacity in Columm 2 to 5 are also applicable to flexible cables where the cables are used in fixed installations. For cable in rigid p.v.c. conduit, the values stated ~~>~':..~e.::...~} ~!_~~:.~~~~::,~:';.:.~~~re a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 7cPC. it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable ..~?.?_
\0 \0 t Spacing larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex A, Section B) will result in larger voltage drop'
o o
Table B.11 . Multicore, non-armouroo cable having thermosetting insulation
(copper conductors) Current-carrying capacity (Amperes): Conductor Ambient temperature: 30"C operating temperature: 90"C
1 phase fourthree-or 625269 a.c. or conduit1on cable three- coreor in threeReference ceiling , cable trunking) 107 three-phase cable d.c.33 a.c.four1246 two-core two-core 41290 9209 8three3 7 2227 119A 26522154 17505 9180 14600 or 384 459 298 158 127 100 346 399 538 621 192 220 .253 115 183 145 121 225 741 289 352 185 149 76 410 473 329 542 641 99 386 442 171 138 295 164 2 130 109 89 68 382 268 259 424 506 599 346 455 396 229 278 197 147 119 322 371 500 576 179 741 865 667 536 orcore acable orMethod 3 (enclosed in core 1phase singletwo-core or 1 d.c. or two-core 6 5 30598 33494 532 441 1 128 340 693 1 A328 A96 A A 803 d.c. wall threeA456 cable Method Reference Method 11 (on a 13 (free air) phase a.c. Method 4 1Referencein cable tray) or Reference perforated an threeReferencesinglefour-core phase a.c. cable (enclosed Method 1 (clipped direct) phase a.c. cable singlecable
Note:
(i) Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to the Annex. (ii) Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 70C, it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating temperature.
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
Conductor operating temperature r0.145 0.99 0.493 a.c. z zx1.15 Conductor0.170 0.98mV 2.9 cable single0.150 1.35 0.67 0.145 1.85 0.195 0.140 0.40 1.35 0.175 0.1302.9 0.125 0.2000.31 0.130 0.1600.39 0.86 0.43 0.59 0.115 0.22 0.28 0.34 0.125 0.195 0.21 0.24 0.42 0.120 0.29 0.35 0.52 0.69 1.00 0.185 0.21 0.30 0.37 0.45 0.60 0.87 0.25 0.155 0.50 0.120 2.5Three-or four-core cable 0.135 0.32 1.85 0:140 0.26 Two-core4 1.15 1.60 1.35 1.90 0.26 2mV 0.160 0.67 0.155 three-phase a.c. 1.65 phase mV Two-cored.c. cable
: 90C
EBCS-10 1995
101
.....
tv
o
Table B.13 Single-core cables having thermosetting insulation, non-magnetic armour (copper conductors) Current-carrying .capacity (Amperes):
or 3d.c. flat trefoil phase single&899815 a.c. or 10cables 21110 3Reference 3 3 4 4 cables 7 single6Vertical 5cables, 11 3031 4 2371119 277 220 358 357 293 322 288 284 266 282 232 253 331 349 270 1170 1082 1139 1146 1314 1032 1016 1137 1204 1246 1345 5571214 488918 425720 962625 496529 791463 717285 853402 662A 755346 57912 1261 437 383 333 792 2100 1055 477 1474 1528 1092 1266 889 1744 1809 1155 943 805 842 815 714 749 612 689 2026 1238 688 614 643 587 600 539 462 516 497 449 425 446 412 436 352 389 940 871 797 1094 904 767 1042 755 810 906 700 1041 666 715 782 1289 574 618 660 524 510 549 575 566 485 519 504 405 393 426 861 961 851 987 923 848 9 threeHorizontal Horizontal cables A touching 3:J7 A flat 656222 992 978 Horizontalflat a Methodor Vertical 356 and ,367a.c. phasespaced single-phase 14 cable tray) 2929 & flat989027 flat Reference cables, 11(on spaced 3 d.c. flatAor a.c. or935 & phasespaceda.c.perforated Method three-phase flat threephase a.c. touching a.c. 2 cables d.c. Reference Method 12 (free air)
onductor
Note:
(i) Where the conductor is to be protected by a seini-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex. (ii) Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 7Cf'C, it shall be ascertained tbat the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating
t.empera'turc.
90"C./
x0.88 x0.70 x r0.190 r0.27 z0.145 0.99 0.093 12 (in trefoil rx0.60 z0.24 r0.21 0.080 0.105 0.180 0.175 0.20 0.155 0.195 0.23 0.150 0.165 0.190 0.180 0.125 0.135 0.170 0.24 0.140 0.155 0.33 0.29 0.31 0.25 0.26 0.140 0.170 0.98 0.27 0.30 0.180 0.045 0.170 0.38 0.35 0.31 0.23 0.36 0.24 0.30 0.29 0.41 0.34 0.190 0.28 0.30 0.185 0.29 0.175 0.27 0.37 0.51 0.30 0.45 0.41 0.28 0.160 0.21 0.195 0.45 0.32 0.45 0.25 0.28 0 0.31 0.25 2mV 3mV 0.84.23 0.44 0.53 0.98 0.62 0.84 0.58 0.195 0.21 0.200 0.90 0.52 0.32 0.62 0.47 0.87 0.75 0.71 7 5 6 4 0145.150 0.51 110.056 12(Spacedt) 0.092 0.165 0.086 0.125 0.195 0.29 0.26 0.21 0.43 0.170 0.165 0.180 0.180 0.160 0.195 0.21 0.34 0.28 0.44 0.39 0.26 0.23 0.135 0.125 0.073 ( Flat spaced t)12 0.145 0.145 0.49 Reference Method Reference Methods or -4 single-phase a.c. 0.21 0.150 0.105 0.67 0.39 0.25 0.33 0.29 0.165 0.090 0.155 0.51 0.35 0.40 0.25 0.22 0.22 0.155 0.33 0.170 0.195 0.20 0.38 0.86.180 0.68 0.60.25 0.33 0.59.24 0.27 0.46 0.49 0.69 0.65 0.170 0.092 0.115 0z 0.24 1.00 0.55 0.130 and mV Reference mV Method . Reference Methods 1 2 cables 1 cables - three-phase a.c. Reference Methods 1. 0.410.175 3 2 11 (Flat touching) and cables d.c. 150
Spacings larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex A, Section 8) will result in larger voltage drop.
Current-Carrying
520 1 three-or a.c. or 1 three-or four732 599 636 546 4997 A 66279 31338 524 392 78 27 5685 304 251 472 463 406 628 673 15 847 728 3 4987 four 5 62 1 115692 90110 73180 29146 535 423 25 607 44 33 A phase 22836 124 51 154 98 289 238 335 152 188 354 291 410 131 162 187 353 197 386 441 539 23219 two-core A 94 1 .5 a.c. three-phase a.c. cable, singlecable tray} or Reference Method 13
perforated d.c. cable, horizontal or vertical 1 two-core Reference (free air) 11 (on Method core
Note:
(i) Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex. (ii) Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 7fJ'C, it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating temperature.
104
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
EBCS-10 1995
105
Note:(i)
(ii)
Where the conduc~or is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 oft the Preface to Annex .. Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 70"C ,it shall be ascertained that the equipment cottnected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating temperature.
85C
Spacings larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex A of Section 8) will result in larger voltage drop.
....
o 00
Table B.19 Multicore, sheathed and non-armoured cables having 85C rubber insulation
(copper conductors) Ambient temperature: 300C Conductor operating temperature: 85C
Refrence Metthod 13 (free air)
In n
Note: (i)
(ii)
Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse. se{,A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex. Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 70DC, it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating temperature.
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
Table B.20 Voltage drop (per ampere per meter) Conductor operating temperatures:
19 Conductor 0.25.170 0.65 r0.1501.30 z0.185 46 z0.22 x 0.99.58 0.95 0.68 x 0.662 1.35 0.97mV 0.1700.31 0.1650.25 0.86 12 0.84 0.38 0.150 0.30 1.15 0.25 0.59 2.9 1.85 0.195 0.1750.155 1.60 0.22.22 7.7 0.42.43 0.48 0.52 0.4931 0.160 Two-core 3 0.45 0.35.34 0.150 0.135 1.80 0.26 0.145 0.140 4 19 16 0.1600.39 0.130 4.6 0 0.130 0.36 12 0.30.27 0.190 cable single-phase 0.155 1.85 0.130 1.30 0.30 7.7 2.9 2.5 46 40 mV mV 31 26 10 6.7 4.6 4.0 cable Two-core d.c.
85C
cable three-
a.c.
EBCS-10 1995
109
..
Table B.2l 60C rubber-insulated flexible cables, other than flexible cords Current-carrying capacity: Ambient temperature: 30C (Amperes): Conductor operating temperature: 60"C
343 Conductor
Single-phase222 cored.c. - a.c. or 394 ,. 291 124 102 192 255 158 541 394 471 347 30A64426 175 302 140 73 86134 97 258 83 2-- 216 phasefive-cables a.c. 4-A 39-273863 Three-phase cable or 51 single A 47 Single3cable with core a.c. four-core or without protective 1conductor 1 two-core three-core, or d.c.
Notes:
The tabulated current ratings are for cables in free air, but may also be used for cables resting on a surface. If the cable is to wound on a drum on load, the ratings should be reduced in accordance with (iii) below and, for cables which may be covered, (iv) below. (ii) Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the preface to this Annex. (iii) The current ratings of cables used on reeling drums are to be reduced by the following factors: a) Radial type drum
i) ii)
(i)
i) 1 layer cable: 85% ii) 2 layers of cable: 65% iii) 3 layers of cable: 45% iv) 9 layers of cable: 35% A radial-type drum is one where spiral layers of cable are accommodated between closely spaced flanges; if fitted with solid flanges, the ratings given above should be reduced and the drum is described as non-ventilated, and if the flanges have suitable apertures as ventilated. A ventilated cylindrical cable drum is one where layers of cable are accommodated between widely spaced flanges and the drum and end flanges have suitable ventilating apertures. (iv) Where cable may be covered over or coiled up whilst on load, or the air movement over the cable restricted, the current rating should be reduced. It is not possible to specify the amount of reduction; but the table of rating factors for reeling drums can be used as a guide.
110
EBCS-10 1995
60"C
flexible cables Ambient temperature: operating temperature: 1190 1017 885 30C 85C
Conductor
\
Conductor cross-
741 dc. 53 Threl-phasl a.c. (1 thrsl- 216 131114 cable, a.c. 2 A cors four-cors or 3 touching 4 476 140 397 348 AA 240 170 99 sing/I-phasl 73 47 86 414 192 645 540 537 36 297 354 or 64 303 (1 two-cors cable} with or dc. 2467 or 41 cors, protlctivs a.c. five- 262 withoutsing/I-cors cables Single phasl
CORRECTION
35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.74 0.67 0.60 0.52 0.43 0.30
150C rubber-insulated
Ambient Temperature (0e) Correction factor: Ambient Temperature (0e): Correction factor:
35 to 85 90 95 100 105 110 115t 120t 125t 130135t 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.88 0.83 0.78 0.73 0.68 0.62 0.55 0.48 140t 145 0.39 0.28
112
EBCS-10 1995
Table
B.24 Voltage
drop
-z 1.20 0.105- 0.1900.210.1850.098 5.0 11 0.130 0.1750-0.32 8.4 0.0840.170z xx0.190 0.073 13 mVsingle-core cables touching 2 r 0.21 x0.135 0.91 0.125 r1.700.150 0.39 0.99 Conductor0.130 .195 core cable--three-phase single-phaseor flve3 7.3 0.33 0.150 0.48 0.70 0.70 0.222.000.1450.165 Two-core cable a.c. 0.99 0.200.180 0.27 0.140 0.22 1.42 0.41 0.145 0.27 0.53 0.53 0.125 0.63 3.1 0.195 3.1 1mV 4-0.130 2.00 5.0 0.28 0.90 0.21 0.72 0.36 0.185 0.200.61 8.4 4.3 mV 2.7 0.250.175 0.27 0.33 1.20 2.0 0.46 1.70 0.33 0.56 z0.29 0.41 1.01 0.24 1.42 0.380.170 13 1.43 0.46 2mV a.c. 5three-core, four-core cables d.c. Single-phase a.c.t 1 two-core or single-core 1
Note:(i) The voltage drop figures given above are based on a conductor operating temperature of 85C and are, therefore, not accurate when the operating temperature is in excess of 85C. In the case of the 15<J'C cables with a conductor temperature of 15<J'C, the above resistive values should be increased by a factor of 1.2 (This factor is only applicable to the range of 1500C rubber-insulated cables up to 16mm2 nominal cross-sectional area). t (ii) Larger voltage drop will result if the cables are spaced .
Table
B.25
Current-carrying
capacity
Conductor crosssupportable by
5532A Current-carrying 6 16 16 210 3-2 425 6 A 25 mass 32013 twin3 flexible cord Maximum capacity kg10 Three-phase a.c. Single-phase a.c.
Where cable is on a reel, see notes to Table B.21. CORRECTION FACTOR FOR AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
60C rubber and p.Y.c. cords: Ambient Temperature (0C): Correction factor:
85C rubber cords having a h.oJ.r. sheath or a heat-resisting p.Y.c. sheath and for 85C heat-resisting p.Y.c. cords: Ambient Temperature Correction factor:
130 145 140 135 0.40 0.57 0.71 0.82 0.92 175 170 165 cords: 0.42 0.60 0.74 0.85 0.96 ISOOC 160 rubber
114
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
The tabulated yalues are for 60"C rubber-insulated and p.y.c.-insulated flexible cords. For other types of .. flexible cords, they are to be multiplied by the following factors: For 85C rubber or p.y.c.-insulated: 150"C rubber-insulated: 185C glass fibre:
1.09 1.31 1.43
EBCS-10 1995
115
Table B.27 Mineral insulated cables bare and exposed to touch (see Note ii below) or having overall covering of P.V.C.
(copper conductors and sheath) Current-carrying capacity (Amperes): Reference Method 1 (Oipped Direct) 11
-three-cables all 1 cable formation, -388 48 37 112 8.5 29 40 35 249 26 31 23 19 10.0 31 21 18.5four-core 169 6486 loadedcore 4715 or 70 52 3713a.c.cores 41 32 26 110 120 94 16.5 loadedflat 2616 in all 38 264 18 14.5 11.5 371 207 9.5 525 91-two-core 477 628 8 19.5 singlecores 21 16.5 21 twelve-core 14.5 23 12.0 851 A16.0 A2 A 286 15 loaded 17 13 10 327 137 181 457 434 trefolle phase 282 19.5 17.5 221 392 22 92 72 7 A65 A 303 346 147 cores8single-core 1 four-core cablecablesthree155Acable in 13 Aseven-core 202 514 57 45 133 19.5all cores 25 34 340 102 163 cable, 247 440 296 phase.three-core 3 a.c. loaded cores loaded 3cable cable threephase alla.c.a.c. phase single. cable, 3core or single-core
Note:
i) For single-core .~cx-r.c>""'.cd 1-~sheaths 1-he:;; the circuit are assumed to be connectednv together at both ends. cables. the 1-c->'L."" .. of tnhl...:llr.tec::1 ... n_ hloe al'U1cs. ,..h~,-"Id be> m .It.iplie.;:.l 0.9_
"'".-.t:le :B-27 lVIineral ins&.alat:.ed ables bare a .. exposed to to&.ach(see Note ii bela,"",>or havi .. overall coveri .. or c d. g g (copper conductors and sheath) (conte'd) Current-carrying capacity (Amperes): Reference Method 11 (On a perforated cable tray, horizontal or vertical) .. -- core - core 246 466 164211 472 -9208 424 28448 all 3801182cores 33513104 2 294coresfour- 1 three202--1825 all single- core 13573346 1059116 359789 4319216 321 37395 80978524 59cable 476013 1944four-core Trefoil core cores 267 three- .. 215 21 922645 3014242 37- 221 399 301 28 32 39 552 47 364 308 147 Flat 223 135 187 279 153 229 17.53078 213620 223318.5 27 20 28 12 2414 30120 15.5 10 25 11 466loaded 120 43 69472308 204 267 5 182 68 352 57 3759 154 90AA 431 382 333 230 537 125 358 314 275 73 188 416 264 352 223 11 19.5 16.527-34 211095117431 4017.5 22 24 67399 2869 5314 54 43 82 25 51 317 A 40 A 12 211624 19101 18twelve29' 20 15 16 11 48147 4116.5 119 482 405 22 14 44 Horizonta cable loaded loaded A121251 A3A A35 1471165 sevenI2517single - core cable, three-phase loaded spaced 17 twoVerticalA three-phase phase a.c. touching cables a.c cable 3 1 1 1.0 nineteen-
p.v.c.
a.c.
Note:
i) For single-core cables, the sheaths of the circuit are assumed to be connected together at both ends. ii) For bare cable exposed to touch, the tabulated values should be multiplied by 0.9.
.. ..
10
Table Dol7 Mineral insulated cables bare and exposed to touch (see note 2) or having overall covering of P.V.C
(copper conductors and sheath) (conte'd) Current-carrying capacity (Amperes): Reference Methods 12 and 13 (Free air) - Horizont -- 1or three209 353 cables 259 -- cable four-core 213-cores 3 cores 497 446 400 309 loaded 1 two173 142 110 34 26-84 62 49 37 45 I all
.
16.5 A 229twelve37 40 41Aall cores all 30 27 47120 32 12 51 22 30 56 1 552 466 40 37728 loaded 24126 2158 132 24 116 2 23 26 11 23 25 19 cable 32 18 17.5 23 1 59317 21 cable 49614 seven426AA four-core 45core19.5 al 3429loadcoresphase a.c. 33121 264 3115.521182 242nineteen39 core109 29 loaded69 565 25 A16 507 1 472 289 10121 351 35 30 77 loaded308 95 17 2892 57 11 174 71 28 142 43 10 44223 51 A 78cable 161 14 24 197 27 416 102 16 68 125 44 82 402 18 25 198 267 A 352 51 18 294 13 60399 three 162 20 89 1 33 1 45,4- cables A 20 Vertical147orind.c.coreor 36 phase26 trefoil spaced 1.0 Touchin a.c.cable, three1
A
I
3O"C
7DC
Note_"
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
TableB.28 Mineral insulated cables bare and exposed to touch or having an overall covering of p.v.c
(copper conductors and sheath)
Voltagedrop (per ampere per meter) for single-phase operation sheath operating temperature: 70C
--
-z--z -x r 0.200 x 0.41 0.160 0.25 0.185 0.165 0.175 0.49 0.91 0.29 0.180 0.64 0.170 0.34 0.195 1.65 0.145 1.65 1.20 1.65
2.6 2.6 10 Multicore cables 4.2 2Two 742 28 1"1 42 3 17 4.2 10 mV Touchingsingle-core cables, mV
EBCS-10 1995
119
Table B.28 Mineral insulated cables bare and exposed to touch or having an overall covering of p.v.c
(copper conductors and sheath) (conte'd)
Voltage drop (per ampere per meter) for single-phase operation sheath operating temperature: 70C --- r r r x x0.210.54 Spaced 0.56 0.46 single-core formation z 0.21 0.140 0.26 0.28 3.6 1.050.31 0.83 0.26 0.24 0.58 43.6 5 0.21 30.29 20.25 0.39 0.60 0.32 0.150 0.36 0.53 0.36 0.23 0.40 0.150V 0.43 1.10 0.78 0.160- -0.800.220.87 0.26 0.145 0.30 Multicore 0.1650.1400.220.22 0.40 0.36 6.06.0 0.36 0.47 0.269.19.1 0.42 1.10 0.32 2.3 0.410.28 1.45 0.27 0.25 0.79 242.3 1 cable 3636 0.32 14 0.550.30 2.3 3.6 6.0 9.1 14 24 36 14 1.05 0.165 1.05 0.65 1.45 0.170 1.45 1.50 1.45 1.05 1.600.1251.60 1.45 0.200.29 0.1550.330.29 ThreeTouching.Flat cables 0.82 0.44 mV m 0.25 24 mV Trefoil, touching Conductor diameter apart
cables
120
EBCS-10 1995
Table B.29 Mineral insulated cables bare and neither exposed to touch nor in contact ""th comhustible materials
(copper conductors Current-carrying capacity (Amperes): Reference Method 1 (Oipped Direct) 1.0 and sheath) Ambient temperature: 30"C Sheath operating temperature: 105C formation,
-- -1 -cables in flat loaded 544 312 35 41 217.5four-core 212 19 40 46 36 260 117 134 140 119 107 50 58 59 33 171 22 17.5 a.c.three20 26 465 trefoil all 1 334 572 230 290 4 three-core 8 3 9 6 5 18.5 A 32 53 16.5 27 383 47 21 2 435 410 359 44 '22 24 30 492 15.5 280 67 187 cores 154 103 28 cablesa.c. loaded phase12 nineteen-' all 121 7 16.5 A cores-single-core cable- allorthreecable core 251single 1 221 70Acables core 28seven-core 51 384 3113 55cable, cable 203twelve-core 307 single127 166 485 424 2414 550 cable, loaded' phase loadedcores 3 369 a.c. or in 643 42 3cores 3loaded cable single-core cores, three-phase
10.5
ii) No correction factor for grouping need be applied. iii) Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding temperature.
7ffc it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating
....
tv tv
Table B.29 Mineral insulated cables bare and neither exposed to touch nor in contact with combustible materials (copper conductors and sheath) (conte'd) Current-carrying capacity (Amperes): Reference Methods 12 and 13 (Free air) -61 137 56 105 385 323 266 216624 498 441 178 47 43 33 2678 Touching a.c. core
1 1.0
1phasecores..1 cablesevenallallS1n21e-corecables, the sheaths 01 the CIrcUItare assumed to be connected tOQetler at both ends. four-core 441 629 500 35 46 85 5624 70 cores 64 63 51697 all 6454 146 150 4387cores 71cable 617 385 26 50 40 twelve28 38 37 19nineteen18 12 11 16 530 24 30 73 120 A184 96 A 115 54 112 For460 cable 127 157 39corescable 359loaded 300 247 three200 A 2933 2331 469 411 204 164 370 304 248 4945 3714 291 704 565 505 441 54 335 279 228 21 20 14 584 126 26 18 34 49 25cables 32 single28 13 11 19 32526 a.c. 35 32 15 three-coresingleHorizontal3 in 18941cores trefoil loaded core threefour-core A197 Acable, A 22 43 16.5 117 core loaded all loaded cable, 76two-core 137 400 333 220 60 phase 2or spaced 3179 a.c. 272 104 Vertical 557 phase a.c spaced single3 single-core cables three-phase
10
ii) iii)
No correction factor for grouping need be applied. Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding at.inp:: temporat.-ure. ope ...
7Cf'C.
it shall be asce:1:ained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
Table B.30 Mineral insulated cables, bare and neither exposed to touch nor in contact with combustible materials (copper conductors and sheath) Voltage drop (per ampere per metre) for single-phase operation Sheath Operating Temperature:
105C -z x , -- z - 0.51 0.155 0.36 0.33 0.180 0.71 1.85 0.41 0.27 0.21 0.1451.00 1.35 1.35 0.160 1.85 0.165 0.44 1.00 1.850.150 r 0.26 0.175 0.54 0.170 0.31 6 Conductor x 1.85 0.69
~ i.
Touching 3.0 4.7 2 3 31 47 47 7.8 12 12 19 4.7 31 A 7.8 19 3.0A Two single-core cables
Multicore cables
EBCS-10 1995
123
Table B.30 Mineral insulated cables, bare and neither exposed to touch nor in contact with combustible materials (conte' d) (copper conductors and sheath)
Voltage drop (per ampere per metre) for single-phase operation: - z-x x xr r rx z Sheath operating temperature: 105C
0.1800.1300.22 0.39 2.6 20.88 0.23 0.60 0.155 0.62 1.25 0.36 '4.1Trefoil 1.65 0.29 0.135 0.125 0.43 0.26 0.25 0.91 0.63 0.26 0.33 0.39 0.27 0.37 0.34 0.27 0.61 0.20 0.31 0.22 0.37 0.87 0.140 0.88 formation single-core cables cables 0.90 0.29 1.20 1.15 0.150 0.47 0.56 1.60 0.160 1.20 0.36 1.60 0.195 0.42 1.15 0.22 1.60 0.21 0.45 0.145 touching1.60 Touching 0.48 0.31 0.50 0.46 0.21 0.23 6.86 1.65 0.95 0.130 0.30 Multicore 0.29 0.32 1.65 0.26 540 42 3277 0.38 0.65 4.1 16 40 10 2.6 6.8 10 16 40 27 6.8 1 mV 0.290.70 Three mV 10 2.6 4.1 cable 1.20 0.28 0.29 mV 2.6 Spaced 1Flat 0.48 diameter apart
124
EBCS-10 1995
Current-carrying
Table B.31 Single-core P.V.C.-insulated cables, non-a . ured, "..jth or without sheath o (aluminium conductors) capacity (Amperes): Ambient temperature: 30C Conductor operating temperature: 70C
vertical)
120
cross-
- e-phase orthreecables,thre Reference Method 1 4133- orflat cables, 545d.c.a.c. Reference Method 11 phase and4or 1022cables3 4773three900 A ord.c. touchingflat 771 - and 507 625 680 787 837 8 three6 single210 or 234 435 306 261 375 312 149 316 364 230 237 273 274 317 501 466 344 170 215 289 252 128 148 165 107 203 234 181 129 191 1293 1026 1066 776 902 590 546 761 953 907 926 11 spaced 84 93 472 584 502 352 543 511 266 4189 245 210 225 410 358 432 354 269 227 3d.c. 299 226 204 123 159 150 12three433 469 444 407 384 394 324 298 240 277 301 283 163 132 144 134 104 9 or 5cables 11 169 185 172 133 256 206 161 538 194 186 118 142 2 626 462 669 722 679 7164 1073 flat 1125 1229 823 709 956 820 726 582 629 405 886 591 999 A Reference (on a (clipped direct) cables threeorVerticala.c. Horizontal 4 cablesa.c. or d.c. 2 a.c. perforated cab 2 10BTrefoil cables, phased.c. 4flat3 tray,Reference Method I 12 (free air) phase singlephaseand a.c. Methodflat Method 3 phase a.c. horizontal or 3singleflat a.c. trefoil and 2 cables, Reference in conduit etc.) 2 singlecables, 2trefoil cables, touchingor spaced single(enclosed phase a wall or in trunking on
~ ~
Nnte: Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosedfuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex.
,,,.
Reference 12 {In treflJi Reference Methods 1 Zzz fin 0.094 ,nd Mllthods " ,nd tflUching} z0.155 0.195 tray$, 1111 {cippetl direct fI' x1.35 A0.23 x Z Reference 3 " 4 3 0.25 D.24 1.40 0.26 1.15 0.24 2 c,bIes . singfe-p/llse a.c. Methods c,bIes D.26 1.60 0.28 C8bJesd~. 4 II' M,thod .0.135 0.77 0.1511 0.39 0.155 0.70 0.77 0.34 0,48 0.31 0.26 D.29 0.37 0.79 0.52 0.145 0.170 tflUChing} 0.077 0.074 0.30 0.35 0.67 0.170 0.100 0.59 0.61 0.45 D.25 0.92 1.40 0.24 1.35 2 0.22 D.22 0.071 0.155 0.24 0.21 0.075 D.29 0.060 ow 0.066 0.23 0.089 0.135 D.28 x 0.260.140 mV 4 and inctmduit ,0.105 in If fin , 3 0.42x 0.810.110 4 mV IFIIt {enclosed in Methods 0.21X 0.510.094 0.67 0.640.077 0.53 0.320.068 0.26 0.42 0.23 0.34 1.10 0.1511 mV 0.24 D.220.27 0.91 0.49 0.61 1.05 0.170 "0.1811 0.195 0.23 0.45 0.55 0.36 0.125 1.55 0.91 0.190 0.135 030 0.110 0.140 0.21 0.24 0.49 0.53 0.61 0.28 0.30 0.26 0.40 1.05 0.165 1.55 0.91 0.42 0.67 0.130 0.32 0.29 0.30 D.27 0.71 0.51 0.58 0.145 0.160 0.74 0.61 0.27 0.35 0.40 0.1511 0.155 0.44 0.28 D.28 0.41 0.94 0.97 0.64 -'.,0 0.26 D.23 0.140 0.35 0.27 0.43 0.21 1.35 0.185 0.1811 0.32 0.28 0.190 0.165 1.05 1.35 1.55 0.30 0.23 0.31 0.25 0.82 0.55 0.37 0.185 0.082 0.86 0.175 0.1811 0.120 Referenc,0.066 etc. 12 0.70 D.24 0.42 D.26 0.511 0.52 0.36 0.74 0.27 0.26 0.40 0,47 0.46 0.96 0.22 0.165 0.29 0.23 0.69 0.55 0.160 0.30 1.60 0.25 0.37 0.22 D.23 0.22 0.77 0.099 0.190 (fndostJd sp,c.!} 0.086 1.55 1.05 0.49 0.61 0.39 0.30 7 0.059 0.1511 mV ..1.55 0.190 1.35 0.1811 Reference 0.94 CflnduitReference infiR etc. ,nd Reference MethlJd 12 wall {sp,c.!} ,nd 11 {FlatMiJtlllJds 1 tflUchingJ
1J I 5
"C
t Spacings larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex Annex A of Section 8) will result in larger voltage drop.
237 207 176 155 381 285 330 280 core 210 three351 305 248 259 227 212 184 197 160 Reference Method (enclosed in direct) Reference Method 3 11 (on a orcore a.c. 86 2cable,three150 140 160 58 59 11135-single- four1245a.c.two-core three- oror 130 a.c.cable 108 131 210 118 116 139 173 170 195 157 183 98 4 cable,92d.c.two-core, 44 73 54 41 71 53 65 3three-phase 6phase 61 66 48 89 83 62 9 8core 5A A 125 111 78 117 135 110 96 .104 a.c.cable, a.c. cable,901d.c.or7fourthreeA103 phase single- or phase 11two-core three-phase phase a.c. cable, singlecable, singleReference MethodMethod trunking) air) 1 (clipped 4 Reference Method (enclosed in Reference 13 (free cross- sectional
Note: Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex.
Reference MethlJds 1 z0.31 In 12 {TntrefrJi II II 0.53X X 0.640.068ublesmrtlUelling)MethtJd.0.135 on II Z0.32 I0.135 0.180 tny. 1111nt1MethtJds " 01 r1.35 0.195 0.094 11 {tipped direct A0.22 xD.23 Z0.22 X z Z X0.23 1.35 0.26 0.32 D.27 0.77 1.05 0.36 0.77 0.40 D.28 0.26 0.35 0.15/1 0.190 0.40 0.79 1.05 D.24 0.86 0.185 0.155 0.61 0.5/1 0.37 0.61 1Int1 0.42 0.49 0.51 0.28 1.15 D.29 0.49 1.55 Reference 0.066 0.086 0.190 0.27 0.26 0.24 0.67 0.260.094 0.34 1.10 0.120 Reference In 0.074 0.91 0.15/1conduit 7 d.c. 0.53 0.61 0.39 1.55 0.55 0.70 030 0.53 0.61 1.05 0.165 0.30 0.91 1.55 0.67 0.34 0.58 0.61 D.29 0.71 0.160 0.74 0.44 0.97 0.37 0.41 0.94 "1.10 0.64 0.43 1.40 D.35 0.185 0.180 D.28 0.190 0.165 1.55 0.32 0.67 0.27 0.180 0.100 0.70 0.74 0.25 0.82 D.26 0.46 0.47 0.40 0.42 0.96 0.55 1.60 1.40 0.30 0.92 1.35 0.24 0.77 0.39 1.05 0.30 0.42X 0.510.140 mV 4 and inClJndtitIIetcy12MethtJds 3 0.23 0.21 0.099 0.22 0.45 0.089 0.071 0.059 0.49 0.42 0.48 0.25 0.52 0.135 0.155 0.30 0.55 0.26 0.175 0.082 0.59 0.52 0.45 D.24 0.24 D.21 0.21 0.075 0.29 0.060 mV 0.21 1.600.110 touching) {endtJstJdin in IJf 0.15/1 0.24 0.81 0.15/1 mV 4 0.077 0.105 D.28 0.180 2 D.26 0.170 /0.23mV 0.195 0.125 0.23 0.110 0.140 0.130 0.24 0.155 0.21 0.29 0.30 D.27 D.26 0.31 D.28 0.145 0.23 0.145 0.170 0.140 0.27 0.21 0.30 0.35 0.170 0.36 0.23 0.37 0.165 0.29 0.22 0.25 0.160 D.25 0.26 D.22 0.190 0.066 1.35 0.420.077 4 mV IFIIIt blinReference 1.35 0.69 0.155 .;1.55 '0.281Int1 ReferenceSPIIC.!) 12 0.94 etcy (EndtJSIJdMethIJd Reference tluclling) (spac.!) IInd 11 (FlatMethods 1
1J I 5
"C
t Spacings larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex Annex A of Section 8) will result in larger voltage drop.
cross- sectional
381 285 237 330 core 248 three210a.c.two-core 351 305 259 176 155 184 280 245 212A 227 197 160 Reference Method 11 (on a direct) orcore cable 58 78 150 1207core singlethree- or7 44 54 41 71 53 65 61 66 48 83 62 59 130 131 108 139 157 118 116 170 140 183 195 160 4 cable,92d.c.single296 3 6phase 5 9 125 86 117 135 110 .104 a.c.threea.c. 1135 1d.c.oror or three- a.c. cable,901a.c.cable, 73 89 210 173 111 198 8 03 AA cable, phase-single- fourphasesingle- fourthree-phase Method Reference Method 3 {enclosed in phase a.c. three-phase cable, two-core cable, two-core, Reference 4 {enclosed in Reference Method trunking) air) 1 {clipped Reference Method 13 (free
Note: Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex .
r
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS
120
128
EBCS-10 1995
cross
IV
\0
Note:
by
t Spacings larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex A, Section 8 ) will result in. a larger voltage drop.
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
Conductor
Ambient temperature: 30"C Conductor operating temperature:70"C 94or Reference Method 13 (free air) 113 115 175 11 360 211186(clipped a Reference Methodtray) 2322 - 287d.c. 20289 -or99three-a.c. Method 1 250 216 342 1A131 399 or two-core 312 four-core cable,or direct) 265 three-Reference foursingle-phase (on perforated cable 143A core a.c. 1 68a.c.A 3199 151 58 4 80 94 139119 76 71 61 1 cable, 5 threephase Aphase cable, three-
ingle-
Note:
Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse. see A.6.2 of the Preface to this
Annex.
EBCS-10 1995
131
70C
132
EBCS-10 1995
._~
Current-carrying capacity (Amperes):
... ~~
(alUID.inium con.duc1.ors)
__ i
t<ed
-=-b.~,.
_CJl
CJl
3O"C
9{fC
Reference Method 12 3 cables, I 410336flat&d.c. etc.)3 orReference direct) or 1 (free air) three-phase 1333a.c. 1176-flat 1001--oror or 4693 Reference Method 353-and 671 765 656 or 564trefoil (clipped Method a.c. flat166d.c. orand Horizontal 4 471 344 561 367 12trefoil, 7a.c. 4cables, 3990 11 5220 1056 649 300 256 1307 1151 395 470 515 509 343 406 446 665 726 692 636 742 796 544 652 541 507 1643 1217 1440 1106 1072 1143 1355 366 951 911 979 242d.c., 200phase .149. 253 217 171 215 142 296 273 226 159 210 157 113 261 265 206 244 351 251 140 197 191 125 156 Reference Method 11 10spaced 9266 6253 1216 743 679 566 469 376 1191 396 430 436 346 314 903 791 927 766 626 594 706 1249 1341 1550 Aphase cables 261 231 234 332 271 211 367 326 306 165 169 179 160 a.c.A a.c. or Vertical a.c. singleor cables, 611 4cables, or 21025flat a.c. 3Reference 22 2 or44 three-phase three-phase cables, d.c. single2 three-phaseflat touchingora.c. phase 3...ables three-phe 4d.c.3 horizontal or vertical cables, touchinga.c.and3 a.c. cables, Method 3 three-phase three-phase singl/:!singlesingletouching or a.c. Trefoil 2 cables, (enclosed in conduit on, phase (on wall or in trunking etc.) a a perforated cabletray
Note:
1.
ii
Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex. .Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 7fJ'C, it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suittable for the conductor operating temperature
Spacings larger than those specified in Method 12 (see Annex A of Section 8) will result in a larger voltage drop.
Tabl B~
ftIlI tI_~8
1 (aluminium conductors)
non ou..-
Current-carryingcapacity(Amperes):
313227 273146perforated conduit on a Reference (on 440 272187 180 1 323Acore or 233three- cable, 364 - d.c. 382 97 318 1d.c. or 283four-core 240120 24577. 2169thee- a.c. 1206two-core four- .Reference or wall 3 (enclosed two-core 263 471 409 304 347 three.-phasethree- incable tray), Method or ceiling, a 175-corecable, 145 single115 a.c.a.c. 78 60cable, Reference Method 11 2cable,single3211 210 157 211 198 175 131 156 188 257 104 136 154 124 138 115 87 96 112 103 94 71 90 6108 78 76 64 72 55 5164 4135 241 174 AA 101 126 84 s.c. 19 Acable, phase fourtwo-core phasethree- a.c. or cable,two-core or 1d.c. threephase three-pbase cable,singleReferencesingle11 a.c. or cable, phasefour-core Method 4 (encloseddirect) Reference Method 1 (clipped Method 13 (free air)
cross
Note:
i) Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.62 of th" Preface to this Annex .. ii) Where a conductor operates ata temperature exceeding 7ffc, it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating temperature.
ELECIAICAlINSTALLATION
OF BUILDINGS
136
EBCS-10 1995
Note: i) Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex. ii) Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 7rflC, it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the
l.H
00
operating
temperature:
9(fC
oss-
Spacings larger than tho~ specified in Method 12 (see Annex A. Section 8) will result larger voltage drop.
SECTION 4: CONDUCTORS
Current-carrying
capacity (Amperes):
(free air) 441 418 single-phase 386 356 Referencethree- cable,1 (clipped three- or four-Reference Method 11 (on a perforated - 328 185 5 3 242249- Method four 201305 159two-core cable, 132488 1'08112 166 138 254 145 137 120 113 224 214 174 98 21-284 a.c. or a.c. 41 82 264 85 71 AA 1 direct) 74 92 A 211 cable three-phase cable tray) or Reference Method 13 single-phase core a.c. three1 two-core phase a.c. core cable
Conductor
30C 900C
Note:
i) Where the conductor is to be protected by a semi-enclosed fuse, see A.6.2 of the Preface to this Annex. ii) Where a 'conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 7fYC, it shall be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for the conductor operating temperature.
EBCS-10 1995
139
-0.233.1x 1.10 0.37-0.72 0.28--0.84.60 r 0.45..7-z 02mV Conduct0.560.155.82 d.c. cable 4single- four-core cable, 4.2 0.960.58Two-core 0.71 4.8 1.40 cable phase three-phase a.c. 0.135 0.130 0.135 0.97 1.10 1.65 0.82 1.65 1.15 0.47 0.39 0.26 1.90 3.1 20.130Two-core 0.140 2.2 0.160 0.165 2.20 3.10 2.72.2 0.125 0.31 4.8 0.150 1.45 3 1.95 mV mV 0.160 Three or a.c.
or cross-
90C
140
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION
EQUIPMENT
5.1
SCOPE
service equjpment, and metering equipment and their
5.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. (a) C22.1:1992 Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Sixteenth Edition (b) NFP A 70/NEC: 1986 National Fire Protection Association/ AmericanNational Electrical ~ Code, 1987 Edition (c) IEE:1970 The Institute Electrical of Electrical Engineers, Regulations Fourteenth for the Edition
Requirements
of Buildings,
Incorporating Amendments
5.3
DEFINITIONS
(1) For the purpose of this Section, in addition to the terms defined in Section 1, the following defmitions shall apply. service conductors / cable the supply conductors/cable that extend from the street main or from transformers to the service equipment of the consumer's installation.
141
EBCS-10 1995
service drop
the overhead service conductors from the last pole or other aerial support to and including the splice, if any, connecting to the service-entrance conductors at the building or other structure.
the
terminals of the service equipment and a point usually outside the building, clear of building
the underground
service
conductors
between the terminals of the service equipment and the last point of connection to the service entrance conductors.
Note: Where service equipment is located outside the building walls, there may be no service-entrance or they may be entirely outside the building. conductors,
consumer's in$tallations wiring and apparatus situated upon the consumer's premises installed
and controlled by him, excluding any switchgear of the Supply Authoritywhich may be permitted to use. the consumer
5.4 5.4.1
5.4.1.1
(1) Except as provided in 5.4.1.2" each consumer's installation shall be supplied with a single service.
5.4.1.2
Multiple services
Unless prohibited by Code or Standard or by regulations of the Supply Authority concerning the number of services, additional services shall be permitted in the following cases: (a) In multiple-occupancy building, by special permission, where there is no available space
. for service equipment accessible to all the occupants. (b) Due to capacity requirements, two or more services shall be permitted where:
EBCS-10 1995
142
i) ii)
the load requirements are in excess of 3000.0A at a voltage supply of 600.0V or less; _---/~ the load requirements of a single-phase installation are greater than that normally supplied through one service.
(c) For fire pumps wher~ a separate service is required. (d) For emergency, legally required standby, optional standby, or parallel power production systems where a separate service is required. (e) For different characteristics, such as for different voltage, frequencies or phase, or for different uses, such as different rate schedules.
5.4.1.3 Marking
(I) Where more than one service is permitted or provided, a pennanent plaque or directory shall be installed adjacent each service equipment location denoting all other services on or in the consumers' installation and the area served by each.
5.4.1.4 Grouping
(1) When two or more supply services are installed to a building, all service boxes associated with the various consumer's services shall be grouped, where practicable.
. 143
EBCS-10 1995
5.4.4
(1) Conductors other than service conductors shall not be installed in the same service' way or service~entrance cable.
Exemption: Earthing conductors and load management control conductor having overcurrent protection.
5.4.5
(1) Service conductors installed as open conductors or multi conductor cable without an overall outer jacket shall have a clearance of not less than 925.0mm from windows, doors, porches, fire escape, or similar locations. (2) Service conductors shall not be installed beneath openings through which materials may be moved, such as openings in farm and commercial buildings. (3) Overhead wire shall not be run such that they obstruct entrance to these building openings.
Exemption: Conductors running above the top level of a window shall be permitted for a clearance of requirements
(a) They shall be enclosed so that they will not be exposed to accidental contact; or (b) If not enclosed they shall be installed on a switch board, panel board, or control board and guarded by providing a means for locking or sealing doors giving access to them.
5.5.1.2
(1) Service equipment, raceway, cable armour, cable sheaths, panel boards, etc and any service conductors that are to be earthed shall be done in accordance with the relevant Parts of Section 7.
EBCS-10 1995
144
5.5.1.3
(1) Service equipment shall be suitable for the short-circuit current available at its supply tenninal.
5.5.1.4
Working space
(1) Sufficient working space shall be provided to the vicinity of the service equipment to permit safe operation, inspection, and repairs.
5.5.1.5
Location
serVice equipment shall be installed in an acceptable
location and in compliance with applicable Codes or Standards or by-laws of the Supply Authority concerning the location of service boxes or other equipment and shall be: (a) readily accessible or have the means of operation readily accessible; (b) not located in coal bine, clothes closets, bathrooms, stairways, rooms in which the temperature normally exceeds 30C, dangerous or hazardous locations, in locations where the headroom clearance is less than 2.0m, nor in any similar undesirable locations; and (c) placed within the building being served, unless environmental conditions within the structure are unsuitable, in which case the- service box or other consumer's service equipment may be placed on the outside of the building or on a pole and shall be: i) ii) protected from the weather, or be weatherproof; protected from mechanical injury if less than 2.0m above ground; enter the building. 5.5.2 5.5.2.1 Control
iii) placed as close as practical to the point where the consumer's service conductors
General
(1) Every consumer's installation shall be adequately controlled by switchgear readily accessible to the consumer and which shall incorporate: (a) means of disconnect, (b) means of overcurrent protection,
145
EBCS-10 1995
Where the Supply Authority provides switchgear and pennits part of it to be used by the consumer, the consumer need not then duplicate that part.
5.5.2.2
Means of disconnect
(1) The means of disconnect required by 5.5.2.1 shall comprise a linked switch suitable for operation on load or a linked circuit breaker, arranged to disconnect all circuit. (2) Alternatively, or circuit-breaker for systems where one conductor is connected with earth, the linked switch may be arranged to disconnect the live conductors only and an isolating link
may be inserted in the earthed conductor; such an isolating link shall be so arranged that it is in contact before the linked switch can be closed, or shall be securely fixed. by bolts or screws.
5.5.2.3
Overcurrent protection
(1) The means of overcurrent protection referred to in 5.5.2.1 shall comprise either a fuse inserted in each live conductor of the supply or a circuit-breaker having an overcurrent release fitted in each live conductor of the supply.
Exemption:
i) the rating of all cables connected between the Supply Authority's fuse or circuit-breaker and the consumer's sub-circuit fuse or circuit breakers is not less than the rating of the Supply Authority's fuse or circuitbreaker; and ii) the overcurrent device protecting all circuits controlled by the switchgear are located within the same enclosure as the switchgear or, alternatively, are fixed immediately adjacent to it.
oJ
5.5.2.4
Earth-leakage protec#on
shall be provid~d for service equipment in accordance
Note: When an installation is being planned, it is desirable to consult the Supply Authority, or a competent person
having knowledge of local conditions, to ascertain whether satisfactory protection against earth leakage will be obtained by the use of the fuses or circuit breakers provided for overcurrent protection or by the use of earth-leakage circuit breaker.
EBCS-10 1995
146
5.5.2.5
Sequence of control
(1) The sequence of the equipment forming the switchgear required by 5.5.2.1 shall be such that the means of disconnect follows the consumer's terminal without the intervention of any other apparatus (see Figure 5.1).
~
~:~:~~n~lu~in.~p~ue.::e~t'l~~!:"~I= owltchaut . Included.)
f~
lObi
IIII
::d t~c.ica~~-::~
F. ' Service rUle .nd ncutrallink. If .ny. Wh .upply. W.tt-hour meter and/or time .witch where requlrccl for ofl"-pcaklatifl" S Consumer'. linked .wltch. F.2 Consumer'. main fu~ CB Consumer'. Iinlcedextas-currcnt circuit-bRoker with or without earthDb ~~~~P,'distribution board;
The consumer:s linked switch and the consumer's main fuse may be combined in a switch and fuse unit
5.5.2.6 ..
,r
Detached building
(1) Where a consumer's installation comprises installation in two or more buildings, separate . means of disconnect complying with the requirements of 5.5.2.2 shall be provided in each building.
5.5.2.7
(1) Every means of overcurrent protection shall be suitable for the maximum short-circuit current attainable or available.
5.5.2.8
Discrimination
and settings of overcurrent protective gear, including fuses, and the in the operation of the
arrangement of the installajion shall be such that discrimination overcurrent protective gear is ensured.
147
EBCS-10 1995
5.6 5.6.1
5.6.1.1
(1) A consumer's service conductors running underground to a building from an underground supply system or from a pole line shall be: (a) installed in rigid conduit and be of a type suitable for use in wet locations; (b) a single or multiple conductor cable for service entrance use below ground provided that: i) ii) Hi) The installation is in accordance with Section 8; Rigid conduit is used for mechanical protection where portions are exposed to injury; and The cable ~ without splice or joint from a point of connection at the supply service to the consumer's service equipment in the building.
5.6.1.2
Conduit to drain
(1) Consumer's service conduit entering a building underground shall be suitably drained.
5.6.1.3
Conduitseal
service conduit connected to an underground system shall be sealed with a
.(1) Consumer's
5.6.2
(1) Conductors of a consumer's service which is connected to an overhead supply service at any point above ground on a building or other structure shall be installed in a rigid metal conduit or in one of the following ways, if acceptable: (a} Other type' of rigid conduit, (b) Busway (c) Flexible metal conduit, the conductors being lead-sheathed cable (d) Mineral-insulated cable other than the lightweight type (e) Aluminium sheathed cable
EBCS-10 1995
148
(f) Any other suitable type cable (g) Service entrance cable, provided that: i) ii) it is protected by an acceptable means if within 2.0m of the ground; the voltage does not exceed 230.0V to earth;
iii) it is supported at intervals not more than 1.0m; and iv) it is mounted on insulating supports which hold it not less than 500.Omm from a conducting surface, if adjacent to such a surface. Bare overhead supply conductors running on the outside walls of a building may be run as exposed wiring using types of conductor suitable fdr exposure to the weather .
(2)
.(3) The length of consumer's service conductors beyond the service head shall ~e adequate. to enableconnection to tHe supply service conductors or to the conductors referred to in5.6.2. with a minimum length of 750.0mm. (4) Consumer's service condqctors shall be provided with drip loops. (5) Consumer's service conductors shall be suitable for the temperature which can be
5.7 5.7.1
(1) Metering equipment shall be connected on the load side of the service box except that it may be connected on the supply where: (a) no live parts or wiring are exposed; (b) the voltage does not exceed 380.0V between conductors; and (c) the rating of the consumer's serVice does not exceed: i) ii)
Note:-
200.0A for a meter mounting device, or' 600.0A for transformer rated meter mounting device located outdoors.
Transfonnerrated meter mounting device means a meter mounting device with current transfonners and with or without test sw.itches mounted in the same enclosure~
149
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION
6.1
SCOPE
(1) This section covers conductor ampacities and equipment ratings required for consumer's services, feeders and branch circuits.
6.2
NORMATIVEREFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. (a) C22.1: 1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations Sixteenth Edition. National Electrical Code Handbook Based on the 1981 (NEC), Seventeenth Edition.
6.3
DEFINITIONS
shall apply in addition to the terms
(1) For the purpose of this Section, the followingdefinitions defined in Section 1.
demand factor
it is the ratio of the maximum demand of a system or part ora system, to the total connected load on the system, to the maximum demand of the whole consideration. system,or part of a system, under
diversity factor
the ratio of the sum of the individual maximum demands of the various subdivisions of a system, or part of a system, to t~e maximum demand of the whole system, or part of a system, under consideration.
continuous load
any condition in which the maximum load current in a circuit flows without interruption for a period of not less than 3.0hrs.
EBCS-10 1995
150
6.4 6.4.1
(1) When calculating the currents from loads expressed in watts or volt-amperes, to be supplied by a low voltage a.c. system, the voltage divisor to be used shall be 230.0Y or 380.0Y as applicable.
The ampacity of conductors of a feeder or branch circuit shall not exceed the ampacity of
the conductors of 'the service or of the feeder from which they are supplied.
6.5 6.5.1
(1) The minimum ampacity of service or feeder conductors supplying a single-family dwelling shall be based on the following:
151
EBCS-10 1995
(a) a basic load of 2500.0W for the first 70.0m2 of living area; plus (b) an additional 1000.OW for each 70.0m2 or portion thereof in excess of 70.0m2; plus (c) 3500.0W for any electric "Injera Mitad"; plus (d) 6000.0W for a single cooking stove having a rating of 12.0kW or less, plus 40% of the amount by which the rating of the cooking stove exceeds 12.0kW; plus (e) any electric water heater with a demand factor of 100%.
6.5.2
(1) The minimum ampacity of service or feed,er conductors from a main service supplying loads in dwelling units shall be based on the following: (a) a basic load of 2500.0W for the first 45.0m2 of living area; plus (b) an additional 1500.0W for the second 45.0m2 or portion thereof; plus (c) an additional 1000.0W for each 'additional 90.0m2 or portion thereof in excess of the initial 90.0m2; plus (d) 3500.0W for any electric "Injera Mitad"; plus (e) 6000.0W for a single cooking stove having a rating of 12.0kW or less, plus 40% of the amount by which the rating of the cooking store exceeds 12.0kW; plus
EBCS-10 1995
152
(b) If air-conditioning is used, the amount by which the sum of all the air-conditioning loads exceeds 1500.0V A shall be added, with a demand factor of 100%, to the load determined in accordance with (a) above. (c) In addition, any lighting, heating, and power loads not located in dwelling units shall be added with a demand factor of 75%.
Note:
The living area designated in Clause 6.5.1 and 6.5.2 shall be determined from the outside dimensions of the group floor of the dwelling plus 75% of the basement area based on the inside dimensions, plus any area which might normally be used for living purposes on the upper floors.
6.5.3 Schools
(l) The minimum ampacity of service or feeder conductors shall be based on the following: a) a basic load of 50.0W/m2 of classroom area; plus b) 10.0W/m2 of the remaining area of the building based on the outside dimensions; plus c) air conditioning, and power loads based on the rating of the installed equipment. (2) Demand factors may be applied as follows: (a) 75% for a building with an area upto and including 900.0m2 based on the outside dimensions. (b) For a building with an area exceeding 900.0m2 based on the outside dimensions, the load may, be divided by the number of square meters to obtain a load-pre-square-meter and the demand load may be considered to be the sum of: i) 75% of the load per square meter multiplied by 900; and ii) 50% of the load per square meter multiplied by the area of the building in excess of
900.0m2
rating
6.5.4
Hospitals
(1) The minimum ampacity of service or feeder conductors shall be based on the following: (a) a basic load of 20.0W/m2 of the area of the',building based on the outside dimensions; plus (b) 100.0W/m2 for high intensity area such as operating rooms; plus (c) air conditioning, and power loads based on the rating of the installed equipment
153
EBCS-10 1995
(2) Demand factors may be applied as follows: (a) 80% for a building with an area upto and including 900.0m2 based on the outside dimensions; (b) For a building with an area exceeding 900.0m based on the outside dimensions, the balance of the load may be divided by the number of square meters to obtain a load-persquare-meter rating aDd the demand load may be considered to be the sum of: i) 80% of the load per square meter multiplied by 900; and ii) 65% of the load per square meter multiplied by the area of the building in excess of
900.0m2
6.5.5
(1) The minimum ampacity of service or feeder conductors shall be based on the following: (a) a basic load of 20.0W/m2 of the area of the building based on the outside dimensions; plus (b) lighting loads for special areas such as ballrooms; based on the rating of the equipment installed; plus (c) air conditioning and power loads based on the rating of the equipment installed. (2) Demand factors may be applied as follows: a) 80% for a building with an area upto and including 900.0m2 based on the outside dimensions; b) For a building with an area exceeding 900.0m2 based on the outside dimensions, the balance of the load may be divided by the number of square meters to obtain a load-persquare meter rating and the demand load may be considered to be the sum of: i) 80% of the load per square meter multiplied by 900; and ii) 65% of the load per square meter multiplied by the area of the building in excess of
900.0m2
EBCS-10 1995
154
6.5.6
Other Types of Occupancy ampacity of service of feeder conductors for the types of occupancies
specified in Table 6.1 shall be based on the following: (a) a basic load to be calculated on the basis of watts per square meter required by Table 6.1 for the area served based on the outside dimensions, with application of demand factors as indicated therein; plus (b) special loads such as air conditioning, power loads, show window lighting, stage lighting, etc, based on the rating of the equipment installed with such demand factors as are permitted by this Code.
6.5.7
Branch Circuits
(1) Conductors of a branch circuit supplying "Injera Mitad" and/or cooking stove in a dwelling unit shall be considered as having a demand of (a) 3.5kW for "Injera Mitad"; (b) 8.0kW where the rating of the cooking stove does not exceed 12.QkW; or (c) 8.0kW.plus 40% of the amount that the rating of the cooking stove exceeds 12.0kW.
Note:
For the purpose of Clause 6.5.7(1), two or more separate built-in cooking units may be considered as one cooking
industrial,
and
institutional establishments, the demand shall be considered as not being less than the rating. (3) The demand loads given in (1) above shall not apply to cord-connected hotplates or other appliances.
6.5.8
(1) Feeder demand factors for lifts shall be as shown in Table 6.2.
155
EBCS-10 1995
Table 6.1 Demand factor for service and feeders and watts per square meter for various types of occupancy
Feeders 100 90 100 80 70 80 100 70-90 70qO 75 95 Service
30 15 10 20 5 25 1Q Watts50 m2 per
Demand factor
[%]
-.
conductor
0.95 0.90 1.00 0.73 feeder 0.85 0.77 0.82 or6 9 7 0.75 0.72 8 Number(OF) Demand Number of lifts on singleDemand lifts on (OF) a 100.79more of factors
Note:
Demand factors (DF) are based on 50% duty (i.e, half-time load, half-time no load).
EBCS-10 1995
156
SECTION
(1) Part I of this Section covers the prote;:ctionof electrical installation by earthing and bonding. (2) This part also covers provisions for insulating and guarding as suitable alternatives to earthing where permi~d 7.2 by this Code.
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. (a) C22.1: 1992 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for
Electrical Installations, Sixteenth Edition. (b) NFPA 701NEC:1987 (c) IEE:1970 An American National Electrical Code.
The Institute of Electrical Engineers, Regulations Electrical Equipment of Buildings, Incorporating Amendments. Fourteenth
157
EBCS-10 1995
7.3 7.3.1
(1) A two~wire direct-current system suppiying interior wiring and operating at not more than 300.0V or not less than 50.0V between conductors shall be earthed, unless such system is used. for supplying industrial equipment in limited areas and the circuit is equipped with an earth detector.
(2) The neutral conductor of all3-wire direct-current systems supplying interior wiring shall be earthed.
7.3.2
a) by so doing, their maximum voltage-to-earth does not exceed 230.0Y; or b) the system incorporates a neutral conductor. (2) Wiring ,.. systems supplied by an unearthed supply shall be equipped with a suitable earth
Idetection device to indicate the presence of an earth fault. (3) Circuits of less than 50.0V shall be earthed under any of the following conditions: a) Wliere supplied by transformers that are energized from: i) systems of more than 230.0Y-to-earth; or . ii) unearthed system. b) where installed as overhead outside of buildings. (4) Where primary windings of current and voltage instrument transformers are connected to circuits of 230.0V-or-more-to-earth, (5) Where the transformers the secondary circuits of the transformer shall be earthed. the secondary circuits shall be earthed
are on switchboards,
EBCS-10 1995
158
,.
7.4 7.4.1
(5) For circuits that are supplied from two sources in a common enclosure or grouped together in separate enclosure and employing a tie, a single earthing electrode connection to the tie point of the earthed circuit conductors from each power-supply source shall be permitted. (6) Where the system is earthed at any point, the earthed conductor shall be run to each individual service and not be smaller than the required earthing conductor specified in Table 7.1, and where the earthed circuit conductor also serves as the neutral, the requirements relevant Clauses of Section 4 shall be met. of the
159
EBCS-10 1995
a) The earthing conductor shall not be smaller than that specified in Table 7.1. b) If two or more systems are employed, a common system earthing conductor shall be installed unless separate earthing is supplied for each such system, in which case the earthing for the individual systems shall be interconnected.
7.4.4
(1) Where to or more buildings or structures are supplied from a single service: a) the earthed circuit conductor at each of the buildings or structures shall be connected to an earthing electrode and bonded to the non-current-carrying metal parts of the electrical equipment; or b) except for buildings housing livestock, the non-current-carrying metal parts of the ~lectrical equipment in or on the building or structure shall be pennitted to be bonded to earth by a bonding conductor run with the feeder or branch circuit conductors.
7.4.5
Conductors to be Earthed.
(1) For a.c. wiring systems, the conductors to be earthed shall be as follows: a) Single-phase, 2-wire, the identified conductor; b) Single-phase, 3-wire, the identified neutral conductor; c) Multi-phase conductor; systems having one wire common to all phases, the identified neutral
'd) Multi-phase systems having one earthed phase, the identified conductor; e) Multi-phase systems in which one phase is used as in (b) above, the identified conductor.
7.4.6
(1) Where wiring systems, circuits, electrical equipment, cable annour, conduit and other metal ./ . raceways are earthed as a protective measure, the earthing shall be arranged so that there is no objectionable passage of current over the earthing conductor or earthing path. (2) If the use of multiple earthing connecti9ns results in an objectionable flow of current, one or more of the following alterations shall be made: a) Abandon one or more of the earthes. b) Change the locations of the earthing connections .
EBCS-10 1995
160
c) Interrupt the continuity of the conductors between the earthing connections. d) Take other suitable remedial 'action to limit the current.
Note;
The temporary currents which are set up under accidental conditions while the earth conductors are performing their intended protective functions are not considered objectionable.
7.5 7.5.1
conduit, ducts, trucking boxes, and catenary wires, shall be bonded to earth. (2) Where isolation of metal is adopted as a protective measure (prevention of dangerous earthleakage current), it shall be confined to the following items: .
a) Short isolated lengths of metal used 'for the mechanical protection of cables having a non-metallic sheath. b) Metal clips used for fixing cables. c) Small metal parts such as screws,
this does not apply to double-insulated equipment or isolated metal parts referred to in Clause 7.5.1(2).
'.S.4
Non-Electrical Services
(1) Metal parts of water supply services and gas services which may become energized shall be bonded to earth.
161
EBCS-10 1995
(2) The bonding conductor shall be attached to the water supply service or gas service: a) at a location as near to consumer's electrical service entrance as is practicable; and b) at a location where a sub-feeder enters a building. (3) The water supply service or the gas service shall be bonded by means of a copper bonding conductor riot less than the appropriate value shown in Table 7.1 subject to a minimum size of
2.5mm2
Note:-
i) For the purpose of Clause 7.,5 the associated circuit conductor is the largest conductor connected into the input side of the consumer's switchgear.' ii) Conductor of material other than copper shall have a resistance not exceeding that of the prescribed copper conductor. _ Hi) Connection to the pipes of the services shall be made by means of a clamp.
EBCS-10 1995
162
Table 7.1 Minimum sizes of copper-earthing and copper-bonding conductors not contained in a composite cable, flexible cable, or flexible cord
Nominal cross-sectional ~
mm2
6 1.0t70 16 50 50 50' 70 Nominal cross-sectional 2.5 16 6 6 2.5t of bonding coductor mm2 1.0t mm2 area are. of earthing conductor Nominal cross-sectional
2.Smm2
163
EBCS-10 1995
7.5.5
(1) The exposed metal parts of all equipment which is required by this part of the Code to be earthed, which might otherwise come into fortuitous contact with extraneous fixed metalwork, shall be either effectively segregated therefrom, or effectually bonded thereto, so as to prevent appreciable voltage differences at such possible points of contact. (2) For sizes of bonding conductors, refer to Table 7.1.
Note:
The extraneousfixed metalworkrequiredto be bondedand earthedin these circumstancesincludesthe following: i) Baths and exposedmetal pipes,sinksandtanks,in the absenceof metal-to-metaloints of negligible j electricalresistances. ii) Wherepracticable,accessiblestructuralsteelwork. Hi) Frameworkof mobile equipment,such as cranes and lifts, on which an electrical apparatusis mounted.
7.6 7.6.1
(1) The path to earth from circuits, equipment, or conductor enclosures shall be permanent and continuous and shall have: / a) sufficient ampacity to conduct safely any current liable to be imposed on it; and
b) impedance sufficiently low to limit the voltage above earth, and to facilitate the operation of overcurrent devices in the circuit.
7.6.2
(1) The earthing conductor for circuits shall be permitted to be used as a bonding conductor for equipment, conduit, and other metal raceways, or enclosure for conductors, including service conduit or cable sheath and service equipment.
7.6.3
as specified in Clauses 7.4.2, the same electrode may be used to earth conductor enclosures and
EBCS-10 1995
164
7.6.4
Underground Service
(I) Where an underground service cable is served from a continuous underground metal sheathed cablesystem and the sheath or armour of the service cable is connected to the underground system,the sheath or armour of the service cable shall not be required to be bonded to earth at thebuilding if it is insulated from the interior conduit or piping. (2) Where a metal-sheathed service cable served from a continuous underground metal sheathed cablesystem is bonded to the underground system and is contained in an underground service conduit,the conduit shall not be required to be bonded to earth at the building if it is insulated fromthe interior conduit or piping.
7.6.5
(1) Isolated section of metal raceway or cable armour, if required to be bonded to earth, shall preferably be bonded so by connecting to other earthed raceway or armour.
7.6.6
Fixed Equipment
(I) Fixed equipment shall be bonded to earth in one of the following ways: a) An effective metallic connection to earthed metal raceways, 4 metal sheath, or cable ' aiIDOUrexcept: i) ii) Armour as specified in Clauses in '(2) and (3) below; and/or sheath of mineral-insulated and/or cable when of stainless steel as specified in (4) below;
iii) where the raceway or cables are run underground, in locations subject to corrosion. b) A bon,ding conductor which is run with circuit conductors as a part of a cable assembly and which may be uninsulated; but, if provided with an individual covering, the covering shall be finished to show a green colour or a green/yellow combination. c) A separate bonding conductor installed the same as a bonding conductor for conduit and the like. d) Other acceptable means.
165
EBCS-10 1995
(2) The armour of armoured cables incorporating a bonding conductor shali not be considered as fulfilling the requirements of a bonding conductor for the purpose of this ~lause, and the bonding conductor provided in these cables shall comply with (1b) above. (3) The armour of flexible metal conduit and liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall not be considered as fulfilling the requirements of bonding conductor for the purposes of this Clause, and a separate bonding conductor shall be run within the conduit. (4) The sheath of mineral-insulated cable having a stainless steel shall not be considered as
7.7.
fulfilling the requirements of a bonding conductor for the purposes of this Clause and bonding shall be by one of the methods specified in (1b) or (1d) above.
(1)
ear
con
7.7 7.7.1
7.7
(1) (I) Where a non-conductive protective coating such as paint or enamel ii used on the equipment, conduit, couplings or fittings, such coating shall be removed from threads and other contact surfaces in order to ensure a good electriq~1 connection.
as~
7.7.2
(1) The electrical continuity of the earthing circuit at the service equipment shall be assured by one of-the means given in Clause 7.7.3 for the following equipment and enclosures if of metal: a) Service raceways or service armour or sheaths. b) All service equipment enclosures containing service entrance conductors including meter fittings, boxes or the like, interposed in the service raceway or armour. c) Any conduit or armour which forms part of the earthing conductor to the service raceway.
7.
(1
b:
7.7.3
(1) Electrical continuity at service equipment shall be assured by: a) the use of threaded couplings and threaded bosses on enclosures with joints made up tight rigid metal conduit is used; or
EBCS-10 1995
166
b) the use of threadless couplings made up tight where electrical metallic tubing is used; or c) the use of bonding jumpers meeting the requirements of Clauses 7.7.7 and 7.9, or d) other devices (not standard locknuts and bushings) such as earthing bushings equipped with bonding jumpers meeting the requirements of Clause 7.7.7 below.
(2) Metal through raceways used in connection with sound recording and reproducting equipment madeup in sections shall contain an earthing conductor to which each section shall be bonded.
A bonding jumper is a reliable conductor to assure the required electrical conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically connected.
167
EBCS-10 1995
,.
a) They shall be copper or other corrosion-resistant material. b) They shall be of sufficient size to have an ampacity not less than that required for the corresponding earthing conductor. c) They shall be attached to cabinets and similar equipment in a manner specified in Clause 7.10.4. d) They shall be straps when used for bonding non-current-carrying be less than 19.0mm in width and not less than.: i) l.4mm in thickness if of steel; or ii) 1.2mm in thickness if of aluminium or copper. metal parts; shall not
7.8 7.8.1
(1) The type and embedded depth of an earth electrode shall be such that the freezing of soil will not increase its resistance above the required value.
(2) The design used in and the construction of an earth electrode shall be such as to withstand damage and to take account of possible increase in resistance due to corrosion.
7.8.2
7;8.2.1
(1) Where a service water pipe from a public water main to a building is used as earthing electrode, it shall be: a) continuously conductive; b) located or placed underground not less than 2S0.0mm below the normal permanent moisture level; and c) the underground building served. portion extends not less than 3.0m beyond the extremities of the
EBCS-10 1995
168
7.8.2.3
(1) Where a metal casing of a pump system is used as earthing electrode, it shall not be less than 75.0mm in diameter and shall extend at least 15.0m below the well-head.
7.8.2.4
Bonding
(1) Where more than one of the earthing means listed under Clause 7.8.2 exist at a building, they shall be bonded together with a conductor complying with Clause 7.5.4(3).
7.8.3 7.8.3.1
(1) A concrete-encased
foundation footing that is in direct contact with the ground and shall be: a) a bare copper conductor not less than 6.0m in length and of size specified in Table 7.2, or b) a plate electrode that shall: i) present not less 0.4m2 of surface to the concrete encasing the plate; ii). be not less than 6.0mm in thickness if of iron or steel; or .5mm in thickness if
non-ferrous metal; and iii) have a means of attachment for' the system earthing conductor that shall be accessible after the concrete is poured.
conductor
169
EBCS-10 1995
, 7.8.3.2
Rod electrode
(1) A rod electrode shall: a) be not less than 16.0mm in diameter if of iron or steel, or 12.7mm if non-ferrous metal or ferrous metal clad with a non-ferrous metal; b) be not less than 3.0m in length; c) have a clean metal surface which is not covered with paint, enamel, or other poor conducting material; and d) be spaced not less than 3.0m apart (if more than two rods are required).
7.8.3.3
Plate electrode
(1) Plate electrode shall present not, less than O.2m2 of surface to exterior soil and be not less than 6.35mm in thickness if of iron or steel, or 1.5mm if of ferrous metal.
7.8.3.4
Laying
(1) An artificial earthing electrode shall be buried: . a) at least 250.0mm below permanent moisture level as far as practical; b) in a horizo,lltal trencl\ where rock bottom is encountered at depth less than 1.2m.
7.8.3.5
(1) A rod electrode shall be driven to a depth of no less than 3.0m regardless of the size or number used, except that:
'. J.
a) where rock bottom is encountered at a depth of 1.2m or more, it shall be driven to rock bottom; or b) where rock bottom is encountered at a depth of less than 1.2m, it shall be buried in a horizontal trench and be not less 3.0m long.
7.8.3.6
~l'acing
(1) Each electrode shall be separated at least 2.0m from any other electrode including an electrode used for signal circuits, radio, lightning, or any other purpose.
EBCS-10 1995
170
7.8.3.7
Connection of electrodes
(1) Where separation of the different system electrodes is not possible, the electrodes shall be connectedtogether, at or below ground level, with a copper conductor of a size not less than that of the earthing conductor for the electrical system and in no case shall the conductor be smaller than l6.0mm2 copper.
7.8.3.8
Bonding
(1) Where any or all of the separate earthing electrodes are bonded together the bonding , conductor shall be: a) a copper conductor not smaller than l6.0mm2; b) installed so as not to be subjected to mechanical damage; and c) connected to electrodes for power systems by means of a bolted clamp or soldered joints and preferably be connected to other electrodes in the same manner.
EARTHING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS General Continuity of earthing and bonding conductors
(1) No automatic cutout or switch shall be placed in the earthing or bonding conductor of a wiring system unless the opening of the cutout or switch disconnects all sources of energy.
7.9.1.2
7.9.1.3
(1) The earthing conductor of a wiring system, whether also used for earthing electrical equipment or not, may be insulated or bare, and shall be: a) a conductor of copper or other corrosion-resistant material, insulated or bare; b) a bus bar or steel pipe; _
171
EBCS-10 1995
c) rigid metal canduit, except where used undergraund ar in any lacatian where material having a deteriarating effect may came into. cantact with the metal, ar in any expased raceway installed autdaars where it may be subject to. mechanical damage fram vehicular traffic, in which case a separate canductar as required in (a) abave shall be installed within the canduit; d) electrical metallic tUbing, except where used in cancrete ar masanry slabs in cantact with the graund ar in any lacatian where material having a deteriarating effect may came into. cantact with the metal, ar in any expased raceway installed autdaars where it may be subject to. mechanical damage fram vehicular tra~c, in which case, separate canductar as required in (a) abave shall be installed within"the tubing; e) the sheath af mineral-insulated cable, except when it is stainless steel, ar any canductar af a mineral-insulated cable if it is permanently marked at the time af installatian so. that it can be readily distinguished fram canductars that are nat used as banding canductars, except that if the sheath is af aluminium in an undergraund run ar in a lacatian where materials having a deteriarating effect may came in cantact with the metal, carrosion resistant protection suitable for the carrasive condition encauntered shall be provided; f) the sheath af aluminium-sheathed cable, but if used far underground runs or in lac~atians
where materials having a deteriorating effect may came in contact with the metal, c~)ITasian-resistant pratectian suitable far the corrasive canditions encauntered shall be pravided; ar g) ather metal raceways or cable armaur as provided for in Clause 7.6.6.
7.9.2
(1) The earthing canductar far a system shall be withaut jaint ar splice throughaut its length, except in the case af bus bars, thermit welded jaints, campressian connectars applied with a campressian taal compatible with the particular cannectar, ar devices acceptable far connection in series with the earthing canductor. (2) 16.0mm2 ar larger capper earthing canductar which is free from expasure to. mechanical injury may be run alang the surface af the building constructian withaut metal cavering or protectian, if it is rigidly stapled to. the canstructian; o.therwise, it shall be in conduit, electrical metallic tubing or cable armour.
EBCS-10 1995
172
(3) A copper earthing conductor of IO.Omm2 shall be in conduit, electrical metallic tubing or cable annour.
(4) Metal enclosures for earthing conductors shall be continuous from the point of attachmen~ to cabinets or equipment to the earthing electrode and shall be securely fastened to the earthing clamp or fitting. (S) Where an earthing conductor is run in the same raceway with other conductors of the system to which it is connected, it shall be insulated, except that where the length of the raceway does not exceed IS.Om between pull points and does not contain more than the equival~ll_tof two quarter bends between pull points, an uninsulated earthing conductor may be used. (6) Notwithstanding the requirements of (2) above, earthing conductor of I6.0mm2 or larger may be embedded in concrete provided that the points of emergency are so located or guarded as not to constitute exposure to mechanical injury.
7.9.3
(1) The bonding conductor for equipment shall be pennitted to be spliced or tapped; but such splices or taps shall be }.nadeonly within boxes except that, in the case of open wiring, they shall be pennitted to be -made externally from boxes and shall be covered with insulation. (2) Where more than one bonding conductor enters a box, all such conductors shall be in good . electrical contact with each other by securing all bonding conductors under bonding screws, or by connecting them together with an acceptable solderless connector and connecting one conductor only to the box by a bonding screw or a bonding device, and the arrangement shall be such that the disconnection or removal of a receptacle, fixture, or other device fed from the box, will not interfere with or interrupt the bonding continuity. (3) Where a bonding conductor is run in the same raceway with other conductors of the system to which it is connected, it shall be insulated, except that where the length of the raceway does not exceed I5.0m and does not contain more than the equivalent of two quarter bends, an uninsulated bonding conductor shall be pennitted to be used. (4) Where a t;igid metal conduit or steel pipe is used as a bonding conductor, the installation .shall comply with Section 8 of this Code.
173
EBCS-10 1995
(5) A copper bonding conductor shall: a) if 16.0mm2 or larger and attached securely to the surface on which it is carried, be protected where exposed to mechanical injury; and b) if smaller than 16.0mm2 or if the installation does not come within the provision in (a) above, be installed and protected in the same manner as the circuit conductor for a given installation. (6) An aluminium bonding conductor shall: a) if 25.0mm2 or larger and attached securely to the surface on which it is carried, be protected where exposed to mechanical injury; or b) if smaller than 25.0mm2 or if the installation poes not come within the provisions in (a) above, be installed and protected in the same manner as the circuit conductor for a given installation. (7) Where a separate bonding conductor supplements the bonding afforded by a ferrous metal raceway, it shall be installed in the same raceway as the circuit conductor.
7.9.4
(1) The ampacity of the earthing conductor for a direct-current supply system or generator shall be not le~s than that of the largest conductor supplied by the system, except where the earthing circuit conductor is a neutral derived from a balancer winding or a balancer set, the size or the earthing conductor shall be not less than that of the neutral conductor. (2) The system earthing conductor shall be copper and in no case smaller than IO.OmrW.
7.9.5
(I ) The size of the earthing conductor shall not be less than those given in Table 7.1
7.9.6
(1) The size of a bonding conductor shall be not less that.l that given in Table 7.1; but in no case does it need to be larger than the largest unearthed conductor in the circuit.-,
EBCS-10 1995
174
7.10
Electrodes
to other electrodes at a point which will assure a permanent earth. (2) Where practicable, the point of attachment in (1) above shall be accessible.
175
EBCS-10 1995
7.10.4 Bonding Conductor Connection to Circuits and Equipment (1) The bonding conductor or bonding jumper shall be attached to circuits, conduits cabinets equipment and the like, which are to be bonded, by means of lugs, pressure wire connector clamps, or. other acceptable means. (2) Connections which depend on soldering shall not be used. (3) The bonding conductor shall be secured to every metal box by means of a bonding screw which shall be used for no other purpose. (4) The bonding conductor shall be brought into every nonmetallic outlet box in such a manner than it can be connected to any fitting or device which may require bonding to earth. (5) Equipment shall be so installed that, if the connections between the branch circuit and the . internal conductors pass through an access c'over, the bonding connection continuous when the cover is removed. shall remain
(6) A bonding jumper shall be installed to connect the bonding conductor to the earthing terminal of a socket outlet and in such a manner that disconnection or removal of the socket outlet will not interfere with or interrupt earthing continuity. (7) In the case of metal-enclosed systems where the earthing path is provided by the metal
enclosure, a bonding jumper shall be installed to bond the earthing terminal of the socket outlet to the enclosure. (8) Notwithstanding the Provisions of (6) and (7) above, the bonding jumper, in the case of
socket outlets having earthing terminals isolated from the mounting strap required for special equipment, may be extended directly back to the distribution panel. 7.10.5 Earthing Conductor Connection to Electrodes (1) The earthing conductor shall be attached to the earthing electrode by means of: a) a bolted clamp, b) a pipe fitting plug or other device screwed into the pipe or into the fitting, c) copper welding by the thermit process brazing or silver solder, or d) other equally substantial means.
ETHIOPIAN
EBCS-10
1995
176
(2) Where a bolted clamp is used for a wet location or for direct earth burial, the clamp shall be of copper, bronze or brass, and the bolts shall be of a similar material or of stainless steel. (3) The earthing Clause 7.10.4(1). (4) Connections which depend on solder shall not be used except for connections utilizing silver solder. (5) Not more than one conductor shall be connected to the earthing electrode by a:single clamp or fitting unless the clamp or fitting is specifically designed for multiple conductor connection. conductor shall be attached to the earthing fitting as required by
177
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION
7.11
SCOPE
(1) This Part of the Code covers the installation of lightning protection requirements for all types of structures with the exception of those structures used for manufacturing explosives. (2) Electric generation, transmission and distribution systems, overhead telephone lines, and , radar stations are not covered by this Code.
7.12
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. (a) BS 6651: 1986 British Standard Code of Practice for Protection of Structures against Lightning, 1990 An American National Standard), Lightning Protection Code. Under writers Laboratories Standard for Installation Requirements for Lighting Protection systems, Ninth Edition.
EBCS-10 1995.
178
7.13 DEFINITIONS
(1) For the purpose Qfthis Section, In addition to the terms defmed in Section I, the following
definitions shaliapply: lightning flash an electrical discharge between cloud and earth, of atmospheric origin, comprising one or more impulse of many kiloamps. lightning strike lightning stroke a lightning flash ,attaching to a ,structure. one of the single distinguishable -current impulses of a lightning flash.
lightning protection system a 'complete system of air termination, conductors, earth termination; interconnection conductors, and other connectors and fittings required to protect a 'structure from the effect of. lightning. airtermin-ation that component of a lightning protection 'system that is intended to intercept lightnirrg flushes. down c;onductor a conductor intended to be used to 'carry lightningcurren:ts between air lermirration 1U1d ~arth temrimrtioo. 'a conductor intended to prov.ide :eIectrica1 connection 'between the liglftrringprotection system ,and 'Other metal-woiksand between various porti'Ons of the latter.
joint
b-ond
between
two or more
test joint
a joint designed and situated so as to enable .resistance 'or 'Continuity measurement to be made. that part of a lightning protection system which is intended to discharge 'lightning currents into the general mass of earth.
earth'termination
179
EBCS-10 1995
ring (loop) earth electrode an earth electrode fonning a closed loop round the structure below
or on the surface of the earth, or within or under the foundations. It may be ~sed for interconnecting other earth electrodes.
side flash
an electrical spark, caused by differences of potential, occurring between conductive metal bodies and component protection system or earth. of lightning
zone of protection
that space adjacent to a protection system which is substantially immune to direct lightning flashes (see Figure 7.2).
7.14
MATERIALS
7.14.1 General
(1) A lightning protection systemt shall be made of materials that are resistant to corrosion or shall be acceptably protected against corrosion. (2) No combination of materials that forms an electrolytic-couple presence of moisture, corrosion is accelerated shall be used.
Note:
One or more of the following materials are acceptable: Copper of the grade ordinarily required for commercial electrical work, generally designated as being of 98% conductivity when annealed. ii) A copper alloy as resistant to corrosion as copper under similar condition. iii) Aluminium conductors of electrical grade aluminium. iv) Galvanized steel with cross~sectionalarea equivalent to that of copper. i)
t The principal parts of a lightning protection system are air termination, down conductors, joints and bonds, test joints, earth termination, and earth electrode.
EBCS-10 1995
180
7.14.3 Corrosion Protection (1) Components shall be protected against corrosion; any part of a copper system that is
exposed to direct action or chimney gases or other similar cOlTosive gases shall be protected by a co,ntinuous hot-dipped coating of lead. (2) All components located within 610.0rnm of the chimney top shall be so protected. (3) Aluminium components are not required to have a coating of lead. 7.14.4 Mechanical Protection
damage or
displacement shall be protected with a protective moulding or tubing. (2) Metal pipe or tubing shall be bonded to the conduit at both ends of the tubing. (3) Conductors shall be securely attached to objects upon which they are placed (see Figure 7.1 and Table 7.5). 7.14.5 Use of Aluminium (1) Aluminium systems shall be installed in accordance with other applicable clauses and subject to the following conditions: a) Aluminium lightning-protection components shall not be installed directly on copper
roofing materials or other copper surfaces where exposed to the run off from copper surfaces. b) (i) Aluminium components shall not be used where they come into direct contract with earth. (ii) Fittings used for the connection of aluminium earthing equipment shall be of the bimetallic type; such bimetallic connectors shall be installed not less than 460.0mm above ground level.
181
EBCS-10 1995
c)
ih direct contact with a surface coated with art alkaline base paint; m-
components shaH not lie insfalled directly on alumihium routing, siding or other
STANDARD
ESCS-10 1995
1"2
P!m~"e!(l
CO!l'lPpnent. fie
Area
.d
Compgnent
mm
Airtermination!!; ~urpir\ium, c;opper 1I11c1. gl!lvan~{l~ ~1l81 !!trip. alu!TI!ni\lm, al\lmini\lm alloy, copper, I1ho~phor, b.rc:mze~d galvanized steel rods Suspllndlld conductors: ~randed ah,lIT1inium ~rlll"1c1.e~;opp{lr c stranglld llIuminium (~lllli reinforc{ld) lrllOded galvanized ~lllli
C;qnd4ctOI"1l: P9Wl1
mm~
Fixe~ co""~iQl'\!l (Qond!l) In
20 lC2.5
509
llI.umini\J!'fl, alurnlni\lm alloy, P\lpl?llr AAd \IalVl~!ld st,~I; {lxterpaj ~~p exterl'\al rodll
?Q x
g,?
llOdi~
2,0 ~ 1.?
8.0 dia.
~O.O
e.? dis,
~~.O
7/3.0
SO.Q
(bondli); llJdernal, a14miF1ium e>\lemal, ,,"l1ealel;\ coppllr internal, aJurnil1lum internal, aon'aJe9 Cppptlr 20 x 2.5 20 x 2.5 20 x 1.5 20 x 1.5
1~/1.8
7/3.0
5p.0
50,0
50.0
~O.Q i30.Q
509
59,0
7/~,0
~\!mil1hJm, popper !!'ld Qalvanized steel strip ~Y!'fliF1i\lm,~l,Iminium ~19Y,pOPPllr I1d \J~Y~iz{ld steel r!XIs ~~h tllrrninl!tions: !!y~@nitic iron 9QP!!llr!l!1d galy~ized stlllli ~rip cQPper !lAd g~Iv!ll1iz~ stefll rOOs hard qraWn copper rqgs for girect ~riving into soft \Iround h!lJ"d~rawn or 8F1nealed copper r9d~ or sQlid wires for iF1dirllgt riving or d layint! in \lround rods for h!lJ"d\:Iroung c;opp@r-c!ad or \Ialvan~ecl. steel rQds (s~ nQte!!tQ tabl@) for harcler\:Ir94F1c1 11.0c;jia.
50.()
FQr <?0pp!!lr~la~ steel rQdll' thl! cor{l should bll 01 !p", ~ qf cwPpn stl!l!1 w~~~ llIOS!11l r@(1!l1~ llpprp1<irn~@!y eoo.ONfmm' Md qf a quality n~ l!!l!!sthl'l'\ ilrade 43.OA qf ~S 4360. ihe clal;\dinil llho\llg b~ 01~.9~ p\lr!l e!ll.rolytlc <?C?Oper !T\olecl,Jl!lJ'!y?onqed ~o th!! I lllee! core. T~e raelia! t~i\l~I1l!SSof the coPPer !l~Cluld
be n leS~.than 0.?5rnm. iQ Q!:ll,!plin\lli for \lPp'per-Q!!l~ steel r~~ lihClUld be m.ad!! frorp copPllr~silicon !l!lpy, gr~de Qfi1P1 gr Bfi
287~, or alumll1!\Jrp prcll'1zeallClYI\:Ira~e CA10? BS ?871. ili) The u!je intemal phosphor prClnze dowels !T'ay
50.q 11;3.0
givll lliower
d!arnetllr gre(lter than the rog. Iv) For ~1lIv,,"~!ld. lll~! rggll! steel 01 gr!l~e ~.OA !!p!!Cifi~ In B~ ~!$() sl'\@l,llgP@ \lllltd, t~{l thrl!!lds being c\ll before ~ot-dip gaiV!l"izing tel BS 7~. v) strandeq con.ql,!~o!,! "l! ngt nQrmaJly !lsed felt 9OW~ 99f191Ag!QI'l! I!~hll' pr vi) ~reater diml!nsion!l arl! r@~\lired for the 1oUpw!n~: stl1Jcturell exceeding ?PQrn in tl!li~~t Sp!.lC;i!!lc;:1~Il!lS. !l1l1Jglurl!l, Mec;tl,,"icll.! or corro~lve reason!!.
183
EBCS~10199~
Table 7.4 Minimum thicknesses of sheet metal used for roofing and forming Part of the air termination net work
Material
Aluminium Minimum thickness Zinc Minimum2.0 0.5 Lead Material 0.3 nd0.7 0.4 thickness [mm]
Note:
the
roofs form part of the lightning protection system. However, damage by way of puncturing may occur with a direct arc-connected strike.
Arrangement
Note: This table does not apply to built-in type fixings which may require special consideration.
7.15
(2) Horizontal air terminations shall be made of solid conductor, strips or cables.
EBCS-10 1995
184
7.15.2 Conductors
(1) Conductors shall be in the form of multiple strand cables, single wires, rods, or flat strips.
7.16
AIR TERMINATION
7.16.1 General
(1) Ajr termination networks shall be provided for all parts of a structure that are likely to be damaged by direct lightning Flashes.
Note: Air networks may consist of vertical or horizontal conductors or combination or both. Various forms of air terminations are shown in Figures 7.7 through 7.15.
7.16.2 Support
-
(1) Vertical air terminals shall be secured against overturning either by attachment to the object to be protected or by means of braces which shall be permanently and rigidly attached to the building.
185
EBCS-10 1995
7.17
DOWNCONDUCTOR
7.17.1 General
(1) A down conductor shall provide a low impedance path from air termination termination so that the lightning current can be safely conducted to earth.
Note: In addition to the various types of down conductors; i.e., strips, rods, reinforcing bars and structural steel stanchions, etc any good conductor which may form part of the building structure can be included provided that it is appropriately jointed to the air and earth terminations.
to earth
ETHIOPIAN
BUILDING
CODE STANDARD
EBCS-10
1995
186
---
----------
SECTION'?':
PROTECTION
7.17.2 Routing
Down conductors shall follow the most direct path possible between air and earth termination networks. The conductors shall be arranged as evenly as practicable around the outside walls of .the structure (see Figure 7.1 7).
Any suitable covered recess not smaller than 76.0mm x 13.0mm or any suitable service duct running the full height of the building may be used for this purpose provided it does not contain an unarmored or non-metal. sheathed service cable.
(3) In case where an unrestricted duct is used, seals at each floor level may be required for fire protection. (4) Where p()ssible, access to the interior of the duct shall be available.
187
EBCS-10 1995
7.17.10
(1) Any metal in or fonning part of the structure or any building services having metallic parts by design or fortuitously and in contact with general mass of the earth shall be either isolated from or bonded to the down conductor.
Note: Unless extra bonding is required, items already in metallic contact with the lightning protection system,
directly or indirectly, through permanent and reliable metal-to-metal joints do not require additional bonding conductors.
7.17.11
Bonds
7.17.11.1 General
(1) Since bonds have to join a variety of metallic parts of different shapes and composition, careful attention shall be given to .the metals involved; i.e, that of the bond and of the items being bonded.
EBCS-10 1995
188
7.17.11.6 Joints
(1) Joints shall: a) be as few as possible; b) be mechanically and electrically effective; . c) be protected against corrosion or erosion from the elements of the environment; and d) present an adequate contact area.
Note:
Contact surface shall fIrst be cleaned and then inhibited from oxidation with a suitable non-corrosive compound.
(2) With overlap joints, the o,rerlap shall not be less than 20.0mm for all types of conductors.
7.17.12
Test Points
(1) Earth down conductor shall be provided with a test joint in such a position that, whilst not inviting unauthorized joints),
Note:
interference, it is convenient for test (see Figure 7.25 for typical test
Plates indicating the position, number and type of earth electrodes should be fItted above each test point.
189
EBCS-10 1995
'E~eCTRICAL INSTALLATION
QF BUILDINGS
1.18
EARmTERMlNATION
1.18.1 Termination
(1) Each down conductor !thall terminate at an earth electrode.
7.18.3.1
(1) Earth rod connections shall be made by welding, bracing or clamping. (2) Clamps shall be secured with at least two bolts or screw caps and shall make Contact with the earth rod for at least 380.0mm.
190
.",
.,.,._
.._.
SECTION
B' __
'"
1: EARTHING,
'n~'_ . __ ..~u
__ .. _.
BONDING
__
ANDL1GHTEN1NG
". __ . __ ,
,_."
PROTECTION
'_."_"_'_'"
or
to
In sand or gravel, two or more 'earth rods at not less than 3.0m :spacings 'shall be driven
vertically to a minimum depth of 3.0m below grade (see Figure 7.21). 7.18.4.3
(1) if bedrock is neat the surface, the conductor shan be laid in trenclres extending away from the building at each down conductor.
(1) Trenches in (1) above ::shallat least be:
a) 3.7mlong b)
703m
(3) If these methods should prove impracticablej the lightning ptoteetloncahlemay directly on the bedrock with a m1nimumdistance footing and termin'iltehy having amlnimufil 1.18.4.4 surface area of 'O.18m2
(I) If soil is less than O.3m in depth, down conductors shall beconhected installed in a trench or in rock :ctevlces around thestrucmre.
conductot
(2) '(1) The 100p conductor shall not be less than the equivalent of :amainsize conductor.
lightning
191
EBCS-10 1:995
'ETH10PtANB'UILD1NG
OODe -STANOA'AO
{ii)
Optional earth plates may be attached to the loop conductor to enhance its earth contact, where the measured earthing resistance is found to be high to provide effective earthing (see Figure 7.22).
7.18.4.5
(1) When earth terminations in built-up areas pass through a tanked structure, a seal similar to that shown in Figure 7.23 shall be used.
7.18.4.6
Corrosion
(1) Because of the harmful corrosion which is likely to result, coke breeze shall not be allowed to be in contact with copper electrodes and salting of the ground in the vicinity of any earth electrode is not recommended.
7.19
COMMON EARTHING
EBCS-10 1995
192
(3) If the water pipe in (2) above is not continuous, the non-conductive sections shall be bridged withmain size conductors, or the connection shall be made at a point where electrical continuity is assured.
7.20 USE OF REINFORCING BARS FOR EARTHING IN CONCRETE STRUCTURES 7.20.1 General
(1) Detail on how to use concrete reinforcing bars shall be worked out at the design stage before building construction begins (see Clause B.6, Annex B).
The following precautions are, however, recommended: a) Good contact between reinforcing bars should be ensured; i.e, by fixing bars with tying WIres. b) Ties shall be provided for both vertical to vertical and horizontal to vertical bars.
193
EBCS-10 1995
7..-21
STRUCTURAL
PROTECTION
7~21.1 Gene..,.1
(:1)
Thestrocturalsteelfr{l1llework
lightning protectiOIi system if it is either electrically continuous or made so. 1.21.2 Air Termination
(I) Air termination shall be bonded directly lothe steel framework or by conductors leading
through the ridges, roof, or coping walls, or connected together with a conductor on the exterior of the building that is bonded to the steel framework. (2) If <such a conductor in (1) above is employed, it shall be bonded to the framework ~t intervals not more than 3.0m. 7.21.3 Connection
made on cleaned areas ofthe steel work by use of bonding plates with
pressure 'cable connectors ,lravingasurface 'contact ;areaof not le-ssthan 5200J~mm~; ~ol.ted, welded, or brazed securely to the steel S0as to maintainelectricalcontinulty. 7.21.4 Earth'ing (1) afthing connections :shall be made ,at approximately 'every other 'sreel column around the
:perimeter and shaU not average more than n.Oma;part. (2) The earthing conductor shall be connected to steel columns using bonding plates (s'ee 7 :21.3). (3) The bonding plate shan be bolted or welded securely to a cleaned 'area of the column .at the lowest 'available point (see Figure 7.26). 7.21.5 Interconnection
'-....
(l) Metal bodies that are required to be bonded need not be'separately
electrically continuous with the lightning protection system through the steel framework.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDINGCOD~
STANDARD
EBCS-10 1995
1'94
(al
(b)
leI
Ie)
(d)
(QI
Note:
i)
Lightning conductor fixings should be purpose-made for each size of strip; dimension a in Figure (e) should be equal to the thickness of the strip and should be equal to the width plus 1.3mm a for expansion. Conductors of circular section should he similarly treated.
ii) All fixings should be securely attached to the structure; mortar joints should not be used.
195
EBCS-10 1995
HC
He
\ GL\ 0
Ilvtl
......
/
/ {
1"11"
,.ZP
...........
-"'"
'"
ZP \ \
J
vC
o
vC
view
,...,
>
o ve o
<
ve
\
\ ZP
,
/
"-..
~.
../"....
--
./
ZP /
Icl Four vortlcol conductors showing protlctlVl .nd socltted Ion 01 protection.
.ngl
Figure 7.2 Protective angles and zones of protection for various forms of air termination
EBCS-10 1995
196
197
EBCS-10 1995
ETHIOPIAN BUILDINGCODI;
STANDARD
!~1
3 Rod coupling
== .CEP~: 'Q
13
u
2 Rod holdliitl
Air tormlnll
KIY
.~
10-1
4---i1
13~t3
Earth
a Tilt lolnt
7 Elnh Ilectrodl 6Ql 6 EII'th tod 'A' cllmp
7
-$-
Ib6.
9 Rod hOUllnl III Chimney. '"II thin 1.5 m dlomettr It top.ond 20 m hil"
10 Cond"ctor clip 11 cOronll bind 12 Bond to CI" 'ron cap II .'tornatl to coronll bind 1111. (bl 60 m bricl(ltlck 13 Junction cllmp
Note
This figure, does not apply to reinforced concrete chimneys where the reinforcing bars can be used as down conductors
EBCS-10 1995
198
Bimetellic joint Reinforced concrete Ilructure with parapet, Ilone coping and non-conducting roof
4
One reinforcing ber shown for clarity
Detail showing
item 4
Key
1 2 3 4
Handrail bond Reinforcing bond Coping bond Non-ferrous bonding point (built-in) Examples of air terminations and down conductors using handrails, metal copings and
Figure 7.5
reinforcingbars.
199
EBCS-10 1995
___
Beam
Note:
Minimum dimensions when a metallic roof covering is used as part of the air termination follows: galvanized steel copper aluminium IO.5mm O.3mm O.7mm zinc lead O.7mm
2.0mm
network are as
Figure 7.6 Air termination for flat roof sbowing connection to standing seamjoint when a metallic roof is used as part of tbe air termination network
EBCS-10 1995
200
HC
/:s:j
Ie) Elevation .howing protective .ngle HC
l~",
'"
"
I
HC HC
I . I I
I II
'Oml mall.l
He
L
ZP_
20m
___
--_/
201
EBCS-10 1995
ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
OF BUILDINGS
Note:
i)
If S> 10+ 2H, additional longitudinal conductors are required so that the distance between conduc~rs does not exceed lO:Om.
ii) If the length of the roof exceeds 20.0m, additional transverse conductors are required. iii) Down conductors are omitted for clarity.
Figure 7.8 Air terminations for large areas of roof various profiles
ETHIOPIAN
BUILDING
CODE STANDARD
EBCS-1 0
19~5
202
Test joint
DC
Test
joint .......
Test joint
DC
'"
DC
I I
I
I I I I I I
DeL
(1) Note: 16 m
20 m
16 m
16 m
(2)
(3)
The protective angle provided by the ridge conductor in each case is as follows: (i) protective angle up to 45 : ridge conductor is sufficient with connection to metallic gutters; number of down conductors=72/20=3.6 (say4). (ii) protective angle over 45~: air termination mesh (maximum IO.Om x (IO+2H)); ridge and eaves conductors provide approximate roof mesh 6.0m x lQ.Om;number of down conductors=40/20=2. (iii) situation as for (ii) but metallic gutters used in lieu of eaves conductor; number of down conductors =64/20=3.2 (say4).
down conductors
Vertical air terminatinn
D.t.1I
Key:
Conceald conducto~
Figure 7.9 Air terminations and concealed conductors for buildings less 20.0m high with stopping roofs
203
EBCS-10 1995
ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
"-
OF BUILDINGS
,,-
,
View from B
,..
,,-
'.....-
/I Il-oc
-.
-#---r
fa
12 m
I
t
[J I
II ..
DC A 112 6m
.1
[J
Dc"1
Hell
II
72/20 4.
Note:
i)
An.air tennination along the outer perimeter of the roof is required and no part should be more than 5.0m from the nearest horizontal conductor, except that an additional 1.0m may be allowed for each metre by which the part to be protected is below the nearest conductor.
ii) Horizontal conductors are not necessary on the parapets of the light well; a zone of protection of 60 is provided by the two adjacent horizontal conductors for structures less than 20.0m high. This principle does not apply to taller structures.
ETHIOPIAN
BUILDING
CODE STANDARD
EBCS-10
1995
204
::[ OM'
I ...
DC 60 m DC
El.../
Note:
i)
Horizontal
air tennination
conductors should be jointed at the interconnections. conductors are used, bare vertical rods O.3m high should positions along the horizontal conductors spaced no
ii) Where PVC covered horizontal air tennination more than 10 apart.
Figure 7.11 Air terminations and down conductors for flat roof buildings where the air termination conductors have a PVC oversheath
Note:
network for a tan reinforced concrete or steel framed structure should be as fonows:
There are bonds to steelwork at corners, at 20.0m intervals around the periphery and on the tower O.5m above the lower roof level. Key bonding to the building steelwork.
205
EBCS-10 1995
Roof conductor
Figure 7.13 Air termination network with horizontal conductors for structure with explosive or highlYJlammable contents
EBCS-10 1995
206
Sm
9 ,I,
,I! .9
I ,
t 9 Ii,
I 9 ,I,
I'
-.
Koy
on metal roofs, these conductors may be omitted. 1 Air termination 2 Down conductor 3 Bonds to holding dowp rod 4 Horizontal conductor 5 Vertical conductor 6 Ridge conductor 7 8 9 10
11 12
Eaves conductor Test point Earth electrode Main earthing terminal of Electrical Bond to bell-frame Peripheral conductor installation
Note:
i)
The air termination network should have a 1O.Oll} x 20.0m mesh. For structures below 20.0m hight, there should be down conductors every 20.0m of periphery and for structures over 20.0m high, every 10.0m of periphery; horizontal conductors should be every 20.0m from the top. (see Table 7.5 and Figure 7.17).
ii) iii)
On shingle spires, metallic soakers and gullies should be bonded at the top and bottom.
207
EBCS-10 1995
Mast
See note 2
See note 2
electrode~
Suspended
air termination
termination building
x --
It
+\
'\
:'\\
'II\
Protected building
Note:
i) ii)
Where two or more suspended horizontal conductors are employed, a protective angle of 45 may be used in the space bounded by the conductors. Elsewhere, the protective angle is limited to 30. To prevent flashover between mast/conductor has to be 2.0m or as under above under maximum sag conditions and protected building, the minimum clearance distance above governed by whichever is the greater. This clearance has to be as
Figure 7.15 Air termination with twin suspended horizontal conductors & zone of protection for structure with explosive or highly flammable contents
EBCS-10 1995
208
209
EBCS-10 1995
1.1
ldl
11/
-----.
L
i
. :LJ=
, I. Itl
T3
Note:
i) ii)
The down conductors may be natural part of the building framework or added strips or rods on external faces. On structures exceeding 20.0m in height, down conductors should be spaced at not more than apart.
1O.Om
Figure 7.17 Pattern of down conductors for various forms of tall building
EBCS-10 1995
210
ad maximum
Exceeding ad
,
"~
d"
(a Permissible
arrangement
(bl Arrangamant
permissible Not
--tII
~Permisslble I
in a building
211
EBCS-10 1995
ELECTRICAL.
INSTALLATION
OF BUILDINGS
A=
o.6~m mini~um
t
B= 3.0P m mini~Um
.
Figure 7.19 Earthtng in ~oiBt Clay ~oil.
EBCS-10 1995
212
Air termination
on roof
Down conductors lin these caSes steel rei,. forc ing or steel frame of building I
1111 _~
.....
....
, ./ 11l " ./
~;.,/
"
<~)
'I I
I
~ Earth electrode
Bonds to lift installations at top and bottom of continuous rigid metal structure only
Ground level
NOTE. Air tennination mesh should be not . eat. tun 10 m X 20 m. Down conductors should be not more tNn 10 m ~art.
system ror tall b.ildings (over 20.0m bigb) sbowing air termi.atinns.
ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
OF BUILDINGS
configuration
13.00 m minimum
ETHIOPIAN
EBCS-10
1'995
214
--<Earth
,/ ,/
'",,'''plate
.
Loop conductor
215
EBCS-10 1995
..
~
, .0
o
0'
. 0 ",
."
" 0
Concrete
0,,' o
, ' o
. 0:.
..
.
..
,~'
.
,0
. 0 ,
b ,~
"
,P
.'0
,0
" .,
Asphalt /"
Concrete
1I ': 0111
0: ,'
0, .'
Asphalt
.0
. 6' :.
<:>
?, 'n
.'"
Figure 7.23 Example of an earth electrode seal for use within a tanked structure
EBCS-10 1995
216
I ,
ExterMl down conductor..-..provfde sea ed tube
I
Lightning protection earth termination netv~ Electr~city cable Water Gas
"
, ... t -,
\ t
k I \0"
,
,,.
,
"
( ' \
... 11,.0:
1#' (-
I \ '
I \~
NOTE.
Corrosion
inhibitor
to be used
on all
217
EBCS-10 1995
EBCS-10 1995
218
ANNEX
(INFORMA11VE)
SYSTEM DESIGN
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS The structure or, if it has not been built, the drawings and specifications should be examined taking into account the recommendations of this Section.
In the case of structures having no suitable metallic members, it is important to consider t~ positioning of all the component parts of a lightning protection system so that they perform their function without detracting from the appearance of the structure. Modern buildings use metal extensively in their structure and there is considerable benefit in utilizing such metal parts to maximize the number of parallel con~ucting paths. Often the lightning protection will be improved, worthwhile cost savings may result and the aesthetic appearance of the structure preserved. cause masonry to fall. This'risk However, it should be borne in mind that a lightning strike to such a metal part, especially if it is beneath the surface, may damage the covering and can be reduced, but not eliminated, by a surface-mounted lightning protection system. Examples of metal parts which should be incorporated into lightning protection systems are steel frames, concrete reinforcing bars, metal in or on a roof, window rails and handrails. Some metal within a structure may be used as a component of the lightning protection system; for example, . sheet piling being in contact with the general mass of earth, may be used as an earth electrode and is unlikely to be improved upon by the addition of rods or tapes. The whole structure should be provided with a fully interconnected lightening protection system; i.e., no part of the structure should be protected in isolation.
219
EBCS-10 1995
ANNEX
B (CONSULTATION)
B.t
GENERAL
Consultation should take place between the designer of the lightning protection s'ystem and the interested parties indicated in Clauses B.2 through B.6 before and during all stages of design.
B.2
ARcmTECT
/ ENGINEER
As far as practicable, the following should be detennined: a) b) c) d) Routing of ,illl conductors. General areas available for earth tennination networks and reference earth electrodes. Materials(s) for conductor. Extent of the work and the division of responsibility for primary fixings to the structure, especially those affecting the water-tightness of the fabric, chiefly roofing. e) Materials(s) to be used in the structure, especially for any continuous metal, e.g. stanchions or reinforcing. f) g) Use to which the structure is to be put. Details of all metallic service pipes, rain-water system, rails and the like entering or leaving the structure or with the structure which may require bonding to the lightning protection system. h) Extent of any buried services which could affect the siting of the earth tennination network(s). i) Details of any equipment, apparatus, plant or the like to be installed within or near the building and which require bonding to the lightning protection system.
EBCS-10 1995
220
B.3
PUBLIC UTILITIES
Agreement should be reached on the bonding of services to the lightning protection system. Because of the introduction of new materials and practices, reliance should not be placed on agreements reached for other structures.
B.4
Agreement should be reached on: a) the need for a lightning protection system on structures containing flammable or explosive materials; b) routes and materials(s) for construction of ducts and sealing at floors if internal conductor are being considered; c) the method of lightning protection to be adopted in the unlikely event of a structure having a flammable roof.
B.5
Agreement should be reached on the need to bond antenna supports and screens of cables to the lightning protection system.
B.6
BUILDER
Agreement should be reached on: a) b) the form, positions and numbers of primary fixings to be provided
by
the builder;
any fixings provided by the lightning protection system contractor to be installed by the builder; the positions of conductor to be placed beneath the structure; whether any components of the lightning protection system are to be used during the construction phase, e.g. the permanent earth termination network could be used for earthing cranes, railway line, scaffolding, hoists and the like during construction;
c) d)
221
EBCS-10 1995
e)
for steel framed structures, the numbers and positions of stanchions and the form of fixing to be made for the connection of earth terminations;
f)
whether metallic roof covering, where used, are suitable as part of the lightning protection system and the method of attachment of conductor to earth; the nature and location of services entering the structure above and below ground including railway lines, crane rails, wire ropeways, conveyor systems, television and radio antennas and their metal supports, metal flues, and flue-liners;
g)
h)
the position and number of flag-masts, roof level plant rooms (i.e., lift motor rooms, ventilating, tanks and other salient features; the construction to be employed for roofs and walls in order to determine appropriate methods of fixing conductor, specifically weather-tightness of the structure; with a view to maintaining the
i)
j)
possible penetration of a waterproofing membrane where earth terminations have to be sited beneath the structure, especially in 'urban' situations and in confined spac.~s on industrial sites;
Note: The same general consideration periodic testing. applies to the reference earth electrode for use in initial and
k)
the provision of holes through the structures, parapets, cornices, etc to allow for the free passage of the down conductor;
I)
the provision of bonding connections to a sted frame, reinforcement bars and other metal; the most suitable choice of metal for the conductor taking account of corrosion, especially at bimetallic contacts; the accessibility of test joints, protection by non-metallic casings from mechanical damage or pilferage, lowering of flag-masts or other removable objects, facilities for periodic inspection, especially on chimneys;
m)
n)
0)
the preparation of a drawing incorporating the above details and showing the positions of all conductors and of the main components.
EBCS-10 1995
222
SECTION
WIRING METHODS
8.1
SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to all wiring installation operating at 0.6/1.0kV or less except for: (a) conductors which form an integral part of factory built equipment; (b) communication (d) community circuit, unless otherwise specified in Section 23; radio and television installations, unless otherwise (c) Class 2 circuits, unless otherwise specified in Section 10; antenna distribution, specified in Section 24; (e) optical fiber cables. 8.2 NORMATIVE REFERENCE
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in .this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. (a) C22.1:1992 Canadian Electrical Code Part Installation, Sixteenth Edition The electricians
(b) BS 767:1992
8.3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
8.3.1 Methods of Installation (1) The methods of installation of wiring systems shall be as shown in Annex A.
EBCS-l0 1995
223
ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
OF BUILDINGS
(2) The Provisions in (1) above notwithstanding, the use of another method is not precluded provided that compliance with this Code is maintained (3) A bare live conductor shall be installed on insulators. (4) Non-sheathed cables for fixed wiring shall be enclosed in conduits, ducting or trunking; however, this provision does not apply to a protective conductor. 8.3.2 Wiring in Ducts and Plenum Chambers
(1) No electrical equipment, unless specifically approved for the purpose, shall be installed in ducts used to transport dust, loose stock, or flammable vapours. (2) No electrical equipment, unless specifically approved for the purpose, shall be installed in any duct used for vapour removal or for ventilation of commercial-type cooking equipment. 8.3.3 Underground Installations
(1) Direct buried conductors, cables, or raceways shall be installed to meet the minimum c?ver requirements shown in Table 8.1. Table 8.1 Minimum cover requirementst for direct buried conductors, cables or raceways
750.0Vor 1000 600 750 900. Over 750.0V Over 750.0V armour Qr armour sheath Conductors or cables Raceway Non-vehicular area. Ie 450 600 Vehicular area. Minimum cover [mm]
Minimum cover means the distance between the top surface of the conductor, cable, or raceway and the finished grade.
224
EBCS-10 1995
ETHIOPIAN
(2) The minimum cover requirements shall be permitted to be reduced by IS0.0mm where mechanical protection is placed in the trench over the underground installation. (3) Mechanical protection shall consist of one of the following and, when in flat form, shall
be wide enough to extend at least SO.Omm beyond the conductor, cables, or raceways on each side: (a) Treated planking at least 38.0mm thick. (b) Poured concrete at least SO.Ommthick. (c) Concrete slabs at least SO.Omm thick. (d) Concrete encasement at least SO.Ommthick. (e) Other acceptable material. (4) Raceways or cables, if located in rock, may be installed at a shallower depth entrenched into the rock in a trench not less than IS0.0mm deep and grouted with concrete to the level of the rock surface. (5) Raceways may be installed directly beneath a concrete slab at grade level provided the concrete slab is not less than a nominal 1OO.Ommin thickness, the location is adequately marked, and the raceway will not be subject to damage during or after installations. (6) Any form of mechanical protection which may adversely affect the conductors or cable assemblies shall not be used. (7) Backfill containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large or sharply angular substances, or corrosive material shall not be placed in an excavation where such materials may damage cables, raceways, or other substructures prevent adequate compaction of fill, or contribute to corrosion of cables, raceways, or other substructures.
8.3.4
Conductors in Hoistways
(1) Where conductors other than those used to fumish energy to the lift or dumbwaiter are installed in hoistways, they shall be from mineral-insulated cable or armoured cables or be run in rigid or flexible metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. (2) The cable, conduit, or tubing referred to in (1) above shall be: (a) securely fastened to the hoistway construction;
EBCS-10 1995
225
(b) arranged so that terminal-outlets or junction boxes open outside the hoistway except that pull boxes may be installed in long runs for the purpose of supporting or pulling in conductors. (3) (a) Main feeders for supplying power to elevators and dumbwaiters shall be installed outside the hoistway. (b) Only such electric wiring, raceways, and cables used directly in connection with the elevator or dumbwaiter, including wiring for signals, for communication with the car, for lighting, heating, air conditioning and ventilating the car, shall be permitted inside the hoistway.
8.4 8.4.1
(1) Conductors installed in any location shall be suitable for the condition of use as indicated in Annex B of Section 4 for the particular location involved and with particul.ar respect ..to the follwing (a) moisture (b) corrosive action (c) temperature (d) degree of inclosure (e) mechanical protection.
8.4.2
(1) The minimum internal radii of bends in conductors shall be as indicated in Table 8.2
226
EBCS-10 1995
Table 8.2 Minimum internal radii of bends in cables for fixed wiring
Type of Insulation
a up todiameter 10.0m 25.0mm Overall 4 over 10.0mm (3) 3at(2) todiametre any Bending factor25.0mm
Mineral-insulated
cables may be bent at a minimum radius of three times the cable diameter provided that they
Note:
i)
The factor shown in the table is that by which the overall cable diameter must be multiplied to give the minimum inside' radius of the bend.
ii) The figutes in brackets apply to unsheathed single-core stranded trunking or ducting.
pye
cables when.installed
in conduit,
8.4.3
(1) Unless made with solderless wire connectors, joints or splices in insulated conductors shall be soldered, but they shall first be made mechanically secured.
'.
(2) Joints or splices shall be covered with an insulation equivalent to that on the conductors being joined. (3) Joints or splices in wires and cables shall be accessible. (4) Splices in underground runs of cable, if required due to damage to the original installation, may be made: (a) in junction boxeswhich are located at least l.Om above grade and secured to buildings or to stub poles and suitably protected from mechanical damage; (b) notwithstanding the requirements in (3) above, by means of splicing devices or materials (kits) acceptable for direct earth burial.
EBCS-10 1995
227
8.4.4
Supporting of Conductors
(1) Conductors shall be supported so that no injurious strain is imposed on the terminals of any electrical apparatus or devices or on joints or taps. Table 8.3 shows guidance on methods of support.
Note:
For the spacing of supports for cables of overall diameter exceeding 40.0mm. and for single-core cables having conductors of cross-sectional should be observed. area 300.0mm2 and larger, the manufacturer's recommendations '.
8.5 8.5.1
.(L) Sheathed cables clipped direct to or lying on non-metallic surface shall be installed in accordance with Installation Method 1 (see Annex A).
8.5.2
Spacing of Conductors
conductors and adjacent surfaces shall be as indicated in Installation
Methods 12 and 13 (see Annex A). (2) In all locations, a separation of at least 25.0mm shall be maintained between conductors and adjacent metal piping or conducting materials.
228
EBCS-10 1995
8.6
EXPOSED WIRING ON EXTERIOR OF BUILDINGS AND BETWEEN BUILDINGS ON THE SAME PREMISES Location of Conductors
are supported on or in close proximity to the exterior surfaces of
8.6.1
buildings, they shall be installed and protected so that they shall not be hazardous to persons or be exposed to mechani<;:al injury and they shall not, without special permission, be located at a height less than 4.5m from the ground.
"
,,
.~. ~
EBCS-10 1995
229
8.7
(1) Bare conductors shall not be used as main risers or feeders in buildings unless, special permission is obtained. (2) Special permission shall not be granted unless: (a) the building is of noncombustible construction; (b) the conductors are placed in a chase, channel, or shaft located or guarded so that the conductors are inaccessible; (c) the premises do not constitute a hazardous location; (d) suitable cut-offs to protect against the vertical spread of fire are provided where floors are pierced; (e) the mechanical and electrical features of the installation and the conductor supports are appropriate to the operating and maintenance conditions likely to occur, the following requirements being used in the case of bus bars rated l200.0A or less:
Note: i) Where flat bus bars 6.25mm or less in thickness are used, the continuous current rating shall not exceed 1.6A/mm2 of cross-sectional bus bars. ii) Bus bar supports shall be spaced not more than 750.0mm apart, with minimum clearance across insulating surface between bars of opposites polarity of not less than 50.0mm, and 25.0mm between bus bars and any earthed surface. area of copper bus bar or 1.12A/mm2 in the case of aluminium
8.8
INSTALLATION FITTINGS
OF
BOXES,
CABINETS,
OUTLETS
AND
TERMINAL
8.8.1
(1) There shall be no more than 12 outlets on any 2-wire branch circuit except as permitted by other Sections of this Code. (2) Such outlets in (1) above shall be considered to be rated at not less than 1.0A per outlet except as permitted by (3) below. (3) Where the connected load is known, the number of outlets may exceed 12 provided the load current does not exceed 80% of the rating of the overcurrent device protecting the circuit.
230
EBCS-10 1995
EBCS-10 1995
231
8.9
(1) Every cable operating at low voltage shaH be selected in accordance with Section 4 of this Code. (2) The method of installation of cables and conductors shall be subject to the provision of Clause 8.3.1.
1232
E13cs-10 1995
ANNEX SCHEDULE
A (NORMATIVE)
Note:
i) The methods of installation distinguished by bold type are reference methods for which the currentcarrying capacity given in Annex B, Tables B.I through B.45, Section 4, have been determined. ii) For the other methods, an indication is given of the appropriate current-carrying capacity which can safely be applied. reference method having values of
Appropriate capacity
current-carrying
Sheathed cables clipped direct to or lying : ~ on a non-metallic surface'. Cables embedded direct in building materials: Sheathed cables embedded directly in masonry, brickwork, concrete; plaster or the like (otHer than thermally insulating materials)
11~
J~
Method 1
Method 1
In conduit: Single-core non-sheathed cables in metallic or non-metallic conduit on a wall or ceiling Single-core non-sheathed cables in metallic or non-metallic conduit in a 4 thermally insulating wall or above a thermally insulating ceiling, the conduit b~ing in contact with a thermally conductive surface on one sidet Multicore cables having non-metallic sheath, in metallic or non-metallic conduit on a wall or ceiling. Method 4
Method 3
Method 3
tThe wall is assumed to consist of an outer weatherproof skin, thermal insulation and an inner skin of a plaster board or a wood-like material having a thermal conductance not less than IOw/m2K. The conduit is fixed so as to be close to, but not necessarily touching, the inner skin. Heat from the cables is assumed to escape through the inner skin only.
EBCS-10 1995
233
Installation method Number Description 2 Sheathed cables in conduit in a thermally insulating wall etc. (otherwise as Reference Method 4) Cables in conduit embedded in masonry, brickwork, concrete, plaster or the like (other than thermally insulating materials)
Examples
lc:Q
Method 4
Method 3
In trunking:
8 9 10
On trays: 11
Cables in trunking on a wall or suspended in the air Cables in flush floor trunking Single-core cable in skirting trunking
p
..
--'-, ,
Method 3 Method 3
Method 3
Sheathed cables on a perforated cable tray, bunched and unenclosed. A perforated cable tray is considered as a tray in which the holes occupy at least 30% of the surface area
Method 11
In free air, on cleats, brackets or a ladder Shathed single-core cables in free air (any supporting metalwork ';'Ider the cables occupying less than 10% of the plan area): Two or thr'le cables vertically one above the other, minimum distance between cable surfaces equal tc, the overall cable diameter (D.); distance from the wall not less than 0.50. Two or three cables horizontally, with spacings as above three cables in trefoil, distance between wall and surface of nearest cable 0.50. or nearest cables 0.750.
12
Method 12
234
EBCS-10 1995
13
Sheathed multicore cables on ladder or brackets, separation greater than 20. Sheathed multicore cables in free air distance between wall and cable surface not less than 0.3D.Any supporting metalwork under the cables occupying less than 10%the plan area Cables suspended from incorporating a catenary wire or
(~[
Method 13
14
----------Method 4
( \
15
Sheathed cables installed directly in a thermally insulating wall or above a thermally insulating ceiling, the cable being In contact with a thermally conductive surface on one side (otherwise as Ref Method No 4) Sheathed cables In ducts or voids formed by the building structure, other than thermally insulating materials
~
Method 4 Where the cable has a diameter D. or a perimeter not greater than 200. Method 3 Where the duct has either a diameter greater than 50. or a perimeter greater than 200.
16
Notes: --i-) Where the perimeter is greater than 600., installation Methods 18 to 20, as appropriate, should be used. Ii) D. is the overall cable diameter; for groups of cables D. is the sum of the cable diameters.
EBCS-10 1995
235
Description
2
Cable In trenches: Cables supported on the wall of an open or ventilated trench, with spacin~as indicated for Reference Method 12 or 13 as appropriate Cables in enclosed trench 450.0mm wide by 300.0mm deep (minimum dimensions) including 100.0mmcover 18 Two single-core cables with surfaces separated by a minimum of one cable diameter. Three single-core cables in trefoil and touching throughout. Multicore cables or groups of single-core cables with surfaces minimum of 50.0mm Single-core cables arranged in flat groups of two or three on the vertical trench wall with surfaces separated by one diameter with a minimum distance' of 50.0mm between groups. Multicore cables installed with surfaces separated by a minimum! of 75.0mm. All cables spaced at least 25.0mmfrom the trench wall Cables in enclosed trench 600.0mm wide by 760.0mm deep (minimum dimensions) including 100.0mmcover Single-core cables arranged in groups of two or three in flat formation with the surfaces separated by one diameter or intrefoil formation with cables touching. Groups separated by a minimum! of 75.0mm either horizontally or vertically. All cables spaced at least 25.0mmfrom the trench wall.
17
a------t 0-9/),/9/~
Cables in enclosed trench 450.0mm wide by 600.0mm deep (minimum dimensions) including 100.0mmcover 19
20
V
o~
;;]0 0
~o 0
o~
~o 0 ov.: ~o ////////, 0 o~ /
! Larger
236
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION
9.1
SCOPE
(1) This Section covers the protection and control of electrical circuits and apparatus installed in accordance with the requirements of this Code.
9.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(I) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute
provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. (a) C22.1:1992 Canadian Electrical Code Part I, Safety Standard for Electrical Installation, Sixteenth Edition. Requirements for Electrical Regulations, Sixteenth Edition. Installation,IEE . Wiring
(b) BS 7671:1992
9.3 9.3.1
(1) Every
devices as may be necessary for automatic and/or manual interruption of the supply in the event of any fault and shall be provided with: (a) protection against fault current to break any fault current in a circuit before such current causes danger due to thermal or mechanical effects produced in those conductors or the associated connection; (b) protection against overload current to break any such current flowing in the circuit conductors before such a current causes a temperature rise detrimental to insulation, joints, termination or the surroundings of the conductors;
EBCS-10 1995
237
(c) protection against under-voltage which when necessary will open the circuit, where a reduction in voltage, or loss and subsequent restoration of voltage could cause danger; (d) manually-operable control device which will safely disconnect all unearthed conductors of the circuit at the point of supply simultaneously; and (e) protection against earth fault in accordance with Clause 9.4.2. 9.3.2 Types and Ratings of Protective and Control Devices
(1) Circuit breakers, fuses, and switches shall be of type and ratings acceptable to the department in charge of inspection. (2) Overcurrent interrupted. 9.4 9.4.1 PROTECTIVE Overcurrent DEVICES Devices protective devices shall ensure safe operation and shall have interrupting
capacity sufficient for the voltage employed and for the anticipated fault current which mllst be
(1) Each unearthed conductor shall be protected by an overcurrent device at the point w.?ere it receives its supply of current and at each point where the size of conductor is decreased, except that such protection may be omitted where: (a) the overcurrent device in a larger conductor properly protects the smaller conductor; (b) the smaller conductor is not over 3.0m long and does not extend beyond the switchboard, panel board, control device which it supplies; or (c) the smaller conductor has an ampacity not less than one-third that of the larger conductor from which it is supplied. (2) The rating or setting of overcurrent devices shall not exceed the allowable ampacity of the conductors which they protect except: (a) where a fuse or circuit breaker having a rating or setting of the same value as the ampacity of the conductor is not available, the ratings or settings given in Table 9.1 may be used; (b) in case of equipment wire, flexible cord, and tinsel cord, which will be considered as being protected by 16.0A overcurrent devices; or (c) as provided for by other Clauses of this Code.
238
EBCS-10 1995
(3) Overcurrent devices shall be enclosed in cutout boxes or cabinets unless they form a part of an approved assembly which affords equivalent protection, or unless mounted on switchboards, paneboards, or controllers located in room or enclosures free from easily ignitible material and dampness, and accessible only to authorized persons. (4) Overcurrent devices shall not be connected in parallel in circuits of 1000.OV or less unless otherwise they are factory-assembled in parallel as a single unit.
1)/
v(b) earth-fault trippi.ng system.comprising a senso~ or sensors, relay and auxiliary tripping
EBCS-10 1995
239
J..
9.5
FUSES
(1) Only fuses and fuse holders of proper rating shall be used, and no bridging or short circuiting of either component shall be permitted. (2) Where plug fuses are used in branch circuits, they shall be of such a type and so installed that they are non-interchangeable with a fuse of larger rating.
(3) A fuse having a fuse link which is likely to be removed or replaced while the supply is connected shall be of a type such that it can be removed or replaced without danger.
9.6
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(1) Circuit breakers shall be of the trip-free type. (2) Indication shall be provided at the circuit breaker and at the point of operation to show whether the circuit breaker is open or closed. (3) Circuit breakers shall open the circuit in all unearthed conductors by the manual operation of a single handle and by the action of overcurrent. (4) Circuit breakers shall be of such design that any alteration by the user of either the tripping current or the time will be difficult. (5) 'circuit breakers shall be equipped with tripping elements as specified in Table 9.2.
9.7
CONTROL DEVICES
(1) Control devices shall have'ratings suitable for the connected load of the circuits which they control and, with the exception of isolating switches, shall be capable of safely establishing and interrupting such loads. (2) Control devices used in combination with overcurrent devices or overload devices for the control of circuits or apparatus shall be connected so that the overcurrent or overload devices will be dead when the control device is in the open position, except where this is impracticable. (3) Control devices, with the exception of isolating switches, shall be readily accessible.
240
EBCS-10 1995
(4) Control devices, unless located or guarded so as to render them inaccessible to unauthorized persons and to prevent fire hazards, shall have all current-carrying parts in enclosures of metal or other fire-resisting material. (5) Where electrical equipment is supplied by two or more different transformers or other sources of voltage, then: (a) a single disconnecting mean~, which will effectively isolate all unearthed conductor supplying the equipment, shall be provided integral with or adjacent to the equipment; or (b) each supply circuit shall be provided with a disconnecting means integral with or adjacent to the equipment, and the disconnecting means shall be grouped together.
9.8
SWITCHES
(1) Single-throw knife switches shall be mounted with their bases in a vertical plane so that gravitational force will not tend to close them. (2) (a) Double-throw knife switches may be mounted so that the throw will be either vertical or horizontal. (b) If the throw in (1) above is vertical, a positive locking device or stop shall be provided to ensure that the blades remain in the open position when so set unless it is not intended that the switch be left in the open position. (3) Manual single-throw switches, circuit breakers, or magnetic switches, shall be connected so that the bases or moving contacts will be dead when the device is in the open position except when other conditions make this requirement unnecessary. '
9.9
.
(1) Socket outlets shall not be connected to a branch circuit having overcurrent protection rated or set at more than the ampere rating of the socket outlets except as permitted by other Sections of this Code. (2) Portable appliances appliances are: need not be equipped with additional control devices where the
EBCS~10 1995
241
(a) mted at not more than 1500.0W; and (b) provided with cord connectors, attachment plugs or other means by which they can be disconnected readily from the circuits.
(3) Where switches are used to control an outlet or outlets from more than one point, the
switches shall be wired and connected so that the earthed conductor runs directly to the outlet or outlets controlled by the switches. (4) Except for panel boards where more than 90% of the overcurrent devices supply feeders or motor branch circuits, every panel board shall be protected on the supply side by overcurrent devices having a rating not greater than that of the panel board. (5) Transfer equipment for standby power systems shall prevent the inadvertent interconnection of normal and standby sources of supply in any operation of the transfer equipment.
242
EBCS-10 1995
Ampacity of
80 63 40 100 125 350 450 400 400 600 16 0breaker or setting permitted 20 50 32 25 Rating 100 200 110 175 150 225 300 250 600 500 200 16 50 32 40 2 63 100 175 150 250 500 Circuit Fuse
[A]
EBCS-10 1995
243
Table 9.2 Overcurrent trip coils for circuit breakers a~d overload devices for protecting motors
neutral 2-phase Kind or conductor cqpnected in earthed with earthedtt earthed unearthed in any conductor exceptForneutral orprotection ort2-phasewithanywithor neutral or Number and location of overload a circuit 2-wire a.c.1-phase a.c.unearthed withrelays, motor overload protection one in each phase, not to be one in each phase 3-wire, 21-phase suchorof motor earthedFor d.c., conductor 5-wire, 3 conductor as trip neutral conductor 4-wire, devices a.c. unearthed 3-phase d.c., System3-phase a.c., d.c. coils one 4--wire,2-phase a.c., a.c.d.c. or 1 2-trip coils, one in each outside 4-trip coils, one in each unearthed
arthed
This will not preclude the use of other arangements which will provide equivalent protection.
tt This will not prevent the use of one single-pole circuit breaker in each conductor for the protection. of an unearthed 2-wire circuit.
SECTION
10
10.1
SCOPE
(1) This Section covers remote-control, signalling and power-limited circuits that are not integral parts of a device or an appliance. (2) This Section does not apply to communication circuits that are dealt with in Section 23.
Note: The circuits described in this Section are characterized by usage and power limitation which differentiate them from electric light and power circuits and, therefore, alternative requirements to'those of other relevant Sections of this Code with regard to minimum wire sizes, de-rating factors, overcurient protection, insulation requirements, wiring method, and material are deemed necessary.
10.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. (a) NFP A70/NEC: 1986 National Fire Protection Association! American National Electrical Code, 1987 Edition. (b) C22.I:1992 Canadian Electrical Code Part I,Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Sixteenth Edition.
10.3
CLASSIFICATION
10.3.1 General
{i) CirCUItscovered by this Section are those portion of the wiring system between the load side
of the overcurrent device or the power-limited supply and all connected equipment, and shall be Class 1 or Class 2 as defmed below: (a) Class 1 - Circuits which are supplied from sources having limitation in accordance with Clause 10.4.1.
EBCS-10 1995
245
(b) Class 2 - Circuits which are supplied from sources having limitation in accordance with Clause '10.5.1.
246
EBCS-10 1995
----
1 CIRCUITS
(1) The equipment and conductor of Class I circuits shall be installed in acc?rdance with the requirements of other appropriate Sections of this Code, except as provided in\Clauses 10.4.5 through 10.4.10.
EBCS-10 1995
247
including transformers shall not exceed'a maximum power output of 2500.0V A; and the product of the maximum current and maximum voltage shall not exceed lOOOO.OV with the overcurrent A protection by-passed.
(2) Power supply conductors and Class 1 circuit conc'uctors shall not be permitted in the same enclosure, cable, or raceway except when connected to the same equipment; and all conductors are insulated for the maximum voltage of any conductor in the enclosure, cable, or raceway.
248
EBCS-10 1995
(I) Class 1 circuits which extend aerially beyond a building shall comply with the requirement of Section 8.6.
10.5
CLASS 2 CIRCUITS
iii) a device having characteristics which will limit the current under normal operating
Circuits in which the open-circuit voltage exceeds protection rating not except that the, voltage,
20.0V, but does not exceed 30.0V, shall have an overcurrent amperes, where V is the open-circuit
overcurrent protection shall not be required where the current is supplied from: i) primary batteries which under short circuit will not supply a current exceeding 5.0A after 1.0min;
ii) a C;:lass2 circuit transformer; iii) a device having characteristics which will limit the current under normal operating conditions or under fault conditions to a value not exceeding lOON amperes, where V is the open-circuit voltage; or iv) a device having a Class 2 output.
EBCS-10 1995
249
exceeding lOON amperes, where V is the open-circuit voltage, and, in addition, shall be equipped with current-limiting means other than overcurrent protection, which will limit the current, either under normal operating conditions or under fault conditions, to a value not exceeding lOON amperes, where V is the open-circuit voltage. (2) Transformer devices supplying Class 2 circuits shall be restricted in their rated output to not exceeding I OO.OV A. (3) A device having energy-limiting rating or other similar device. (4) A Class 2 power supply shall not be connected in series or parallel with another Class 2 power source. characteristics may consist of a series resistors of suitable
10.5.2 Methods ofInstallation on Supply Side of Overcurrent Protection or Transformers or Other Devices for Class 2 Circuits
(1) In Class 2 circuits, the coriductors and equipment protectidh, transformers, requirements or current-limiting of other appropriate Sections of this Code. on the supply side of overcurrent
10.5.3 Marking
(1) A Class 2 power supply unit shall have permanent markings which shall be readily visible after installation to indicate the class of supply and its electrical rating.
250
EBCS-10 1995
a) metal raceways for the Class 2 circuits or for the dectric lighting, power and Class 1 circuits subject to the metal raceway being bonded to earth; b) metal sheathed or armoured cable for the electric lighting, power and Class 1 circuit conductors subject to the sheath or armour being bonded to earth; c) nonmetallic sheathed cable for the electric lighting, power and Class I circuits operating at 380.0Y or less; or d) nonmetallic conduit, electrical nonmetallic tubing, insulated tubing or equivalent, in addition to the insulation on the Class 2 circuit conductors or the electric lighting, power and Class 1 circuit conductors. (2) Where the electric lighting or power conductors are bare, all Class 2 circuit conductors in the same room or space shall be enclosed in a metal raceway that is bonded to earth and
110
opening, such as an outlet box, may be located within 2.0m of the bare conductors if up to and including 15.0kY or within 3.0m of bare conductors above 15.0kY. (3) Unless the conductors of the Class 2 circuits are separated from the conductors of electric . lighting, power and_Class 1 circuits by an acceptable barrier, the conductors in Class 2 circuits
EBCS-10 1995
251
shall not be placed in any raceway, compartment, outlet box, junction box or similar fitting with the conductor of electric lighting, power or Class I circuits.
10.5.8 Conductors of Different Class 2 Circuits in the Same Cable, Enclosure, or Raceway
0) Conductors of two or more Class 2 circuits shall be permitted within the same cable, enclosure or raceway provided all conductors in the cable, enclosure, or raceway are insulated for the maximum voltage of any conductor.
(1) Class 2 conductors mld cable installed in a vertical shaft or hoistway shall comply with the requirements of Section 18.
10.5.11
(1) Class 2 conductors and equipment shall not be placed in ducts or plenum chambers except as permitted by Clause 8.3.2.
10.5.12
Equipment Located on the Load Sic;le Overcurrent Protection, Transformers, or of Current-Limiting Devices for Class 2 Circuits
located on the load side of overcurrent protection, transformers, or current-
(1) Equipment
limiting devices for Class 2 circuits shall comply with the following: a) For Class 2 circuits operating at 30.0V or less, alternating current or direct current, it shall be acceptable for the particular application. b) For Class 2 circuits operating at more than 30.0V, alternating current or direct current, it shall be arranged so that no live parts are accessible to unauthorized persons. (2) Notwithstanding the provisions of (Ia) above, lighting fixtures and thermostats incorporating heat anticipators, located on the load side of overcurrent protection, Class 2 transformers, or current-limiting devices shall be approved when connected to Class 2 circuits operating at 30.0V or less.
252
EBCS-10 1995
10.5.13
(1) Where Class 2 circuits extend beyond a building and are run in such a manner as to be subjected to accidental contact with lighting or power conductors operating at a voltage exceeding 380.0V between conductors of the Class 2 circuits, they shall also meet the requirements of Section 23.
10.5.14
Underground Installations
installations of Class 2 circuits shall be installed in accordance with
(2) Direct buried Class 2 circuits shall maintain a minimum horizontal separation of 300.0mrrl from other underground systems except when installed in accordance with (3) below. (3) Direct buried Class 2 circuits may be placed at random separation in a common trench with power circuits which are for the sole purpose of supplying power to the Class 2 circuits provided that the Class 2 circuit is in a metal sheathed' cable, with sheath bonded to earth, the power circuit operates at 750.0V or less, and all conductors are insulated for the maximum voltage of any conductor in the trench.
EBCS-10 1995
253
SECTION
INSTALLATION
rECTRICAL 'UIPMENT
11.1
SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to the installation of the following electric equipment: a) Heating and cooking. b) Submersible pump. c) Motors and associated circuits. d) Air conditioning. e) Refrigerating. f) Storage batteries.
11.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. (a) NFP A 70/NEC: 1986 National Fire Protection Association! American National
Electrical Code, 1987 Edition. (b) C22.1: 1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Sixteenth Edition.
11.3
GENERAL
../
whose ampacity is based on Annex B of Section 4, unless equipment using other types of fuses is marked as being suitable for such use.
254
EBCS-10 1995
11.4
EBCS-10 1995
255
11.5
HEATING EQUIPMENT
(1) All electric power for heating and associated equipment operating in connection therewith shall be obtained from a single-branch circuit which shall be used for no other purpose. (2) A suitable disconnecting means shall be provided for the feeder or branch circuit.
11.6
SUBMERSmLE PUMPS
(1) Power supply conductors or cables run from well-head to the pump (deep well submersible pump) shall be: a) rubber (thermoset) insulated cable, thermoplastic-insulated twisted assemblies of this types; or b) extra-hard usage type, or the equivalent portable cable. cable, single conductors or
256
EBCS-10 1995
(2) The area around the submersible pump installed in lakes, rivers and streams shall be protected from access by the public by fencing, cribbing or isolation and so marked.
11.7 11.7.1
11.7.1.2
Portable Motors
(1) Connections to portable motots shall be permitted with flexible cord which shall have a serviceability not less than that of extra-hard usage cord unless the motor forms part of a motor-operated device.
11.7.1.4
ampacity not less than 125% of the full-load current rating of the motor.
EBCS-10 1995
251
ampacity not less than the current value obtained by multiplying the full-load current rating of the motor by the applicable percentage given in Table 11.2 for the duty involved. (3) Notwithstanding the Provisions of (1) above, conductor ampacities shall be permitted to be
selected from Table 11.5 using the full-load current rating for a continuous duty motor. (4) Tap conductors supplying individual motors from a single set of branch circuit overcurrent device supplying two or more motors shall have an ampacity of at least equal to that of the branch circuit conductors except that where the tap conductors do not exceed 7.5m in length, they shall be permitted to be sized in accordance with (1) or (2) above provided the ampacity so determined is not less than % of the ampacity of the branch circuit conductors.
11.7.1.5
(1) Conductors supplying a group of two or more motors shall have an ampacity equal to or exceeding: (a) 125% of the full-load current rating of the motor having the largest full load clllTCnt rating plus the full load current ratings of all the other motors in the group where all motors' in the group are continuous-duty motors; (b) (c) the total of the calculated currents determined in accordance with (a) above for each motor where all motors in the group are non-continuous-duty continuous and non-continuous-duty i) (ii) (iii) types: motors; or the total of the following where the group consists of two or more motors of both
125% of the current of the continuous-duty motor having the largest full load current rating; the full-load current ratings of all other continuous duty motors; and the calculated current determined in accordance with (2) below for the noncontinuous duty motors.
(2) Where the circuitry is so interlocked as to prevent all motors of the group from running at the same time, the siLe of the conductors feeding the group shall be permitted to be determined for the motor, or group of motors operating at the same time, having the largest rating selected as determined in (1) above.
258
EBCS-10 1995
(3) Demand factors shall be permitted to be applied if the character of the motor loading justifies reduction of the' ampacity of the conductor to less than the ampacity specified in (1) above provided that: (a) (b) the conductors have sufficient ampacity for the maximum demand load; and the rating or setting of the overcurrent devices protecting them is in accordance with 11.7.2.3(4) below.
(2) Ampacities of conductors connecting secondary resistors'to t_heircontrollers shall not be less than that determine<i by applying the appropriate percentage in Table 11.3 to the maximum current which the devices are required to carry.
EBCS-10 1995
259
11.7.2
11.7.2.1
Overcurrent Protection
Branch circuit overcurrent protection
(1) Each unearthed conductor of a motor branch circuit shall be protected by an overcurrent device complying with the following: (a) A branch circuit supplying a single motor shall be protected, except as permitted by (c) below, by using an overcurrent device of rating not to exceed the values in Table 11.4 using the rated full load current of the motor; (b) notwithstanding (a) above, Table 11.5 shall be permitted to be used to select the size of overcurrent devices required for a motor where the full load current rating of the motor is shown in the Table; (c) instantaneous trip (magnetic only) circuit interrupters shall be permitted where applied in accordance with 11.7.2.5; (d) where the overcurrent devices as determined in (a) above will not permit the motor to start, the rating or setting of the overcurrent device shall be permitted to be increased as follows: (i) A non-timedelay fuse:
not in excess of 400% of the motor full load current for fuses rated up to
600.0A; or - not in excess of 300% of the motor full load current for fuses rated 601 to 6000 A; or (ii) A timedelay fuse to a maximum of 225% of the motor full load current; and (e) for a branch circuit supplying two or more motors, the rating or setting of the overcurrent device shall not exceed the maximum value permitted by 11.7.2.4.
11.7.2.2
260
EBCS-10 1995
(2) (i)
Where a feeder supplies a group of motors, two or more of which are required to start simultaneously, and the feeder overcurrent devices as set in accordance with (1) above are not sufficient to allow the motors to start, the rating or setting of the feeder overcurrent devices shall be permitted to be increased as necessary to a maximum.
(ii) Notwithstanding
the Provisions of (i) above, the permitted increase shall not exceed
the rating permitted for a single motor having a full load current rating not less than the sum of the full load current ratings of the greatest number of motors which start simultaneously, provided this value does not exceed 300% of the' ampacity of the feeder conductors.
(3) Where a feeder supplies one or more motor branch circuits together with other loads, the required overcurrent protection shall be determined by calculating the overcurrent protection required for the motor .circuits and adding thereto the requirements of the other loads supplied by the feeder. (4) Where a demand factor has been applied as permitted in 11.7.1.5(3b), the rating or setting of the overcurrent devices(s) pfotecting a feeder shall not exceed the ampacity of the feeder, except as permitted by applicable Clauses of Section 8.
EBCS-10 1995
261
(i)
(ii)
values not in excess of those marked on the control equipment for the lowest rated motor of the group, as suitable for the protection of that control equipment; or in the absence of such markings, values not in excess of 400% of the full-load current of the lowest rated motor.
(c) The motors are used on a machine tool or woodworking machine; and (i) the control equipment is arranged so that all contacts which open the motor's primary circuits are in enclosures, either forming part of the machine base or for separate mounting, having a wall thickness not less than 1.69mm for steel, 2.40mm for malleable cast iron, or 6.30mm for other cast metal, having hinged doors with substantial catches, and having no openings to the floor or the foundation on which the machine rests; and (ii) the ratings or settings of the overcurrent devices do not exceed 200.0A at 230.0V or less, or 100.0A at voltages from p1.0V to 750.0V. by a single controller.
11.7.2.5
(1) Instantaneous trip circuit interrupters, when used for branch circuit protection, shall be: (a) part of a combination motor starter or controller that also provides overload protection; and (b) rated or adjusted, for an a.c. motor, to trip at not more than 1300% of the motor fullload current or at not more than 215% of the motor locked rotor current, where given, except that ratings or settings for trip current need not be less than 16.0A; or (c) rated or adjusted, for a d.c. motor rated at 50.0hp or less, to trip at not more than 250% of the motor full load current, or for a d.c. motor rated at more than 50.0hp, to trip at not more than 200% of the motor full-load current.
11.7.3
11.7.3.1
(1) The branch circuit conductors and control equipment of each motor shall have overload protection, except as permitted by 11.7.3.5
262
EBCS-10 1995
(a) connected directly in the motor circujt conductors as required by (1) above; or (b) fed by two or three current transformers so connected that all 3-phases will be protect~d.
EBCS-10 1995
263
(2) Notwithstanding
the type of the overcurrent device required for motors having a service factor of 1.15 or greater where the full-load current rating of the motor is listed in the Table. (3) Where a motor overload device is so connected that it does not carry the total current designated on the motor nameplate, such as for wye-delta starting, the percentage of motor nameplate current applying to the selection or setting of the overload device shall be clearly marked on the motor starter or shown in the motor starter manufacturers overload selection table.
11.7.3.5
(1) Overload protection shall not be required for motors complying with any of the following: (a) A manually started motor rated at 1.0hp or less that is continuously attended while in operation, which is on a branch circuit having overcurrent protection rated or set at not more than 16.0A or on an individual branch circuit having overcurrent protection as required by Table 11.5 if it may be readily determined from the starting location that the motor is running. (b) A motor constructed so that it cannot be overloaded. (c) A motor whose operating requirements are such that it is impracticable to obtain proper overload protection. (d) An automatically startable motor having a rating of 1.0hp or less forming part of an assembly equipped with other safety controls that protect the motor from damage due to stalled-rotor current and on which a nameplate, so located as to be visible after installation, indicates that such protection features are provided.
11.7.3.6
(1) Overload protection shall be permitted to be shunted or cutout ofa circuit during the starting period, provided that the device by which the protection is shunted or cutout cannot be left in the starting position and that the overcurrent device is in the motor circuit during the starting period.
264
EBCS-10 1995
11.7.3.8
(I) Each motor shall be provided with means of overheating protection except as permitted by 11.7.3.10. 11.7.3.9 Types of overheating protection
(I) Overheating protection, where required by 11.7.3.8, shall be provided by devices integral with the motor and responsive to both motor current and temperature or to motor temperature only, and shall be arranged to cut off power to the motor or, by spacial permission, to activate a warning signal when the temperature exceeds the safe limit for the motor. (2) Motors with inherent overheating protection acceptable under (l) above shall be marked to indicate that they are thermally protected or impedance protected. 11.7.3.10 Overheating protection not required (1) Overheating protection shall not be required: (a) where the motor circuit requires no overload protection under 11.7.3.5; or - (b) where overload protective devices required by 11.7.3.2 adequately protect the motor against overheating due to excess current and the motor is in a location where:
(i) ambient temperatures are not more than 100e higher than those at the location of
the overload devices; and Oi) dust or other conditions will not interfere with the normal dissipation of heat from the motor. 11.7.4
11.7.4.1
(1) Motors shall be disconnected from the source of supply in case of low voltage by one of the following means unless it is evident that no hazard will be incurred through lack of such disconnection:
EBCS-10 1995
265
(a) A motor control device shall provide low-voltage protection when automatic restarting is liable to create a hazard. (b) The motor control device shall provide low-voltage release when it is necessary or desirable that a motor stops on failure or reduction of voltage and automatically restart on return of voltage.
11.7.4.2
(1) The protection specified in 11.7.4.1 shall be permitted to be applied to a feeder or branch circuit supplying a group of motors, in which case the individual motors need not. be so protected, provided the means for manually resetting a low-voltage protective device shall be within sight of all machines supplied by a feeder or branch circuit and so located that the operator can visually assure himself that safe re-energization of the feeder or branch circuit is possible. 11.7.5 Control
11.7.5.1
Control required
(1) Except as permitted by (3) below, each motor shall be provided with a motor starter or controller for starting and stopping it and having a rating, in horsepower, not less than the rating of the motor it serv~s. (2) A motor controller need not open the circuit in all unearthed conductors to a motor unless it also serves as a disconnecting means. (3) The motor starter or controller specified in (1) above shall not be required for motors applied as follows: (a) A singlephase portable motor rated at Y3hp or less, connected by means of a socket outlet and attachment plug rated not in excess of 16.0A, 230.0V. (b) A motor controlled by a manually operated general-use switch having an ampere rating not less than 125% of the full load current rating of the motor. (c) A two-wire potable a.c. or d.c. motor having a rating not in excess of Y3hp, 230.0V controlled by a horsepower rated singlepole motor switch.
266
EBCS-10 1995
11.7.5.2
Control location
manually,
by the controller
so as to prevent
with live or moving parts; or with (a) above is not practicable because of the type, size or location at each point where may be
exists whereby
in an emergency.
11.7.5.3
(2) Magnetic
11.7.5.4
controller
is obtained
conductively
from an
circuit
shall be so arranged
that an accidental
to any remote
11.7.6 Disconnecting
(1) Except as permitted for:
Means
by (2) and (3) below, separate disconnecting means shall be provided
(a) each motor branch (b) each motor (c) each motor.
circuit, and
starter or controller,
EBCS-10 1995
267
(2) A single disconnecting means shall be pennitted to serve more than one of the functions described in (1) above. (3) A single disconnecting means shall be pennitted to serve two or more motors and their associated starting and control equipment grouped on a single branch circuit. (4) Disconnecting means or the means for operating them shall readily be accessible.
11.8
11.8.1 General
(1) The provisions of Section 11.7 for overload, overheating and control of motors shall apply to electric motor driving air conditioning and refrigerating equipment.
(b) Its rating is not more than 40.0A and 230.0V single phase. (c) Total rated-load current is shown on the room air-conditioner individual motor currents.
(d) The rating of the branch-circuit, short-circuit and earth-fault protective device does not exceed the ampacity of the branch-circuit conductors or the rating of the socket outlet, t. whichever is smaller. (2) The total marked rating of a cord-and-attachment plug-connected room air conditioner shall not exceed 80% of the rating of a branch circuit where no other loads are supplied. (3) The total marked rating of a cord-and-attachment plug-connected room air conditioner shall not exceed 50% of the rating of a branch circuit where lighting units or other appliances are also supplied.
268
EBCS-10 1995
11.9
STORAGE BATTERIES
EBCS-10 1995
269
c) covered with an insulating material having a dialectic strength of at least 1500.0V, d) of sufficient strength to carry the weight of the battery, and e) designed to withstand vibration and sway, where appropriate. (2) Battery cells shall be spaced a minimum of IO.Omm apart. (3) Battery cells having conductive containers shall be installed on non-conductive surfaces. (4) Sealed cells and multi-compartment sealed batteries having conductive containers shall have
an insulating support if a voltage is present between the container and earth. (5) Cells and multi-compartment vented stage batteries, with covers sealed to containers of non-
conductive, heat resistant material, shall not require additional insulating support. (6) Batteries having a nominal voltage greater than 230.0V and with cells in rubber or composition containers shall be sectionalized into groups of 230.0V or less.
11.9.5 Wiring
(l) The installation of wiring and equipment in a battery room shall be in accordance with the
requirements of a dry location. (2) The wiring between cells and batteries and between the batteries and other electrical equipment shall be: a) bare conductors which shall not be tapped; b) open wiring; c) a jacket flexible cord; d) mineral-insulated cable provided it is adequately protected against corrosion where it cable provided that it has a suitable corrosion-resistant protection, may be in direct contact with acid or acid spray; or .' e) aluminium-sheathed where necessary. (3) Where wiring is installed in rigid conduit or electrical metallic tubing: a) the conduit or tubing shall be of corrosion-resistant corrosion; material suitably protected from
b) the end of the raceway shall be tightly sealed with sealing compound, rubber tape, or other acceptable material, to resist the entrance of electrolyte by spray or creeping;
270
EBCS-10 1995
c) the conductor shall issue from the raceway through a substantial glazed insulating bushing; d) at least 300.0mm of the conductor shall be free from the raceway where connected to a cell terminal; and e) the raceway exit shall be at least 300.0mm above the highest cell terminal to reduce the electrolyte creepage or spillage entering the raceway. Table 11.1 Minimum temperature rating for the insulation of motor supply conductor [0C]
(Based on ambient temp.erature of 30C)
75 90 90 110 110 H B F
ventilated
75
A
Insulation
class rating
Table 11.2 Conductor sizes for motors for different service requirements
minute ous minute Continu rating motor Operating valves, raising' or lowering Rolls, and turntables, ore-and coal-handling Freight etc. passenger elevators, Intermittent Varyng duty duty Periodic duty rating 85 120 95 140 150 90 200 60Percentage 110 110 85 of nameplate 30-and current rating of
eg
EBCS-10 1995
271
,....
Duty cycles
I'
II
Light staring duty Heavy starting duty Extra heavy starting duty Light intermittent duty Medium intermittent duty Heavy intermittent duty Continuous duty
5 see on 75 see off 10 see on 70 see off 15 see on 75 see off 15 see on 45 see off 15 see on 30 see of 15 see on 15 see off Continuous Duty
55 65 75
90
110
Table 11.4 Rating or setting of overcurrent devices for the protection of motor branch circuits
(Except as permitted in Table 11.5 where 16-A overcurrent protection for motor branch circuit conductors exceeds the values specified in here)
Per cent of full-load current Type of Motor . Maximum fuse rating Tlmedela y fuses
Alternating Current Single-phase all types Squirrel-cage and synchronous: Full-voltage, resistor and reactor Staring Auto-Transformer starting: Not more than 30.0A More than 30.0A Wound rotor 175 300 Non-
tlmedelay
250
I'i
Direct Current
Note:
(i)
The ratings of fuses for the protection of motor branch circuits as given in Table 11.5 are based upon fuse ratings appearing in the Table above, which also specifies the maximum settings of circuit breakers for the protection of motor branch circuits. (H) Synchronous motors of the low-torque, low-speed type (usually 450.0rpm, or lower) such as are used to drive reciprocating compressors, pumps, etc., and which start up unloaded, do not require a fuse rating or circuit breaker setting in excess of 200% of full-load current. (Hi) For the use of instantaneous trip (magnetic only) circuit interrupters in motor branch circuits, see 11.7.2.5.
272
EBCS-10 1995
Table 11.5 Sizes of conductors, fuse ratings, and circuit breaker settings for motor overload protection and motor circuit overcurrent protection
(This Table is based on Table 11.4 and a room temperature of 30C).
breakerMaximum Breaker breaker Non-time Starting) Non-time conductor 5.00 1.25 15 15 1.125 1.125 2.50 15 2012.50 2 of delay Overload d.c. or wound cage a.c. synchronous circuitsallowable rating of fuses and 1513.75 5 of 2018.75 2017.50 15ampacity 1511.25 3012.50 2513.75 20allowable 401.259 35"0"2.25 1520 17.5 115.00 16.25 10.00 15.00 30 45 25 40 17.50 18.75 10.00 1'52.25 6.25 1 7.507 8.758 7.50 8.75 25 5.6 3.75 6.25 5.00 fuses4.5 Fusesrating Maximum 20Timedelay 16.25 Timedela overload devices protection for rotor and types motor squirrel phase, protection maximum [A] Single all Overcurrent Type for and delayMinimumof y3.75 10 y"O" 3.5 Reactor Resistor "0" setting .F5 fuses Circuit (Full voltage, Starting) and Circuit (Autotransformer and Maximum Star-Delta Squirrel cage and Synchronous allowable setting of circuit breakers of the time-limited motor [A]
I
Fuses
15
Table
11.5 Sizes of conductors, fuse ratings, alld circuit breaker settings for motor overload protection and motor circuit overcurrent protection (conte' d)
(This Table is based on Table 11.4 and a room temperature of 30C).
Fuses
delay25 (Autotransformer and Star-Delta 100I II Non-time Non-time 40 .. delay27.5 fuses 50.0 21.25 22.50 32.5 30.0 7025.00 of of 60Timerating fuses 4060"0" 45"0" 40 50 47.5 5042.5 4050.0 7040.0 3030.0 6032.5 5045.0 4040.0 4037.5 7037.5 8035.0 6020.00 110 20 100 23.75 42.5 35.0 60 allowable 3580 45 27.5 3090 17.5 2545.0 20.00 50 overload devices Minimum wound rotor Type for and fuses 25 conductor Timedela Overload d.c. or squirrel cage) and synchronous ofcircuitsallowable rating of fuses and protection for phase.a.c. types motor circuit breakers of the time-limited Maximum Fuses 35 Overcurrent all protection maximum Maximum allowable setting [A] y 125 50 I Single ampacityof setting y"O" 30 23.7510047.5 Reactor Resistor Circuit Circuit 20 I breaker (Full voltage, Starting) and cage and Synchronous 25.00Circuit Breaker breaker Starting) Squirrel 50
Table 11.5 Sizes of conductors, fuse ratings, and circuit breaker settings for motor overload protection and motor circuit overcurrent protection (conte'd)
(This Table is based on Table 11.4 and a room temperature of 30C).
Fuses
Non-time Starting) (Autotransformer and Star-Delta Non-time 70delay 77.5 10060.0 '175Maximumfuses Overload d.c. 100overload of 125devicesof fuses 60200 7 7072.5 125Minimum 1102.5 1000.0 7067.5 1-00 6 1505.0 70Time 200 . 8 9077.5 8075.0 175 60 125 9 110 90 150 Maximum 9070.0 8072.5 7075.0 175 100.0 225 250 175 150 125 8setting 65.0 62.5 87.5 9 97.5 250 100.0 57.5 55.0 52.5 67.5 65.0 62.5 82.5 60.0 57.5 55.0 80.0 87.5 85.0 90.0 92.5 97.5 52.5 95.0 allowable fuses 50 Fusesrating Timedela conductor wound cage and types and of 7070.0 protection for rotor a.c. synchronous circuit breakers of the time-limited Single all delay"D"0 voltage, Starting) and or Maximum allowable for motor circuitsallowable rating of fuses and yampacityof y"D" "D" squirrel phase, protection maximum [A] Overcurrent Type setting breaker breaker(Full Reactor Resistor Breaker Circuit Circuit Squirrel cage and Synchronous
Table 11.5 Sizes of conductors, fuse ratings, and circuit breaker settings for motor overload protection and motor circuit overcurrent protection (conte'd)
(This Table is based on Table 11.4 and a room temperature of 30C).
Fuses
Non-time delay Starting)wound (Autotransformer and Star-Delta Non-time 162.5 450 225 150 350 Maximum 187.5 181.5 225175.0 of of 30075.0 200107.5 25081.5 300 Maximum 169.0 125110.0 150setting 175overload fuses Overload d.c. 200devices 22587.5 15069.0 17531.5 125 100 200 125 175 90 150 rating 107.5 105.0 102.5 110.0 112.5 115.0 117.5 120.0 122.5 allowable 400 250 102.5 350 105.0 162.5 125.0 137.5 150.0 112.5 115.0 117.5 131.5 120.0 122.5 156.5 144.0 25.0 37.5 56.5 44.0 50.0 fuses 175 Fuses 110 conductor 300 Timedela Reactor Time protection Overcurrent and types motor for y"D" allowable setting circuit breakers of the time-limited [A] delay"D"(Full voltage, Starting) and or Maximumrotor a.c. synchronousof circuits allowable rating of fuses and yampacltyof "D" ~50Minimum fuses Resistor squirrel cage Type for and Single phase, protection maximum all breaker breaker Breaker Circuit Circuit Squirrel cage and Synchronous
Table 11.5 Sizes of conductors, fuse ratings, and circuit breaker settings for motor overload protection and motor circuit overcurrent protection (conte'd)
(This Table is based on Table 11.4 and a room temperature of 30C).
Fuses
Non-time (Autotransformer for rotor a.c. Starting) 400delay 450500 rating of Non-time 225200 of fuses Overlo::.ld protectionand Star-Delta synchronouscircuitsallowable rating of fuses and 250313 300206 250288 250Maximumfuses 500 600 200 206 219 225 238 231 244 194 250 263 231 244 238 250 263 allowable 350275 400219 450213 500 225 275 313 288 300 300 250 213 fuses Maximum Fuses overload devices conductor 300194 350300 600- 200 Minimum 500225 350 175 limedela voltage. Resistor d.c. or Maximum allowable for motorof circuit breakers of the time-limited lime wound cage and types and yampacltyof y"D" 300 "D" setting squirrel phase, protection maximum [A] Single Overcurrent Type setting all delay"D" breaker(Full Reactor Starting) and breaker Breaker Circuit Circuit Squirrel cage and Synchronous
Table 11.5 Sizes of conductors, fuse ratings, and circuit breaker settings for motor overload protection and motor circuit overcurrent protection (conte'd)
(This Table is based on Table 11.4 and a room temperature of 30C).
-- - - Maximum -- 600 -'--Non-time ~ 550 Non-time Fuses (Autotransformer for rotor a.c. 600 allowable of 500 delay 600 conductor fuses Overload Starting) and Star-Delta 500Time 625 625 600 325 325 350 '400500 400425 500500 500475 500450 400400 400375' of 350336 600overload 450363 500600 600550 400336 500375 3 500 -400 425 475 450 300 400 575 wound cage and synchronous circuit breakers of the time-limited Minimum 350 575 525 350 fuses Fuses devices Tlmedela voltage, protection 5~5 setting y''O"450 delay.Maximumfuses Resistor d.c. or Maximum allowable for motorofcircuitsallowable rating of fuses and ~OO63rating yampacltyof "0. "0" Overcurrent Type setting squirrel phas~, protectionand Single all types maximum [A] breaker(Full Reactor Starting) and Breaker breaker Circuit Circuit Squirrel cage and Synchronous
SECTION
12
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
12.1
SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to hazardous locations in which electrical equipment are subject to the conditions classified as follows: (a) (b) (c)
and wiring
Class I locations in which flammable gases or vapours are or may be present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures; Class II location which are hazardous because ofthe presence of combustible electr.ically conductive dusts; and Class III locations which are hazardous because of the presence of easily ignitible fibres or flyings, but in which such fibres or flyings are not likely to be in suspension in the air in quantities sufficient to produce ignitible mixtures. or
12.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCE
(l) The following reference contains provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute
provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. (a) C22.1:1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard Installations, Sixteenth Edition. for Electrical
12.3
CLASSIFICATION
(1) Class I locations shall be divided into two divisions as follows: (a) Division 1, comprising Class I locations in which:
EBCS-10 1995
279
i)
hazardous concentration of flammable gases or vapours may exist continuously, intermittently, or periodically under normal operating conditions; ii) hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapours may exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operation or because of leakage; or iii) equipment is operated or processes are carried on, of such a nature that breakdown or faulty operation thereof could result in the release of hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapours and simultaneous failure of electrical equipment. Division 2, comprising Class locations in which: flammable volatile liquids, flammable gases or vapours are handled, processed, or used, but in which the liquids, gases, or vapours are normally confined within closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape only as \ a result of accidental rapture or breakdown of the containers or systems or the abnormal operation of the equipment by which the liquids or gases are handled, processed, or used; or (ii) hazardous concentration of gasses or vapours are normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation, bu.twhich may become hazardous as the r~sult of failure or abnormal operation of the ventilating equipment; or (iii) the IQcation is adjacent to a Class I, Division 1 location, from which a hazardous ~ncentration of gas~es or vapours could be communicated, unless such communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure' ventilation from a source of clean air, and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided. (i)
(b)
i) combustible dust is or may be ih suspension in air continuously, intermittently, or periodically under normal oeperating conditions in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures; ii)".the normal or abnormal operation or the failure of equipment or apparatus might cause explosive or ignitible mixtures to be produced in, or in dangerous proximity to, 'electrical equipment or apparatus; or
280
EBCS-10 1995
iii dusts having the property of conducting electricity may be present. b) Division 2, comprising Class.II locations in which combustiBle dusts are not normally in suspension in air or likely to be thrown into suspension by the normal or abnormal operation or the failure of equipment or apparatus in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures, but in which: i) deposits or accumulations of dust may be sufficient to interfere with the safe dissipation of heat from electrical equipment or apparatus; or ii) deposits or accumulations of dust on, in or near electrical equipment may be ignited by arcs, sparks, or burning material from the electricalequipment. 12.3.3 Division of Class III Locations (1) Class III locations shall be divided into two divisions as follows: a) Division 1, comprising Class III locations in which readily ignitible fibr~s or materials producing combustible flyings are handled, manufactured, or used. b) .Division 2, comprising Class III locations in which readily ignitible fibres other fhan those in process of maI}.ufactureare stored or handled. 12.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
12.4.1 Electrical Equipment (1) Where electrical equipment is required by this Section to be approved for the class of location, it shall also be approved for the specific gas, vapour, or dust that will be present. (2) Such approval in (1) may be indicated by one or more of the following atmosphericgI:oup designations which have been established for the purpose of testing and approval: a) Group A, comprising atmospheres containing acetylene; b) Group B, comprising atmospheres containing butadiene, ethylene oxide, hydrogen (or gasses or vapours equivalent in hazard to hydrogen, such as manufactured gas), or propylene oxide;
EBCS-10 1995
281
c) Group C, comprising atmospheres containing acetaldehyde, cyclopropane, dlethyl .ether, ethylene, or unsymmetrical dimenthyl hydrazine (UDMH), or other gases or vapours of equivalent hazard; d) Group D, comprising atmospheres containing acetone, acrylonitrile, alcohol, ammonia, benzine, benzol, ethylene dichloride, gasoline, hexane, isoprene, lacquer solvent vapours, naphtha, natural gas, propane, propylene styrene, vinyl acetate, vinyl chloride, xylenes, or other gases or vapours or equivalent hazard; e) Group E, comprising atmospheres containing metal dust, including aluminum, magnesium, and their commercial alloys, and other metals of similarly hazardous character istics; f) Group F, comprising atmospheres containing carbon black, coal or coke dust; g) Group G, comprising atmospheres containing flour, starch or grain dust, and other dusts of similarly hazardous characteristics. 12.4.2 Marking (1) Electrical, equipment approved for use in hazardous locations shall be marked to indicate the class and for Classes I and II locations the group, or the specific gas, vapour or dust for which the equipment has been approved .
(2) Electrical equipment approved for use in Class I hazardous locations may be tJ1arked with: a) the maximum external temperature, or b) one of the following temperature codes in Table 12.1 to indicate the maximum external temperature:, Table 12.1 Temperature codes to indicate the maximum external temperature
Temperature T6temperature [0C] T3A Max. 180 T4 temperature [0C] T3C Max. 165 T5 T4A 100 200 85 T38 Temperature 160 120 135 215 230 450 260 280 300 external external oode
282
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 1
RDOUS LOCATIONS
(3) If no maximum external temperature marking is shown on Class I equipment approved for the class and group, the equipment, if of the heat-producing type (which excludes junction boxes, conduit fittings, etc), shall be considered as having the following maximum external temperature: Group Group Group Group A B C D 28O"C 28O"C 160"C 215C
(4) Equipment approved for Class I, Division 2 only shall be so marked. (5) slectrical equipment approved for operation at ambient temperatures exceeding 40"C shall, in addition to the marking specified in 12.4.2 be marked with the maximum ambient temperature for which the equipment is approved, and the maximum external temperature of the equipment as referred to in (2) and (3) above. 12.4.3 Non-Essential Electrical Equipment (1) No electrical equipment shall be used in a hazardous location unless it is essential to the processes being carried on therein. (2) Service equipment, panelboards, switchboards, and similar electrical equipment shall, 'where practicable, be located in rooms or sections of the building in which hazardous conditions do not exist. 12.4.4 Equipment Rooms (1) Where walls, partitions, floors or ceilings are used to form hazard-free rooms or sections, they shall be: a) of substantial construction; b) built of or lined with noncombustible material; and c) such as to ensure that the roo~ or section will remain free from hazards.
EBCS-10 1995
283
(2) Where a non-hazardous location within a building communicateS with a Class I, location, the locations shall be Division 2 location, a Class II location, or a Class
ill
separated by close-fittings, self-closing,.approved fire doors. 12.4.5 Cable Trays (1) Cable trays shall not be used to support cables in hazardous locations except where: a) the type of cable is approved iil Clauses of this Section for use in the particular hazardous location; and b) there can be no hazardous accumulation of combustible process dust or fibre in or upon the cable; the cable tray or the supports. 12.5 12.5.1 12.5.1.1 CLASS I WCATION Installations in Class I, Divisiop 1 Locations Transformers and capacitors
(1) Transformers and electrical capacitors which contain a combustible liquid that will burn shall be installed in electrical equipment vaults in accordance with applicable Clauses of Section 11. 12.5.1.2 Meiers, instruments and relays
(1) Where practicable, meters, instruments and relays, including kilowatt-hour meters, instrument transformers and resistors, rectifiers and thermionic tubes shall be located outside the hazardous locations. (2) Where it is not practicable to install meters, instruments, and relays outside Class I, Division 1 locations, they shall be approved for Class I locations. 12.5.1.3 Switches, motor controllers, circuit breakers and fuses
(1' Switches, motor controllers, circuit breakers and fuses, including push buttons, relays, and similar devices shall be provided with enclosures; the enclosure in each case, together with the enclosed apparatus, shall be approved as a complete assembly for use in Class I locations.
284
EBCS-10 1995
12.5.1.4
(1) Motors, generators and other rotating electrical machines shall be approved for Class I locations. 12.5.1.5 Wiring methods
(1) The wiring method shall be threaded rigid-metal conduit or cables approved for hazardous locations with associated cable glands approved for the particular hazardous location. (2) All boxes, fittings, and joints shall be threaded for connection to conduit or cable glands, and shall be explosion-proof with boxes and fittings approved for Class I locations. (3) Threaded joints shall have at least five full threads fully engaged and running threads shall not be' used. (4) Cables shall be installed and supported in a manner to avoid tensile stress at the cable glands. (5) Where it is necessary to use flexible connections at motor terminals and similar places, flexible fittings of the explosion-proof type and approved for the location shall be used. (6) Seals shall be provided in conduit or cable systems to prevent the passage of gases, vapours, or flames from one portion of the electrical installation to another through the system. 12.5.1.6 Lighting fixtures (1) Fixtures for fixed and portable lighting shall be approved as complete assemblies for Class I locations and shall be clearly marked to indicate the maximum wattage of lamps for which they are approved. (2) Boxes, box assemblies or fittings used for the support of lightiRg fixtures shall be approved for the purpose and for Class I locations.
EBCS-10 1995
285
12.5.2 12.5.2.1
a) threaded metal conduit; or b) cables approved for hazardous locations with associated cable glands approved for the particular hazardous location.
\
(2) Cable shall be installed and supported in a manner to avoid tensile stress at the cable glands. (3) Where it is necessary to use flexible connection at motor terminals and similar places, flexible metal conduit may be used. (4) Boxes, fittings and joints need not be explosion-proof. (5) Seals shall be provided in conduit or cable systems to prevent the passage o(gases, vapours, or flames through the system from one portion of the electrical installation to another. 12.5.2.2
Motors and generators
(1) Motors, generators, and other rotating electrical machines, in which are incorpor~ted
arcing or spark-producing components or integral resistance devices, shall be approved for Class I, Division 2 locations unless the arcing or spark-producing components or integral resistance devices are provided with enclosures approved for Class I locations. (2) Motors, generators, and other rotating electrical machines which do not incorporate arcing or spark producing components or integral resistance devices may be of the open or non-explosion-proof type. 12.5.2.3
Lighting fixtures
286
EBCS-10 1995
b) approved as complete assemblies for Class I, Division 2 locations and shall be clearly marked to indicate the maximum wattage, voltage, and specific type designations of the lamps for which they are approved. (2) Pendent fixtures shall be suspended by threaded rigid conduit systems or by other approved means. (3) Starting and control equipment for electric-discharge lighting equipment shall be pr0v.ided with enclosures approved for the location. 12.6 12.6.1 12.6.1.1 CLASS II LOCATION Installations in Class II, Division 1 Locations Transformers and capacitors
(1) Transformers and electrical capacitors which contain a combustible liquid shall be installed in electrical equipment vaults in accordance with applicable Clauses of Section 11,. 12.6.1.2 Switches, conJroUers,circuit breakers and fuses (1) Switches, motor controllers, circuit breakers and fuses, including push buttons, relays, and similar devices, shall be provided with a dust-tight enclosure approved for Class II locations. 12.6.1.3 Motors and generators (1) Motors, generators and other rotating electrical machines shall be approved for Class
n locations.
12.6.1.4
Wiring methods
(1) The wiring method shall be threaded rigid metal conduit or cables approved for hazardous locations with associated cable glands approved for the particular hazardous location. (2) Boxes, fittings and joints shall be threaded for connection to conduit or cable glands and boxes and fittings shall be approved for Class II locations.
EBCS-10 1995
287
(3) Cables shall be installed and supported in a manner to avoid tensile stress at the cable glands. (4) Where flexible connections are necessary, they shall be provided by: a) flexible connection fittings approved for the location; b) liquid-tight flexible metal conduit with fittings approved for the location; or c) extra-hard-usage flexible cord and provided with cable glands approved for the location. (5) Where flexible connections are subject to oil or corrosive conditions, the insulation of the conductors shall be of type approved for the condition or shall be protected by means ofa suitable sheath. (6) Where a raceway provides communication between enclosures one of which is required to be dust-tight and the other not, the entrance of dust into the dust enclosure through the raceway shall be prevented by: a) a permanent and effective seal; b) a horizontal section not less than 3.0m long in the raceway; or c) a vertical section of raceway not less than 105mlong and extending downward with .the dust tight enclosure.
12.6.1.5 Lightingfixtures
(1) Fixtures for fixed and portable lighting shall be approved as complete assemblies for Class locations and shall be clearly marked to indicate the maximum wattage of lamps for which they are approved.
II
(2) Pendent fixtures shall be suspended by threaded rigid conduit stems or chains with approved fittings or by other approved means which shall not include a flexible cord as the supporting medium, and threaded joints shall be provided with set screws or other effective means to prevent loosening. (3) Boxes, box assemblies or fittings used for the support of lighting fIxtures shall be approved for the purpose.
288
EBCS-10 1995
12.6.2 12.6.2.1
(1) Transformers and electrical capacitors which contain a combustible liquid shall be installed in electrical equipment vaults in accordance with applicable clauses of Sections 11.
12.6.2.2 Switches, controUers, circuit 'breakers and fuses
(1) In locations where dust from magnesium, aluminum, aluminum bronze powders, or other metals of similar hazardous characteristics may be present, switches, motor controllers, circuit breakers, and fuses shall have dust-tight enclosures approved for such locations.
12.6.2.3 Motors and generators
(1) Motors, generators and other rotating electrical machinery shall be: a) approved for Class II, or Class II Division 2 locations; b) ordinary, totally enclosed pipe-ventilated or totally enclosed fan-cooled and subject to the following: i) be equipped with integral overheating protection in accordance with 11.7.3.8 ii) if drain holes or other openings are provided they shall be closed with threaded plugs.
12.6.2.4 Wiring methods
(1) The wiring method shall be: a) threaded metal conduit; or b) cables approved for hazardous locations with associated cable glands approved for the particular hazardous location. (2) Cables shail be installed and supported in a manner to avoid tensile stress at the cable glands.
EBCS-10 1995
289
12.6.2.5
Lighting fixtures
(1) Fixed lighting shall: a) be protected from physical damage by acceptable guards or by location; b) provide enclosures for lamp and lampholders which shall be designed to minimize the deposit of dust on lamps and to prevent the escape of sparks, burning material, or hot metal; c) be clearly marked to indicate the maximum wattage of lamps for which they may be used without exceeding a maximum exposed surface temperature of 165C under normal conditions or use. (2) Pendent fixtures shall be suspended by threaded rigid conduit stems or chains with appro.ved fittings, or by other approved means, which shall not include flexible cord as the supporting medium. (3) Boxes, box assemblies or fittings used for the support of lighting fixtures shall be approved for that purpose. (4) Starting and control equipment for mercury-vapour and fluorescent lamps shall conform to the requirment of 12.6.2.2. 12.7 CLASS III LOCATIONS
12.7.1 Installations in Class III, Division 1 Locations 12.7.1.1 Transformers and capacitors
(1) Transformers and capacitors shall conform to the requirement of 12.6.2.1 12.7.1.2 Switches, cntrollers, circuit beakers and fuses
(1) Switches, motor controllers, circuit breakers and fuses, including push buttons, relay~ and similar devices, shall be provided with tight enclosures designed to minimize entrance of fibres and flyings, and which shall: a) be equipped with telescoping or close fitting covers, or with other effective means to prevent escape of sparks or burning material; and
290
EBCS-10 1995
b) have no openings, such as holes for attachment screws, through which, after installation, sparks or burning material might escape, or through which exterior accumulations of fibres or flyings or adjacent combustible material might be ignited. 12.7.1.3 Motors and generators (1) Except as provided in (2) below, motors, generators and other rotating electrical machinery
shall be:
a) totally enclosed non-ventilated, b) totally enclosed pipe-ventilated, c) totally enclosed fan-cooled. (2) Where only moderate accumulations of lint and flyings are likely to collect on or in the vicinityof a rotating electrical machine and the machine is readily accessible for routine cleaning and maintenance, there may be installed in the location: a) standard open-type machines without sliding contacts, centrifugal, or other types of switching mechanism, including motor overload devices; b) standard open-type machines which have contacts, switching mechanisms, or resistance devices enclosed within tight housings without ventilating or other opemngs; or c) self-cleaning textile motors of the squirrel-cage type. (3) Motors, generators and other rotating electrical machinery of the partially enclosed or splash-proof type shall not be installed in Class III locations. 12.7.1.4 Wiring methods (1) The wiring method shall be threaded rigid metal conduit or cables approved for hazardous locations with associated cable glands approved for the particular hazardous location. (2) Boxes and fittings in which taps, joints or terminal connections are made shall: a) be provided with telescoping or close fitting covers, or other effective means to prevent the escape of sparks or burning material; and
EBCS-10 1995
291
b) have no openings, such as holes for attachment screws, through which after installation, sparks or burning material might escape, or through which adjacent combustible material might be ignited. (3) Cables shall be installed and supported in a manner to avoid tensile stress at the cable glands. (4) Where it is necessary to use flexible connections, the provisions of 12.6.1.4(4) and 12.6.1.4(5) shall apply. 12.7.1.5 Lighting fixtures
(1) Fixed lighting shall: a) provide enclosures, for lamps and lampholders, which shall be designed to minimize entrance of fibres and flying objects and to prevent the escape of sparks, burning material, or hot metal; b) be clearly marked to indicate the maximum wattage lamp which may be used without exceeding a maximum exposed surface temperature of 165C under Rormal conditions of use. (2) Lighting fixtures which may ~e exposed to phystcal damage shall be protected by a suitable guard. (3) Pendent fixtures shall comply with the requirments of 12.6.2.5(2). (4) Boxes, box assemblies or fittings used for the support of lighting fixtures shall be approved for that purpose. 12.7.1.6 Storage-batterycharging equipment
(1) Storage battery charging equipment shall be located in a separate room built or lined with substantial noncombustible materials so constructed as to adequately exclude flyings or lint, and shall be well ventilated.
292
EBCS-10 1995
12.7.2
12.7.2.1
(1) The wiring method in Class III, Division 2 locations shall conform to 12.7.1.4 except that in sections, compartments or areas used solely for storage and containing no machinery, open wiring on insulators, in accordance with applicable Clauses of Section 8, may be used, provided that, where conductors are installed elsewhere other than in roof spaces and remote from physical damage, they shall be protected by running board not less than 19.0mm thick or other acceptable means.
12.7.2.3 Switches, controllers, circuit breaker.t and fuses
(1) Switches, motor controllers, circuit breakers, and fuses shall conform to the requirement of 12.7.1:2.
12.7.2.4 Motors and generators
(1) Motors, generators, and other rotating electrical machinery shall be:. a) totally enclosed non-ventilated; b) totally enclosed pipe-ventilated; or c) totally enclosed fan-cooled. (2) Motors, generators or other rotating electrical machinery of the partially enclosed or splashproof type shall not be iI)Stalledin Class III locations.
EBCS-10 1995
293
SECTION
13
FlAMMABLE UQUID DISPENSING AND SERVICE STATIONS, GARAGES, BULK STORAGE PlANTS, FINISIllNG PROCESSES AND AIRCRAFf HANGARS
13.1 SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to electrical apparatus and wiring installed in the following facilities: a) Gasoline dispensing and service stations, and other locations where gasoline or other similar volatile flammable liquids are dispensed or transferred to fuel tanks of selfpropelled vehicles. b) Commercial garages, repair houses and storage where service and repair operations of vehicles of the type described in (a) above are carried out and in which more than three such vehicles are, or may be, stored at anyone time. c) Residential storage garages in which not more than three vehicles of the type described in (a) above are, or may be, stored, but which will not normally be used for service or repair operations. d) Bulk storage plants where gasoline or other similar volatile flammable liquids are stored in tanks having an aggregate capacity of one-car-Ioad or more, and from which such products are distributed (usually by tank truck). e) Finishing processes where paints, lacquers or other flammable finishes are regularly or frequently applied by spraying, dipping, brushing or by other means, and where volatile flammable solvents or thinners are used or where readily ignitible deposits or residues from such paints, lacquers, or finishes may occur.
294
EBCS-10 1995
t) Aircraft hangars used for storage or servicing of aircraft in which gasoline jet fuels,
or other volatile flammable liquids, or flammable gases, are used; but shall not include those locations used exclusivelyfor aircrafts that have never contained such liquids or gases, or which have been drained and properly purged. 13.2 NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. (a) C22.1:1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Sixteenth Edition. National Electrical Code Handbook, Based on the 1981 (NEC), Seventeenth Edition.
(b)
NEC Handbook:1981
13.3
13.3.1 Hazardous Areas (1) The space within a d~penser enclosure upto 1.2m vertically above its base including the space below the dispenser which may contain electrical wiring and equipment shall be e<;>nsidered be Class I, Division 1 location. to (2) The space within a nozzle boot of a dispenser shall be considered to be a Class I Division 1 location. (3) The space within 450.0mm horizontally from the Division 1 location within the dispenser enclosure as specified in (1) aoove shaU be considered to be a Class I, Division 1 location. (4) In an outside location, any area beyond the Class I, Division 1 area within 6.0m horizontally from the exterior enclosure of any dispenser shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 location, which will extend to a level 4~O.Ommabove driveway or ground level.
EBCS-10 1995
295
(5) In an outside location, any area beyond the Class I, Division 1 location and within 3.0m horizontally from any tank fillpipe shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 'location which shall extend upward to a level 450.0mm above driveway or ground level. (6) Electrical wiring and equipment, any portion of which is below the surface of areas defined as Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 in (1), (3), (4) or (5) above shall be considered to be within Class I, Division 1 location which shall extend at least to the point of emergence above grade. (7) Areas within the vicinity of tank ventpipes shall be classified as follows: a) The spherical volume within a 900.0mm radius from point of discharge of any tank ventpipe shall be considered a Class I, Division 1 location and the volume between the 900.0mm to 1.5m radius from point of discharge of a vent shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 location. b) For any vent that does not discharge upward, the cylindrical volume below both the Division 1 and Division 2 locations extending to the ground shall be considered as Class I, Division 2 location. c) The hazardous area shall not be. considered to extend beyond an unpierced wall. (8) Areas within lubrication rooms shall be classified as follows: a) The area within any pit or space below grade or floor level shall be considered a Class I, Division 1 location unless the pit or space is beyond the hazardous areas specified in (4), (5), (6), (7) above in which case the pit or space shall be considered a Class I Division 2 location. b) The area within the entire lubrication room up to 50.0mm above the floor or grade, whichever is the higher, and the area within 900.0mm measured in any direction from the dispensing point of a hand-operated unit dispensing volatile flammable liquids shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 location. 13.3.2 Wiring and Equipment within Hazardous Areas (1) Electrical wiring and equipment within the hazardous areas defined in Clause 13.3.1 shall conform to the requirements of Section 12.
296
EBCS-10 1995
(2) Where dispensers are supplied by rigid metal conduit, flexible fittings of the explosionproof type approved for the location shall be used between the conduit and the junction box of the dispenser in addition to any sealing fittings and unions that may be required pursuant to the provisions of Section 12. (3) Each circuit leading to or through a dispensing pump shall be provided with a switching means which will disconnect simultaneously from the source of supply all unearthed conductors of the circuit. (4) All non-current-carrying metal parts of dispensing pumps, metal raceways and other electrical equipment shall be bonded to earth in accordance with Section 7 of this Code. 13.3.3 Wiring and Equipment above Hazardous Areas (1) Wiring and equipment above hazardous areas shall meet the requirements and provisions of Clauses 13.4.3 and 13.4.4 of this Section. 13.4 COMMERCIAL GARAGES, REPAIRS AND STORAGE
13.4.1 Hazardous Areas (1) For each floor at or above grade, the entire area up to a level 50.0mm above the floor shallbe considered to be a Class I, Division 2 location. (2) For each floor below grade, the entire area up to a level 50.0mm above the bottom of outside doors or other openings which are at or above grade level shall be considered to be a Class I, Division 2 location except that, where adequate mechanical ventilation is provided,the hazardous location shall extend up to a level of only 50.0mm above each such floor. (3) Any pit or depression below floor level shall be considered to be a Class I, Division 2 locationwhich shall extend up to the floor level. (4) Adjacent areas in which hazardous vapours are not likely to be released such as stockrooms, switchboard rooms, and other similar locations having floors elevated at least 50.0mmabove the adjacent garage floor, or separated therefrom by tight curbs or partitions at least 50.0mm high, shall not be classified as hazardous.
EBCS-10 1995
297
13.4.2 Wiring and Equipm~nt in Hazardous Areas (1) Within hazardous areas as defined in Clause 13.4.1, wiring and equipment shall conform to the requirements of applicable Clauses of Section 12. 13.4.3 Wiring above Hazardous Areas (1) All fixed wiring above hazardous areas shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of Section 8 and suitable for the type of building and occupancy. (2) For pendants, flexible cord of the hard-usage type shall be employed. (3) For connection of portable lamps, portable motors, or other portable utilization equipment, flexible cord of the hard-usage type shall be used. 13.4.4 Equipment above Hazardous Areas (1) Fixed equipment which is less than 3.6m above the floor level and which may produce arcs, sparks, or partiCles of hot metal such as cutouts, switches, charging panels, generators, motors or other equipment (excluding socket outlets, lamps and lampholders) having makeand-break or sliding contacts, shall be of the totally enclosed type or so constructed as to prevent escape of sparks or hot metal particles. (2) Lamps and lampholders for fixed lighting and that are located over lanes through which vehicles are commonly driven or which may otherwise be exposed to physical damage shall be located not less than 3.6m above floor level unless of totally enclosed type or so constructed as to prevent escape of sparks or hot metal particles. 13.5 RESIDENTIAL STORAGE GARAGES
13.5.1 Non-Hazardous Location (1) Where the lowest floor is at or above adjacent grade or driveway level, and where there is at least one outside door at or below floor level, the garage area shall not be classified as a hazardous location.
298
EBCS-10 1995
13.5.2 Hazardous Location (1) Where the lowest floor is below adjacent grade or driveway level, the following shall apply: a) The entire area of the garage or of any enclosed space which includes the garage shall be classified as a Class I, Division 2 location and will extend up to a level 50.0mm above the garage floor. b) Adjacent areas in which hazardous vapours or gases are not likely to be released, and having floors elevated at least 50.0mm above the garage floor, or separated therefrom by tight curbs or partitions at least 50.0mm high shall not be classified as hazardous. 13.5.3 Wiring (1) Wiring above the hazardous locations shall conform to the provisions of Section 8. (2) Wiring in the hazardous location shall conform to the provisions of Section 12. 13.6 BULK STORAGE PLANTS
13.6.1 Hazardous Areas (1) Neas containing pumps, bleeders, withdrawal fittings, metres and similar devices wliich are located in pipelines handling flammable liquids under pressure shall be classified and comply with the following: a) Ventilated indoor areas shall be considered as Class I, Division 2 locations within a 15m distance extending in all directions from the exterior surface of such devices as well as 7.5m horizontally from any surface of these devices and extending upwards to 900.0mm above floor or grade level, provided that: i) design of the ventilation systems takes into account the relatively high relative density of the vapours; ii) where openings are used in outside walls, they are of adequate size and located at floor level unobstructed except by louvres or coarse screens; and
EBCS-10 1995
299
iii) where natural ventilation is inadequate, mechanical ventilation is provided. b) Indoor areas not ventilated in accordance with (a) above shall be considered Class I, Division 1 locations within a 15m distance extending in all directions from the exterior surface of such devices as well as 7.5m horizontally from any surface of the device and extending upward 900.0mm above floor or grade level. c) Outdoor area shall be considered as Class I,_Division 2 locations within a 900.0mm distance extending in all directions from the exterior surface of such devices as well as up to 450.0mm above grade level within 3.0m horizontally from any surface of the devices. (2) Areas where flammable liquids are transferred shall be classified as follows: a) In outdoor areas or where positive and reliable mechanical ventilation is provided in indoor areas in which flammable liquids are transferred to individual containers, such areas shall be considered a Class I, Division 1 locations within 900.0mm of the vent or fill opening extending in all directions and a Class I, Division 2 location within the area extending between a 900.0mm and 15m radius from the vent or fill ~ opening extending in all directions, and including the area within a horizontal radius of 3.0m from the vent or fill opening and extending to a height of 450.0mm above floor or grade levels. b) Where positive and reliable mechanical ventilation is not provided in indoor areas in which flammable liquids are transferred to individual containers, such areas shall be considered to be a Class I, Division 1 location. (3) Areas in outside locations where loading and unloading of tank vehicles and tank cars take place shall be classified as follows: a) The area extending 900.0mm in all'directions from the dome (when loading through an open dome) or from the vent (when loading through a closed dome with atmospheric venting) shall be considered a Class I, Division 1 location. b) The area extending between a 900.0mm and a 15m radius from the dome (when loading through an open dome) or from ,the vent (when loading through a closed dome with atmospheric venting) shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 location.
300
EBCS-10 1995
c) The area extending within 900.0mm in all directions from a fixed connection used in bottom loading or unloading, loading through a closed dome with atmospheric venting, or loading through a closed dome with a vapour recovery system shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 location except that, in the case of bottom loading or unloading, this classification shall also be applied to the area within a 3.0m radius from point of connection and extending 450.0mm above grade. (4) Area within the vicinity of above-ground tanks shall be classified as follows: a) The area above the roof and within the shell of a floating-roof type tank shall be considered a Class I, Division 1 location. b) For all type of above-ground tanks: i) the area within 3.0m from the shell ends, and roof of other' than a floating-roof shall be considered a Class I, division 2 location; and ii) where dikes are provided, the area inside the dike and extending upwards to the top of the dike shall be considered to be a Class I, Division 2 location. c) The area within 105m of vent opening and extending in all directions shall be considered a Class I, Division 1 location. d) The area between 105mand 3.0m of a vent opening and extending in all directions shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 location. (5) Pits and depressions shall be classified as follows: a) Any pit or depression, any part of which lies within a Division 1 or Division 2 location, unless provided'with positive and reliable mechanical ventilation, shall be considered a,Class I, Division 1 location. b) Any such areas as in (a) above, when provided with positive and reliable mechanical ventilation, shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 location. c) Any pit or depression not within a Division 1 or Division 2 location as defined herein, but which contains piping, valves, or fittings shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 location. (6) Garages in which tank vehicles are stored or repaired shall be considered to be a Class I, Division 2 location up to 450.0mm above floor or grade level.
EBCS-10 1995
301
(7) Buildings such as office buildings, boiler rooms, etc which are outside the limits of hazardous areas as defined herein and which are not used for handling or storing volatile flammable liquids or containers for such liquids shall not be considered to be hazardous locations. 13.6.2 Wiring and Equipment in Hazardous Areas (1) All electrical wiring and equipment in hazardous areas defined in Clause 13.6.1 shall conform to the requirements of Section 12. 13.6.3 Wiring and Equipment above Hazardous Areas (1) Wiring installed above a hazardous location shall conform. to the requirements of Section 8 and be suitable for the type of buildings and occupancy. (2) Fixed equipment which may produce arcs, sparks or particles of hot metal, such as lamps and lampholders, cutouts, switches, socket outlets, motors or other equipment having make-and-break or sliding contacts, shall be of the totally enclosed type or so constructed as to prevent the escape of sparks or hot metal particles. (3) Portable lamps or utilization equipment and the flexible cords supplying them shall conform to the requirements of Section 12 for the class of location above which they are connected or used. (4). All non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment and raceways shall be bonded to earth in accordance with Part I of Section 7 of this Code. 13.7 FINISlllNG PROCESSES
13.7.1 Hazardous Locations (1) The following areas shall be considered to be Class I, Division 1 locations: a) The interiors of spray booths and their exhaust ducts. b) All space within 6.0m horizontally in any direction, and extending to a height of 900.0mm above the goods to be painted, from spraying operations that are more extensive than touch-up spraying and not conducted within the spray booth.
302
EBCS-10 1995
c) All space within 6.0m horizontally in any direction from dip tanks and their drain boards, such space extending to a height of 900.0mm above the dip tank and drain board. d) All other spaces where hazardous concentrations of flammable vapours are likely to occur. (2) For spraying operations within an open face spray booth, the extent of the Class I, Division 2 hazardous location shall be not less than the following: a) Where the ventilation system is interlocked with the spraying equipment so as to make the spraying equipment inoperable when the ventilation system is I}ot in operation, the space shall extend at least 105m from the open face of the spray booth. b) Where the ventilation system is not interlocked with the spraying equipment so as to make the spraying equipment inoperable when the ventilation system is not in operation, the space shall extend at least 3.0m from the open face or front of the .spray booth. (3) All space within the room, but beyond the limits for Class I, Division 1 location as classified in (1) above for extensive open spraying; for dip tanks and drain boards and for other hazardous operations, shall be considered to be Class I, Division 2 location. (4) Adjacent areas which area cut off from the defined hazardous area by tight partitions without communicating openings, and wi~hinwhich hazardous vapours are not likely to be released, shall be classified as non-hazardous. (5) Drying and baking areas provided with positive mechanical ventilation to prevent formation of flammable concentration of vapours and provided with effective interlocks to de-energize all electrical equipment not approved for Class I locations, in case the ventilating equipment is inoperative, may be classified as non-hazardous. (6) Notwithstanding the requirements of (lb) above, where adequate mechanical ventilation with effective interlocks is provided at floor level: a) the space within 900.0mm horizontally in any direction from the goods to be painted and such space extending to a height of 900.0mm above the goods to be painted shall be considered a Class I, Division 1 location; and
EBCS-10 1995
303
,
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS b) all space between a 900.0mm and 105mdistance above the goods to be painted and all space within 6.0m horizontally in any direction beyond the limits for Class I, Division 1 location shall be considered a Class I, Division 2 location. (7) Notwithstanding the requirements of (2) above where a baffle of sheet metal of not less than 1.25mm is installed vertically above the front face of an open-face spray booth to a height of 900.0mm or to the ceiling, whichever is lower and extending back on the side edges for a distance of 105m,the space behind this baffle shall be considered to be a nonhazardous location. 13.7.2 Wiring and Equipment in Hazardous Areas (1) All electrical wiring and equipment within the hazardous areas as defined In Clause 13.7.1 shall conform to the requirements of Section 12. (2) .Unless specifically approved for both readily ignitable deposits and flammable vapour location, no electrical equipment shall be installed or used where it may be subject to a hazardous accumulation of readily ignitable deposits or residue. (3) Illumination of readily ignitable area through panels of glass or other tr~nsparent or translucent materials is permissible only where: a) fixed lighting units are used as the source of illumination; b) the panel is noncombustible and effectively isolates the hazardous area from the area in which the lighting unit is located; c) the lighting unit is acceptable for its specific location; d) the panel is of a material or is so protected that breakage will be unlikely; e) the arrangement is such that normal accumulation of hazardous residue on the surface of the panel will not be raised to a dangerous temperature by radiation or conduction from the source of illumination. (4) Portable electric lamps or other utilization equipment shall: a) not be used within a hazardous area during operation of the finishing process; b) be of a type specifically approved for Class I locations when used during cleaning or repairing operations. (5) Notwithstanding the requirements of (2) above:
304
EBCS-10 1995
a) totally enclosed and gasketted lighting may be used on the ceiling of a spray room where adequate and positive mechanical ventilation is provided; and b) infra-red paint-drying units may be utilized in a spray room if the controls are interlocked with those of the spraying equipment such that both operations cannot be performed simultaneol,lsly;and if portable, the paint and the drying unit shall not be brought into the spray room until the spraying operations have ceased. 13.7.3 Wiring and Equipment above Hazardous Areas (1) All fixed wiring above hazardous area shall conform to the provisions of Section 8. (2) Equipment which may produce arcs, sparks, or particles of hot metal, such as lamps and lampholders for fixed lighting, cutouts, switches, receptacles, motors or other equipment having make-and-break or sliding contacts, where installed above a hazardous area or above an area where freshly finished goods are handled, shall be of the totally enclosed type or so constructed as to prevent the escape of sparks or hot metal particles. (3) All metal raceways and all non-current-carrying metal portions of fixed or porta~le equipment, regardless of voltage, shall be bonded to earth in accordance with ,Part I of Section 7 of this Code.' 13.8 AIRCRAFf HANGARS
13.8.1 Hazardous Areas (1) Any pit or depression below the level of the hangar floor shall be considered to be a Class I, Division 1 location which shall extend up to the floor level. (2) The entire area of the hangar, including any adjacent and communication areas ~ot suitably cut off from the hangar shall be considered to be Class I, Division 2 location up to a level 450.0mm above the floor. (3) The area within 105m horizontally from aircraft power plants, aircraft fuel tanks, or aircraft structures containing fuel shall be considered to be a Class I, Division 2 location which shall extend upward from the floor to a level1.5m above the upper surface of wings and of engine enclosures.
EBCS-10 1995
305
(4) Adjacent area in which hazardous vapours are not likely to be released, such as stock rooms, electrical control rooms, and other similar locations, may be classified as nonhazardous when adequately ventilated and when effectively cut off from the hangar itself in accordance with the provisions of Section 12. 13.8.2 Wiring and Equipment in Hazardous Areas (1) All fixed and portable wiring and equipment which is or may be installed or operated within any of the hazardous locations defined in Clause 13.8.1 shall conform to the requirements of Section 12. (2) All wiring installation in or under the hangar floor shall conform to the requirements for Class I, Division 1 locations. (3) Wiring systems installed in pits or other spaces in or under the hangar floor shall be provided with adequate drainage and shall not be placed in the same compartment with any other service except piped compressed air. (4) Attachment plugs and socket outlets in hazardous locations shall be explosion-proof?r shall be so designed that they cannot be energized while the connections are being made or broken. 13.8.3 Wiring Not within Hazardous Area (1) All fixed wiring in a hanger not within'a hazardous area as defined in Clause 13.8.1 shall be installed in metal raceways or shall be armoured cable, Type MI (MineralInsulated) cable, or aluminium sheathed cable, except that wiring in a non-hazardous location as set out in 13.8.1(4) may be of any type recognized in Section 8 as suitable for the type of building and the occupancy. (2) For pendants, flexible cord of the hard-usage type and containing a separate bonding conductor shall be used. (3) For portable utilization equipment and lamps, flexible cord approved for hard usage and containing a separate bonding conductor shall be used. (4) Suitable means shall be provided for maintaining continuity and adequacy of bonding between the fixed wiring system and the non-current-carrying metal portions of pendant fixtures, portable lamps and other portable utilization equipment.
306
EBCS-10 1995
13.8.4 Equipment Not within Hazardous Areas (1) In locations other than those described in Clause 13.8.1, equipment which is less than 3.0m above wings and engine enclosures of aircraft and which may produce arcs, sparks, or particles of hot metal, such as lamps and lanipholders for fixed lighting, cutouts, switches, socket outlets, charging panels, generators, motors or other equipment having make-andbreak or sliding contacts, shall be of totally-enclosed type or so constructed as to prevent escape of sparks or hot metal particles, except that equipment in areas described in 13.8.1(4) may be of general purpose type. (2) Lampholders of metal-shell-fibre-lined types shall not be used for fixed lighting.
EBCS-10 1995
307
SECTION
14
14.1
SCOPE
(1) This Section of the Code applies to the installation of electrical wiring and equipment within patient care areas of hospitals and those portions of the ele~trical systems of hospitals designated as essential electrical systems.
14.2
NORMATIVEREFERENCES
(l) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code S~dard on Electrical Installation of Buildings: . a) C22.1:1990 Ganadian Electrical Code, Part I, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Sixteenth Edition.
b) NEC (Handbook):1991 National Electrical Code Handbook, Based on the .1991 (NEC), Seventeenth Edition.
14.3
DEFI~ITIONS
(1) For the purpose of this Section, in addition to the terms defined in Section 1, the following definitions shall apply:
anaesthetizing location
any area of a health care facility where the induction and maintenance of..general anaesthesia are routinely carried out in the course of the examination or treatment of patients.
appUed part
the part or parts of medical electrical' equipment including the patient leads which come intentionally into contact 'Wi.,th the patient to be examined or treated.
308
EBCS-10 1995
body contact
an intentional contact at the skin surface or internally, bur not directly to the heart. an intentional contact directly to the heart by means of an invasive procedure. contact by voluntary action with a device that has no applied part. and is not intended to be connected to a patient. a patient care area in which anaesthetics are administered, or in which cardiac contact between a patient and medical electrical equipment is frequent or normal. that portion of an essential electrical" system'in circuits require power restoration within 2.0min. which the
cardiac contact
casual contact
emergency supply
one or more in-house generators of electricity intended to be available in the event of a failure of all other supplies and capable of supplying all the essential loads. an electrical system which has the capability of restoring and sustaining a supply of electrical energy to specified loads in the event of a loss of the normal supply of energy. for a given set of conditions in an isolated power system, the current, expressed in milliamperes and consisting of resistive and capacitive leakage and fault currents, that would flow through low impendence if the low impendence were to be connected between either isolated conductor and ground. an institution, so designated by Ethiopian Ministry of Health, where patients are accommodated on the basis of medical need and are provided with continuing medical care and supporting diagnostic and therapeutic services. a patient care area in which body contact between a patient and medical electrical equipment is frequent or normal.
hazard index
hospital
EBCS-10 1995
309
isolated system
an electrical distributi.on system in which no circui.tconductor is connected directly to earth. a device which measures and displays the total hazard index on an isolated electrical system, and provides warning when the index reaches a preset limit. the main electrical supply into a building or building complex, and may consist of one or more consumer services capable of supplying all loads in the building complex. a person undergoing medical investigation or treatment. an area intended primarily for the prqvision of diagnosis, therapy, or care. a zone in a patient care area which has been pre-selected for the accommodation of a patient bed, table, or other supporting mechanism, and for the accommodation of equipmentlnvolved in patient treatment, and which includes the space within the room 1.5m beyond the perimeter of the bed in its normal location and to within 203m of the floor. a common bus at a patient care location, that is bonded to earth, and that serves as a common point t6 which equipment and other bonding connections can be made by means of a group of-jacks. equipment that is electrically connected to the supply be' means of connectors that can be accessed, loosened or tightened only with the aid of a tool.
normal supply
permanently
connected equipment
the hazard index of a given isolated system with all appliances, including the line isolation monitor, connected. that portion of an essential electrical system in which the circuits require power restoration within 10.0s.
vital branch
310
EBCS-10 1995
14.4
14.4.1 Branch Circuits (1) Thebranch circuits supplying socket outlets and permanently connected equipment in basic care areas shall be supplied from an earthed distribution system. (2) A branch circuit which supplies socket outlets or permanently connected medical electrical equipment within a patient care location shall only supply loads within such location. (3) All branch circuits for a patient care location shall be supplied from a single panelboard, except branch circuits intended to be part of an essential electrical 'system, which shall then be permitted to be supplied from two panelboards, one of which is part of the essential system. 14.4.2 Bonding to Earth in Basic Care Areas (1) Bonding conductors shall be insulated unless they are: a) installed in nonmetallic conduit; or b) incorporated into a cable assembly in such a manner that contact between any metal shield or armour, if it is present, and a bare bonding conductor is not possible.' (2) All socket outlets and other permanently connected equipment shall be bonded to earth by copper equipment bonding conductors, sized not smaller than the minimum size required for circuit conductors and, except as permitted by the supplying authority, run with the circuitconductors in accordance with the following: a) Each multi-wire branch circuit shall be provided with its own equipment bonding conductor. b) Except as permitted by (c) and (d) below, each 2-wire branch circuit supplying- a socket outlet at a patient care location shall be provided with its own equipment bonding conductor. c) When the socket outlets at a patient care location are supplied from two 2-wire branch circuits in the same raceway, a single equipment bonding conductor shall be - permitted to be shared by the two circuits.
EBCS-10 1995
311
d) When socket outlet intended for a pair of adjacent patient care locations are supplied by three 2-wire branch circuits and one of the circuits is intended to be shared by both patient care locations, the three circuits shall be permitted to share two equipment bonding conductors. (3) Equipment bonding conductors required by (2) and (5) below shall terminate either at the panelboard supplying the branch circuits to the patient care location from which they arise or on an earthing bus which is bonded to that panelboard. (4) Each item of 3-phase equipment shall be bonded to earth with an equipment bonding conductor which is: a) sized in accordance with Part I of Section 7 of this Code, but in no case smaller than 4.0mm2; and
b) connected to its own terminal at the equipment and the panelboard. (5) Exposed non-curr9nt-carrying metal parts of communication, radio or television equipment, other than telephone sets, at a patient care location, if they could become energized, shall be bonded to earth by: a) connection to the bonding screw in the communication section of a buried and ganged metal outlet box, serv~ng a patient care location; or b) connection to an equipment bonding conductor or earthing bus for that patient care location as identified in (3) above. 14.4.3 Socket Outlets in Basic-Care Areas (1) Socket outlets intended for a given patient-care location shall be located so as to minimize the likelihood of their inadvertent use for a patient-care location for which they are not intended. (2) Socket outlets which are located in areas that are routinely cleaned using liquids which normally splash against the walls shall be installed not less than 300.0mm above the floor. (3) Socket outlets located in bathrooms or washrooms within a patient care area shallbe located: a) adjacent to the wash basin, and b) outside of any bathtub enclosure or shower stall.
312
EBCS-10 1995
(4) Socket outlets which are located adjacent to a washbasin in a patient care area shall be protected by an earth fault circuit interrupter of the Class At type. 14.5 CIRCUITS IN INTERMEDIATE AND CRITICAL-CARE AREAS
14.5.1 Branch Circuits (1) The branch circuits supplying spcket outlets and other permanently connected equipment in intermediate or critical care areas. shall be supplied from either an earth system meeting the requirements of Section 14.4 or an isolated system meeting the requirements of Section 14.6, except that all branch circuits, other than those supplying multiphase equipment, shall be 2-wire circuits. 14.5.2 Bonding to Earth in Intermediate and Critical-Care Areas (1) Bonding to earth in intermediate and critical care areas shall conform to Clause 14.4.2 whether the supply is derived from an earthed or an isolated system. (2) If a patient-care-Iocation bonding point is provided, it shall be bonded to the panelboard serving the patient-care location with which it is associated by either: a) a bonding jumper connecting it to the bonding terminal in an enclosure which accommodates the bonding point along with socket outlets for a patient care location; or b) a copper conductor which is installed for that specific purpose, and is run in the same raceway as the equipmen.t bonding conductors serving that patient care location. 14.5.3 Receptacles in Intermediate and Critical Care Areas (1) Socket outlets in intermediate and critical care areas shall: a) meet the requirements of Clause 14.4.3; and b) where supplied from an isolated system, be so identified.
t For definition of Class A earth-fault circuit interrupter, refer to Clause A.2, Annex A, Section 25.
EBCS-10 1995
313
14.6
ISOLATED SYSTEMS
14.6.1 Sources of Supply (1) The means of supply to an isolated system shall be:
a) the secondary of one or more isolating transformers h*ing no direct electrical connection between primary and secondary windings, b) a motor-generator set, or c) a suitably isolated, battery-powered inverter supply. (2) Where more than one single-phase isolated pow~r system serves a single location, the earthing busses of all of these systems shall be bonded together with a copper bonding conductor: a) having a total impedance not greater than O.2ohm, and b) sized not smaller than that permitted in Part I of section 7 of this Code. 14.6.2 Single-Phase Isolated Circuits (1) Isolated circuits shall: a) not be deliberately earthed except through the impedance of an isolation sensing device (e.g., isolation monitor); b) have- overcurrent devices that will open all unearthed conductors simultaneously; c) unless prohibited by the Power Suppling Authority, be installed in non-metal raceways. (2) Any disconnecting means controlling an isolated circuit shall safely and simultaneously disconnect all unearthed conductors. (3) A single-phase isolated system shall include automatic means (a line isolation monitor), with an indicator located where visible to persons using the system, to monitor the impedance-to-earth of the system together with any loads connected to it. (4) Where a single-phase isolated system is employed, it shall supply: a) general-purpose socket outlets at:
314
EBCS-10 1995
i) ii) iii)
a single anaesthetizing location; one or more patient care locations in a single room; or a maximum of two patient care locations in separate but adjacent rooms, provided that the alarm indicator clearly identifies the patient care locations affected by the fault; or
b) special purpose socket outlets at different locations or in different rooms, provided that the system is used only for the one purpose, and is arranged so that only one socket outlets can be energized at a time. (5) A single-phase isolated system which supplies only a single load via a single branch circuit shall meet the requirements of (1) through (3) above except that: a) overcurrent devices need not be installed in the isolated circuit; and b) the use of a line-isolation monitor shall be optional. 14.6.3 Three-Phase Isolated Systems (1) A three-phase isolated system shall: a) supply only permanently connected equipment; and b) meet the requirements of Clause 14.6.1. 14.7 ESSENTIAL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
14.7.1 Circuits in Essential Electrical Systems (1) An essential electrical system shall comprise those circuits that supply loads designated by the hospital administration as being essential for the life safety and care of the patient, and the effective operation of the hospital. (2) An essential electrical system shall comprise at least a vital branch, and may also include a delayed vital branch. (3) The wiring of the essential electrical system shall be kept entirely independent of all other wiring and equipment and shall not enter a ftxture, raceway, box or cabinet occupied by other wiring except where necessary as in:
EBCS-10 1995
315'
ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
OF BUILDINGS
a) transfer switches; and b) emergency lighting fixtures supplied from two sources. 14.8 TRANSFER SWITCHES
(1) All transfer switches shall be acceptable to the supply authority. (2) Automatic transfer switches used in essential electrical systems shall: a) be electrically operated and mechanically held; and b) include means for safe manual operation. (3) Manual transfer switches shall conform to the following: a) The switching means shall be mechanically held and the operation shall be by direct manpower or by electrical remote manual control utilizing control power from the supply to which the load is being transferred. b) A manual transfer switch which is operated by electrical remote manual c.pntrol shall include a means for safe manual mechanical operation. c) Reliable mechanical interlocking (and, fn the case of a switch operated by electrical remote manual control, electrical interlocking) to prevent interconnection of the normal and the emergency supplies of power shall be inherent in the design of a manual transfer tlwitch. d) A manual transfer switch shall include a readily visible mechanical indicator showing the switch position. (4) The vital and delayed vital branches shall be connected to the emergency power supply by means of one or more automatic transfer switches. 14.9 EMERGENCY SUPPLY
(1) An emergency supply shall be one or more generator sets driven by a prime mover and located on the hospital premises in a fire-resistant enclosure or room, and in such a manner as to minimize the possibility of flooding and damage.
316
EBCS-10
1995
ETHIOPIAN
(2) The prime mover of the generating set, as specified in (1) above, shall be capable of operating independently of supplies of water and fuel from public utilities. (3) A fuel supply sufficient to operate the prime mover under full load for at least 24.0hrs shall be stored on the site.
EBCS-10 1995
317
SECTION
15.1
SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to installation of interior and exterior lighting equipment.
15.2
NORMATIVEREFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. (a) C22.1:1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical Installation, Sixteenth Edition. The Institute of electrical Engineers, Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings, Fourteenth Edition, Incorporating Amendments. British Standard, Artificial Lighting for Interior, Part 1. British Standard, Lighting Columns Parts 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, and 9.
(b)
IEE:1970
(c)
BS 8208:1985
(d)
BS 5649 (EN40):1978:
15.3 15.3.1
15.3.1.1
(1) Material of lamps shall confirm, as regards the type of lamp, mechanical qualities and insulation resistance, to applicable IEC or other international standards.
318
EBCS-10 1995
15.3.1.2
Luminaire
Construction
(1) Luminaires shall be constructed from such material and so finished that their safety, performance or appearance does not deteriorate significantly during normal life when they are operated in the condition for which they are designed.
15.3.1.3 Voltage
(1) Branch circuit voltages shall not exceed 230.0V -to-earth in dwelling units; and in other
than dwelling units, voltages shall not exceed the voltage-to-earth of nominal system 380.0V.
Note:
Where 380.0V line-to-line system is used, the control switch shall be of double-pole type and the luminaire shall be earthed.
15.3.1.4
Pro.tection
(1) Incandescent luminaires and incandescent lampholders shall not be connected to a branch circuit protected by overcurrent devices rated at more than 16.0A; but in other than.. dwelling units, they shall be permitted to b~ connected to a branch circuit protected by overC4rrent devices rated or set at not more than 20.0A. (2) Tungsten halogen luminaries, incandescent moulded-base luminaries, and incandescent moulded-base lampholders shall not be connected to branch circuit protected by overcurrent devices rated or set at more than 40.0A. (3) Fluorescent luminaries shall not be connected to a branch circuit protected by overcurrent devices rated or set at more than 16.0A except for circuits supplying fluorescent luminaries; only the rating of the overcurrent protection may exceed 16.0A, but shall not exceed 20.0A. (4) High intensity discharge (HID) luminaries shall not be connected to a branch circuit protected by overcurrent devices rated or set at more than:
~ 20.0A where the input voltage to the luminaire is not more than 230.0V nominal,
but not exceeding 380.0V nominal; and b) 16.0A where the input voltage is above 380.0V nominal.
EBCS-10 1995
319
(1) Luminaries and lampholders shall be placed or guarded in such a manner as to prevent ignition of any combustible materials. (2) Any shade or guard used for the purpose in (1) above shall be, besides limiting the temperature to which the combustible material may be subjected, suitable to withstand the heat from the lamp.
15.3.2.2
Show 'windows
(1) In show windows: a) no luminaries having exposed wiring other than a luminaire of a chain-suspension type shall be used; and b) no lampholders having a paper-fibber lining shall be used. 15.3.2.3 Clothes closets
(1) Luminaires installed in clothes closets: a) shall be located on the ceiling or on the front wall above the door of the closet unless mounted on the trim of the ,sidewalls of the doorway and approved for the application; and b) shall not be of pendant type. 15.3.2.4 Luminaire in damp or wet locations
(1) Luminaries in damp or wet locations shall be approved for such locations and be so marked. 15.3.2.5 Control switch
(1) A light fitting connected to an installation by means other than a socket outlet shall be controlled by a switch which shall be arranged to disconnect all the supply conductors.
320
EBCS-10 1995
(2) The switch required by (1) above shall be separate from lighting fitting and in a readily accessible position subject to the provisions (3) and (5) below, where applicable. (3) Where a switch has to be situated so as to be normally inaccessible to a person who is using a bath or a shower, it'is admissible for the switch to be placed adjacent to the normal access door of the room, or to be of the type operated by insulating cord. (4) The switch or switches providing control of comprehensive lighting installation .::omprising more than one lighting fitting in non-domestic premises may be installed in separate rooms. (5) Where lighting fittings are installed over readily combustible material, every light fitting .shall be controlled by an individual wall switch. (6) Where st~irway in a dwelling unit has risers, the lighting shall be controlled by intermediate wall switches or their functional equivalent located at the head .and foot of the' stairway. 15.3.3 Installation of Lighting Equipment 15.3.3.1 Live parts (1) Luminaries, lampholders, and rosettes shall be installed so that no live part is exposed to contact while they are in use. (2) Where lampholders and switches have exposed accessible terminals, ,they shall not be installed in metalluminaire canopies or in open bases of portable lamps. 15.3.3.2 Supports (1) Every luminaire, lampholder and rosette shall be securely supported. (2) Where a luminaire weighs more than 30.0N or exceeds 40.0cm in any dimension, it shall not be supported by the screw shell of the lampholders. (3) Where a non-metallic outlet box of thermoplastic material, such as, for example, P.V.C, is used to suspend a luminaire, care shall be taken to ensure that the temperature of the box does not exceed 600Cj and the mass suspended shall not exceed 30.0N.
EBCS-10 1995
321
(4) Where the weight of a luminaire does not exceed lOO.ON,it shall be permitted to be supported by an outlet box that is mounted on a bar hanger. (5) Where a luminaire weights more than lOa. ON,it shall be suspended independently of the outlet box, or by means of an acceptable fixture hanger with integral outlet box. 15.3.3.3 Outlet boxes to be covered
(1) Every outlet box used with lighting equipment shall be provided with a cover or covered by a luminaire canopy lampholder, rosette, or other device. 15.3.3.4 Recessed luminaries (1) The recessed portion of every enclosure of a recessed luminaire shall be at least 12.5mm from combustible material at every point other than at a point of support. (2) Every recessed luminaire shall be,so installed that any adjacent combustible material is not subjected to temperature in excess of 90oe. (3) Recessed luminaries shall not b,e used when blanketed with thermal insulation unless the luminaries are marked and approved for this use. 15.3.3.5 Minimum height of luminaries
(1) Where a rigid luminaire or lampholder is located at a height of less than 2.1m above the floor and is readily accessible, the luminaire or lampholder shall be protected from mechanical injury by a guard or by location. 15.3.3.6 Luminaire exposed to flying objects (1) Where luminaries are installed in gymnasiums or similar locations where the lamps are normally exposed to damage from flying objects, the lamp shall be guarded by one of the following means: a) metal reflectors that effectively protect the lamps, b) metal screens, c) enclosures of armoured glass or suitable plastic material.
322
EBCS-10 1995
15.3.3.7 Luminaire as a raceway (1) Branch circuit conductors run through a luminaire shall be contained in a raceway which is an integral part of the luminaire except that the conductor of a 2-wire, 3-wire, or 4-wire branch circuit supplying the luminaire may be carried through: a) an installation of luminaries approved and marked for end-to-end assembly to form a continuous channel; or b) luminaries which are connected together by acceptable wiring methods. (2) Ballasts located within luminaries shall be deemed to be sources of heat and' the conductors supplying the l\lminaries shall: a) have a temperature rating not less than 90C; b) be of type listed in: i) Section 4, Annex :S, as being suitable for use in raceway; or ii) Section 4, Annex B, as being suitable for use 'in accordance with this Clause, provided that conductors are not smaller than 2.5mm2 and do not extend " beyond the luminaries through raceway more than 2.0m long. 15.3.4 15.3.4.1 Wiring of Lighting Equipment Wiring of luminaries
(1) AIl electrical wiring on or within -aluminaire, -beside ensuring its electrical safety, shall: a) be neatly arranged without excess wiring; b) be not exposed to mechanical injury; c) be arranged so that it is not subject to temperatures above those for which it is approved; and d) be free from joint or tap within an arm or stem.
15.3.4.2
Colour coding
(1) Notwithstanding the requirements of Section 4 with regard to the colours used for identifying conductors, a continuous-coloured tracer in the braid ~f individual braided conductor shall be permitted for the supply conductors of a luminaire.
EBCS-10 1995
323
I'"
(1) Luminaries shall be wired with a conductor at least O.5mm2 cross sectional area, having insulation suitable for voltage and temperatnre to which the conductors may be subjected.
15.3.4.4 Conductor on movable parts
(1) Stranded conductors shall be used on chain-type luminaire and other movable parts of lighting equipment. (2) Conductors shall be arranged so that the weight of the luminaire or that of the movable parts do.es not place undue tension on the connections. (3) All conductors which supply movable parts of lighting equipment shall be protected against mechanical injury.
15.3.4.5 Pendant conductors
(1) Where pendant conductors are longer than 900.0mm, they shall be twisted together.
15.3.4.6 Recessed lumina ire wiring
(1) Conductors for wiring recessed luminaire, branch circuit and tap connection shall have insulation suitable for the temperature encountered. (2) Branch circuit conductors shall be permitted to be run directly to the luminaire. (3) Tap connection on' conductors shall: a) not be smaller than 1.0mm2 copper run in a factory-installed raceway or, if raceway is provided but not factory assembled, smaller than 2.5mm2; b) extend at least 1S0.0mm from the raceway; and c) be installed in a raceway extending at least 450.0mm but not more than 2.0m from the luminaire, and terminate in an outlet box located not less than 300.0mm from the luminaire. (4) The outlet box referred in (3c) above shall be accessible, and if access is through the opening for mounting the luminaire or through some other opening in the ceiling, this
324
EBCS-10 1995
opening shall be not less than 200.0mm x 200.0mm and the outlet box shall be mounted within 350.0mm of the opening. (5) A supply connection box forming part of an approved luminaire assembly shall be accessible, and if access is through the opening for mounting the luminaire, the following requirements shall be met: a) The electrical components of the luminaire shall be capable of being extracted through the opening for service. b) The cover of the supply connection box shall be capable of being removed by hand tool held below ceiling. (6) Branch-circuit conductors shall not pass through the supply connection box forming part of an approved luminaire assembly unless the luminaire is approved and marked for the purpose. 15.3.4.7 Ceiling outlet box wiring (1) Branch-circuit conductors having insulation suitable for 90C shall be used for the wiring of all ceiling outlet boxes on which a luminaire is, or may be, mounted; and the ampacity of 90C wire shall be limited to the ampacity of 60C wire. 15.3.4.8 Wiring of show-window luminaries (1) Where show-window luminaries are closely spaced, they shall be permitted to be connected to c;. conductor suitable for the purpose which is listed in Annex B of Section 4 with a temperature rating of not less than 125C. (2) The connection of show-window luminaries to the circuit conductors shall be in a junction box; and the box shall be maintained at a sufficient distance from the luminaire to ensure that the circuit conductors are not subjected to temperature in excess of their rating.
EBCS-10 1995
325
..
15.3.5
15.3.5.1 General (1) Non-current-carrying metal parts of luminaries and associated equipment shall be earthed in accordance with Part I of Section 7. 15.3.5.2 Lampholders
(1) Where centre-contact screw lampholders are connected to a source of supply having an earthed neutral conductor, the outer or screwed contact shall be connected to that conducfor. (2) Where lampho"lders in (1) above are used in circuits having neither pole connected with earth or in any damp situation in which they can readily be touched by a person in contact with or standing on earthed metal, they shall be provided with a protective shield of insulating material or shall be placed or safeguarded so that neither the lamp cap nor the oute,r or screwed contact of the lampholder can inadverntly be touched when the l~mp cap is engaged with the contact. 15.3.6 15.3.6.1 Electric-Discharge Lighting Systems Operating at 1000.0V or Less Transformer
(1) Luminaries which employ fluorescent lamps shall have thermally protected ballasts except where the ballasts are of the simple reactance type. 15.3.6.3 Auxiliary equipment (1) Reactors, capacitors, resistors, and other auxiliary equipment shall be: a) enclosed within the liminaire, b) enclosed within an accessible, permanently installed, metal cabinet where remote from the luminaire, or c) acceptable for use without an additional enclosure.
326
EBCS-10 1995
(2) The metaJ cabinet, if not part of the luminaire, shall be installed as close as possible to the luminaire. (3) Where display cases are not permanently installed, no part of a secondary circuit shall be included in more than one case.
15;~.6.4 Control
(1) The luminaries. and lamp installations shall be CQp.trolledby a switch, circuit breaker, or contact.or. (2) Where a switch is used as in (1) above, it shall:
a) have a current rating of not less than twi~ the C\lfrent rating of the lamps or transformers; b) be a type approved with the assembly; or c) be a manually-operated general use 380.0V a.c. switch. 15.4 OUTDOOR LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
15.4.1 General
15.4.1.1 Hazard (1) In outdoor lighting installations, either decorative lighting or illumination of outdoor
areas, the protection of the installation and safety from shock hazard sh?-llbe the major concern and the fire hazard of the minor or of secondary nature.
15.4.1.2 Ballast protection
(1) Luminaire which employ fluorescent lamps shall hwe thermally protected ballasts except where the ballasts are of the simple reactance type.
15.4.1.3 Overcurrent potection
(1) Overcurrent protection shall not be provided in a high-intensity discharge luminaire or a separate ballast box unless the combination is approved for the purpose and so marked.
-EBCS-10 1995
327
(1) Clause 15.4.2 shall apply to permanent, outdoor installations of floodlights of 300.0W or larger where the floodlights are mounted on poles or towers.
15.4.2.2 Service equipment
(1) Service equipment shall comply with Section 5 of this Code; and where indoor installation is installed outdoors, it shall be installed in an acceptable weather-proof enclosure.
15.4.2.3 Wiring methods underground
(1) Underground wiring shall be run: a) where acceptable, in rigid steel or rigid aluminium conduit; b) in non-metallic underground conduit; c) as lead-sheathed armoured cable, mineral-insulated cable, or aluminium-sheathed cable; or d) as conductors or cable assemblies acceptable for earth burial. (2) Conductors buried directly in the earth shall be of types suitable for use in wet locations .. (3) Suitable corrosion-resistant protection shall be provided for aluminIum sheathed cables and aluminium conduits, and also for mineral-insulated cable, if used where materials coming into contact with the cable may have a deteriorating effect on the sheath.
15.4.2.4 Wiring methods on poles
(1) All electrical equipment on a pole shall be controlled by a switch which can be locked in the "Off' position, and each pole shall be provided with a prominent sign warning against climbing the pole until the switch is "Off' unless all conductors and live parts other than those used for pole-top wiring are guarded against accidental contact in one of the following ways:
328
EBCS-10 1995
a) The conductors are run in rigid or flexible metal conduit, as in miner~l-insulated cable, or up the centre of steel, aluminium, ot hallow concrete poles; b) The conductors and live parts are kept at least 1.0m from the climbing ladder or climbing step. c) Barriers are provided between conductors or live parts, or both, and the climbing ladder so as to prevent a likelihood of contact by the climber. (2) Conductors running up the centre of poles shall be supported so as to prevent jnjury to the conductors inside the pole and so as to prevent undue strain on the conductor where they leave the pole. (3) Where vertical conductors, cables, and earthing conductors are within 2.5m oflocations accessible to unauthorized persons, they shall be provided with a covering which gives acceptable mechanical protection. (4) On wood poles, for earthing conductors from lightning arresters, the protective covering specified in (3) above shall be of wood moulding or other insulating material giving equivalent protection. (5) Where there is more than one branch circuits on a pole top, the feeders shall be run to a distribution panelboard which shall be either weather-proof or installed in a weatherproof enclosure.
Note:
The panelboard may be omitted where there are two branch circuits on a 230/380.0Y circuits with a common neutral lineand where there are three branch circuits on a 230/380.0Y, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits.
(6) Pole-top branch circuit wiring, exclusive of leads approved with floodlights to which they are connected, shall be run: a) as lead-sheathed cable or rubber or thermoplastic-insulated, moisture-resistant types of conductors installed in rigid conduit; or b) by special permission, as insulated or uninsulated exposed wiring provided that: i) the wiring is supported on a suitable insulator; ii) the wiring is controlled by a switch which can be locked in the "Off' position; and iii) the pole is provided with a prominent sign warning against climbing it until the switch is "Off'.
EBCS-10 1995
329
(7) There shall be no joints or splices concealed within conduit; but open taps and joints may be made in pole-top exposed wiring provided the joint or lap is given insulation equivalent to that on the conductors jointed. (8) Transformers shall comply with the following: a) If mounted on floodlight poles, all live parts shall be guarded as required by (1) above. b) If mounted on poles, the bottom of the transformer shall be at least 5.0m above locations accessible to unauthorized persons. c) If located on platforms on the ground, they shall be completely enclosed so as to prevent access by unauthorized persons or they shall be surrounded by a protecting fence. (9) Switches controlling floodlights shall comply with the following: a) A switch on the primary side of a transformer shall be capable of making and interrupting the full-load on the transformer. b) Switches controlling floodlights from the secondary side of a transformer shall have a current rating not less than 125% of the current requirements of the floodlights they control. c) Switches shall be capable of being operated either by remote operation or by proper guardingwithout exposing the operator to danger of contact with live parts. d) Switches shall be capable of being locked in the "Off' position. The secondary earthed-circuit conductor may be earthed by interconnecting to the primary earthed circuit conductor provided that:
(10)
a) the primary is earthed at the transformers, and b) interconnection is made at the transformer. Except for isolated metal parts such as cross bars, bolts, insulator pins, and the like, all non-current-carrying metal parts of the electrical equipment at the pole-top shall be bonded together and, if within reach of any earthed metal, they shall be earthed.
(11)
330
EBCS-10 1995
15.4.3
15.4.3.1
(l) Clause 15.4.3 shall apply to exposed wiring for permanent outdoor lighting other than floodlighting where the circuits are run between buildiilgs, between poles, or between buildings and poles.
15.4.3.2 C7olUiuctors
(1) Conductors shall be stranded copper, not less than 2.5m2, and shall be: a) of a type suitable for exposed wiring where exposed to the weather; b) of the rubber-insulated type suitable for exposed wiring where exposed to the weather when lampholders of a type which puncture the insulation and make contact with the conductors are used; or c) of the moisture-resistant, rubber-insulated type suitable for exposed wiring where exposed to the weather if cabled together and used with messenger cables.
15.4.3.3 15.4.3.3.1 Use of insulators Conductors attachment
(1) Conductors shall be securely attached to insulators at each end of the run if a messenger is not used and at the intermediate points of support, if there are any. 15.4~3.3.2Type of insulator (1) Insulators at the ends of runs shall be of the strain type unless the conductors are supported by messenger cables.
15.4.3.3.3 Split knobs
EBCS-10 1995
331
(1) Conductors supplying lamps in parking lots, used-car lots, drive-in establishments and similar commercial areas shall be maintained such that the conductors or the bottom of a lamp fed from the conductors, whichever is lower, shall have a clearance of not less than 4.0m above grade at any point in a run, except that where a driveway or through fare exists, this clearance shall not be less than 4.0m.
15.4.3.5 Spacing from combustible material
(1) Conductors and lampholders shall be maintained at a distance not less than 1.0m from any combustible material except for branch circuit conductors at the point of connection to buildings or poles.
15.4.3.6 Spacing of conductors
(1) Conductors shall be separated at least 300.0mm from each other by means of insulating spacers at intervals of not more than 4.5m unless the conductors are secured t9 and ' supported by messenger cables.
15.4.3.7 Lampholders
(1) Lampholders shall: a) be of weatherproof types, with moulded insulating bodies; b) be of types having either: i) permanently attached leads; or ii) terminals of a type which puncture the insulation and make contact with the conductors; c) have, when with permanently attached leads, the connection to the circuit wires staggered where a cabled assembly is used.
332
EBCS-10 1995
15.4.3.8
(1) Messenger cables: a) .shall be used to support the conductors: i) if lampholders having permanently attached leads are used, and the span exceeds 12.0m; and ii) in all cases where lampholders having termination which puncture the insulation are used; b) shall be securely attached at each end of the run and shall be earthed.
15.4.3.9 Construction of messenger cables
(1) Messenger cables shall be of galvanized steel, copper-coated steel, or stainless steel, and shall be of a stranded construction with no less than seven strands. (2) The effective ultimate strength of a messenger cable shall not be less than 3 times the calculated maximum working load and in no case shall the individual strands be less than: a) 1.168mm in diameter in the case of galvanized or copper-coated wire; or b) 1.112mm in diameter in the case of stainless steel wire.
15.4.3.10 Branch circuit loading and protection
(1) Branch circuits shall be protected by overcurrent devices rated at not more than 32.0A. (2) The total load on a branch circuit shall not exceed 80% of the rating or setting of the overcurrent devices.
EBCS-10 1995
333
ANNEX A (NORMATIVE)
LIGHTING COLUMNS
A.i
TERMS IN THE FIELD OF LIGHTING COLUMNS a support intended to hold one or more lanterns, consisting of one of more parts: a post, possibly an extension piece and, if necessary, a bracket. It does not include columns for catenary lighting. the distance between the centreline of the point of entry of the lantern and the intended ground level for a column planted in the ground, or the flange plate, for a column with a flange plate as shown in Figure A.i.
Lighting column
nominal height
334
EBCS",,101995
post-top columna
straight column without bracket to support the lantern (post-top lantern) directly. a column to support a lantern or lanterns (side-entry lanterhs) by means of one or more brackets which are integral with, or demou'ntable from, the column. a component used to support a lantern at a definite distance from the axis of the lower straight portion of a single, double or multiple form column and integral with, or demountable from, the column. horizontal distance from the point of entry to the lantern to a vertical line passing through the center of the cross section of the column at the ground level as shown in Figure A.2.
w
bracket
bracket projection
'.
Figure A.2 Bracket projection
bracket fixing
the connecting part on a column for securing a separate bracket. It may be of the same size or a different cross section from the column. the connecting part on the end of a post-top column or of a bracket for securing a lantern. It may be the end of the column or the bracket itself or an additional part having the same or a different cross section from the column or bracket.
lantern fixing
EBCS-1:0 1'995
335
lantern fixing angle door opening cable entry slot planting depth
angle between the axis of the lantern fixing and the horizontal. opening in a column for access to electrical equipment. opening in a column below ground for cable entry. the length of a column below the intended ground level as shown in Figure A.3.
J!Y'~ ,,',---,,'
base plate
plate below ground level fixed to a planted column sinking into the ground and to help prevent the column overturning as shown in Figure A.4.
Base plate
336
EBCS-10 1995 ,
flange plate
a plate with an opening for cable entry, attached rigidly to a column which is surface mounted, to allow it to be secured to a concrete foundation or other structures as shown in Figure AS.
.~.
Flange plate
Figure A.5 Flange plate A.2 A.2.t DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCE Requirements
The dimensional requirements are specified except that the connection dimensions in Clause A2.7 represent a recommended choice.
EBCS-10 1995
337
Nominal
3 10
!
i.
1
For dimensions for door openings and cable entry slots see clause A + ..--., +.
2,~
01
Z-..r
J~
W$.I 1
r'.... :'
Al.6
2.5
338
EBCS-to 1995
ETHIOPIAN BUILorNGCODE
STANDARD
w
Connection dimensions (see clause Lantern fixing angle 5 or 15
AZ.?)
'\
)
For tolerances for dimensions and shape. see clause Nomine' h helohl 6 B 18 12 15 to5
0'----0/
A ~. 8
Projection
wll
0.75 1,25 2
3
For dimensions for door
m~
Typo B1 For column
For base see clause plate A1.5 Type B2 foundation see clause Type B3
A2.5
11
EBCS-10 1995
339
.'\
---
--~
/"
//
),
~I
I
@J
I
F''Jwe. A23
Position of door4) and cable entry slot
-.,50
a a
1.01 Fl!
........ -9 -:~T II
I~
'>_,
a Ul
.-
1=lt'H~ A2.""
Dimensions of cutout
1) 2) 3) 4)
Supplementary dimensions for concrete columns. For metal columns only. It is recommended that this dimension be approximately 600mm, but in no case shall it be less than 300mm; no maximum is specified. It is recommended that the door opening is positioned parallel to the bracket on the side away from the direction of traffic.
340
EBCS-10 1995
.sians in rnillirnetres)
Nominal
-- 10 18 15 12 20
h6 haight 8 m
1700 2000 1000 600 1500 1200 1500 1000 1200 1500 1200 e1) 1800 1000 300 2500 800 Planting dapth
<5
--
--
300 400
300 400
or
x
.~
Figure
A2.5a
Figure
1) The planting depth. e, shall be selected from the values given in the table taking into consideration the calculations made before hand and the ground conditions.
EBCS-10 1995
341
A.2.6
j~
t'
, I
.~
\ /
I
) /
gure
A 7. 7 :--
II
Ii
t.J1
!tl
c:
h
300 sllc400 300 200 d,1) M18 M24 400 260 8 10 a M27 ,20
A2.B
d2
500
min. 400 ,I
r
!
M24
M18 d,l1
M27
,11
" 12 <20
<
342
EBCS-10 1995
A2.7
~l
Fiuuro
-;t
76 102 /tlO
-.---
dlJ1
A 2.',1
Figure
A2~
(2 )
}
,
42 d2J1 60
250
--
Figure
Figurll
AZ.IOb
lantorns
Sidtl entry
r
i {,!
+
-l:::
'x ..
cu(
~"I\II
. E
~\'\ \."I ~I I\
.
\
1) 2) 3)
\ !
Lt
See clause A.2.1. This design does not apply to concrete columns. Diameters of steel spigots should be as given in ISO 64-1974 "Steel tubes, outside diameters" for steel tubes of the nearest size.
EBCS-10 1995
343
SECTION
16
16.1
SCOPE
(1) This Section describes the essentials of the fire alarm systems and applies to the installation of local fire alarm systems and fire pumps.
16.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute
provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. a) BS - CP 1019:1972 ' The Installation and Servicing of Electrical Fire Marm System. ~anadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, sixteenth Edition. Danger Alarm Systems for Fire, Hold-up Intrusion, Parts 1 and 2. and
b) C22.1:1990
c) DIN 57833:1982
16.3
DEFINITIONS
(1) In addition to the terms defined in Section 1, the following definitions shall apply in this Section:
344
EBCS-10 1995
smoke
particulate
product of combustion
generated type.
by fire, whether
or open-flame
in which electric
into sound
standing
of a roof,
designed to admit light to the space below. alerting facility a facility which issues the fire alarm - e.g., by means of audible and visual signalling devices - and which is not contained in the fire alarm control and indicting panels.
a system which detects the occurrence of fire in its incipient stage and immediately signals this without human intervention.
a part of a fire alarm system which, either continually or at periodic intervals, observes a suitable physical and/or chemical identifier for detecting a fire in the monitored area.
and/or
a detector which responds to the radiation emitted by fire. physical variables which are subject to measurable changes in the environment of a fire in its incipient stage; e.g. rise in temperature, smoke, flame radiation.
forces.
the entirety of the equipment and parts, matched for correct interaction, used in a fire alarm system. a facility from which the necessary fire fighting measures can be initiated at all time.
EBCS-10 1995
345
false alarm
a fire alann signal' caused by technical malfunctions resulting from the fire detector being "mislead".
in the fire
alarm devices which can be used to initiate the fire alann signals manually.
16.4
DESIGN CONSIDERATION
(1) Fire alann systems shall be designed so that: a) the earliest possible definite warning of fire (i.e., avoiding false alann) is given to all personnel immediately concerned; b) it is capable of indicating the locality of the origin of the fire alann as to facilitate the safe evacuation of the premises and to direct fire fighters; c) it performs its function with great reliability. and
16.4.1.2
(1) The equipment, wiring and use of the fire alann system shall be exclusive to that system and its power supply shall be provided independently from those for any other equipment.
16.4.1.3
Alarm signals
(1) The audible and visual alann signals shall be used solely for the fire alann purpose, and these signals shall not reset automatically.
16.4.1.4
(1) The fire alann and associated indicating panel shall be sited where they can be undet constant observation when the premises are occupied and shall be accommodated in a room: a) in the direct vicinity of the main entrance;
346
EBCS40 1995
b) that provides adequate protection against ambient influences which could impair operations; e.g. vibration, smoke, dust, gasses, vapour, etc. produced by ma.chinery, etc; and c) that has room climate suitable for proper operation of the fire alarm control and indicating panel.
16.4.2.1
General
(1) The design of a fire alarm circuit shall provide facilities for rapid and reliable transmission of initiated signals when manual call points or detectors are operated and when specified faults occur to control and indicating equipment.
16.4.2.3
Transmission circuitry
(1) Any resultant signal shall be transmitted by the simplest possible circuitry to sounders and other indicating equipment and to any equipment which is to be operated by the fire alarm system; e,g. fire extinguishers, fire protection traps, local plant facilities, etc.
16.4.2.4
(1) Where chances of malfunction are high in a fire alarm system, discriminatory circuit shall be incorporated in the system so that false alarms are identified.
EBCS-10 1995
347
16.4.2.5
(1) Except in buildings where fire can be located without delay, the fire alarm system shall include an indication panel designed to show clearly the location of the origin of the alatm.
Note:
To meet this requirement, suitable zones should be defmed throughout the building so that all the detectors and/or manual call points in anyone zone are connected to an indicator exclusive to that zone.
16.4.3
16.4.3.1
Breaking this glass cover releases the switch to an "alarm" position and the system starts to
"1li :
16.4.3.2
(1) Manual call points shall: a) be constructed of pressed metal, cast metal, or plastic materials so that they will not be adversely affected' by the ambient temperature; b) be rigid enough in construction to withstand the abuse to which they are likely to be subjected, without deterioration or reduction in their ability to operate effectively when required to do so; c) have contacts that are capable of operating satisfactorily during the design life of the installation; d) be co loured "signal red" over at least 50% of their visible area; e) have replaceable glass cover; breaking the glass shall automatically operate the call point, and shall include description'ofthe method of operation" by a concise inscription
It is recognized that there are situations, e.g. food processing areas, where this type of call point is unacceptable and there may be no alternative to using a suitable manual call point of the toggle-switch type with safeguards against accidental operation. The method of operation in an installation should be identical unless there is special reason for variation.
348
EBCS-10 1995
including the word "FIRE" on case, or by a suitably inscribed plate behind the glass cover; and
f) incorporate means whereby satisfactory operation may be readily and individually tested;
e.g. by opening the front by means of a special key.
16.4.3.3
Stricker
(1) A striker shall be provided adjacent to the call point to facilitate breaking the glass.
16.4.3.4
Placement
(1) Manual call points shall be: a) so located that no person need travel more than 30.0m from any position within the premises in order to give fire alarm; . b) located on the exit routes and, in particular, on the floor landing of staircases and on exits to the street; and\~ c) fixed at a height of
104m
16.4.3.5
(1) Where manual call points are incorporated in an automatic fire alarm system, they shall be included in such a way that the operation qf anyone of them produces the same effects as though fire had been detected by a fire detector in the same zone.
16.4.4 16.4.4.1
(1) When selecting the type of detectors, the probable development of fire in the incipient stage, the room height, the ambient conditions and all sources of spurious alarms in the areas to be monitored shall be taken into consideration.
Note:
The task of fire detectors is to detect a fire wherever possible in its incipient stage and signal this automatically to an emergency service.
EBCS-10 1995
349
16.4.4.2
Detector types
(1) If development of a smoldeJ;ing fire is anticipated in the incipient stage of fire (intense smoke generation, very little or no flame radiation), smoke detectors shall be .used. (2) If a rapid development of the fire is anticipated as early as in the incipient stage of a fire (intense heat generation, intense flame radiation, and generation of smoke), smoke detectors, heat detectors, flame detectors, or combinations of the various types of fire detectors shall be used.
Note:
The fact is that combustion is not always accompanied by flame and the reflected radiation effect restricts the application of flame detectors.
(3) Jf smoke damage is anticipated as early as the incipient stage of a fire owing to )'oom occupancy (risk to human life, materials and goods sensitive to smoke), smoke detectors shall be used. (4) If a very rapid development of the fire is anticipated with a high degree of probability, an automatic extinguisher system shall be considered. (5) If it is not possible to predict or anticipate the development of a fire in the alarm ar~~ special investigation shall be conducted to assist in selecting the particular type of required fire alarm detectors.
16.4.5
16.4.5.1
Sitting of Detectors
Monitoring
(1) Building and installation complexes shall be monitored or covered completely and each effectively enclosed space shall be considered separately for this purpose in accordance with the limits of spacing for the types of detectors concerned.
Notes:
i)
If, for some reason a fIre alarm system is not installed throughout a building or a related series of buildings, the criterion shall be that the system will cover all of an area having physical boundaries of such a nature as to provide adequate fIre separation or all of an area surrounded by sufficient open space; e.g. roads, to provide adequate fIre separation. ii) Voids not more than 800.0mm in height need not necessarily have independent monitoring. Hi) Small lavatories and water closets need not have independent monitoring but; may rely upon that provided in a lobby common thereto.
350
EBCS-10 1995
16.4.5.2
Sectioned rooms
(1) Rooms divided into sections by walls, partitions or storage racks reaching 300.0mm of the ceiling or where goods might be stacked in defined areas to a corresponding height, shall have detectors for each section or passageway.
16.4.5.3
Flue-like openings
(1) Hoists, elevators and similar flue-like openings shall be monitored by detectors at the top.
16.4.5.4
Staircases
16.4.5.5
Lantern lights
16.4.5.6
Special monitoring
(l) Due to the requirements of the use to which any room, space, area or void is to be put or to its structural features, installation of additional detectors shall be considered.
16.4.5.7
Height consideration
(1) Generally, the inter-relationship between the suitability of the various types of fire detectors and room height indicated in Table 16.1 shall be observed.
(1) Heat sensitive point detectors shall be mounted so that their heat sensitive elements are positioned not less than 25.0mm and not more than l50.0mm below the ceiling or the underside of the roof.
EBCS-10 1995
351
R " Suitable
w-= Unsuitable
(1) The spacing limits indicated on Table 16.2 shall be observed in sitting detectors. (2) Notwithstanding the requirement in (1) above, the maximum spacing between detectors cannot apply in all directions since the area limit shall be observed, but detectors shall not be mounted closer than 500.0mm to any outside walls, separating walls or dividing partitions. Table 16.2 Spacing limits for sitting detectors
15.0 In corridors 3.5general 7.5 10.0 apart between from dlatance In corri.dors Maximum (horizontal) distance centers [m] or partitions [m] In Maximum (horizontal) walls, separating any outsidedividing walls In general
In special buildings such as churcheli, mosques, museums and castles, it may be that detectors can only be arranged at a great height unper certain circumstances. This will mean that an early fire warning cannot be guaranteed. This render the use of the fire alarm less worthwhile . Detectors are sub-divided into three response categories in line with the differing ceiling heights. Sensitive detectors (e.g. detectors of response category 1) may be used for high ceiling.
352
EBCS-tO 1995
16.4.6.3
Ceiling
(1) Where ceilings are crossed by beams, girders or other structural features having a depth of 500.0mm or more, at least one detector shall be installed in each "pocket" fonned between such features, and these detectors shall not be less than 500.0mm from any beam, guider or wall.
16.4.6.4
(1) One row of detectors shall be sited along the apex of each roof or bay; these and any further detectors needed to cover the area shall be spaced in accordance with 16.4.6.2.
16.4.6.5
Floo,' openings
(1) Detectors shall be so sited that at least one on each floor is suitably placed within 105m of hoists, elevators, stairways, well-holes, and similar openings to the floor above. 16.4.6.6
Lantern lights
(1) Detectors fitted in lantern lights shall be protected from direct sunlight; fixed-tern perature- '. type detectors shall be used in such location.
Note: Such locations are liable to rapid temperature variations due to combin/ltion of solar and internal heating and, thus, ftxed-temperatere-type detectors are recommended.
(1) If detectors have to be fitted where they will be subject to shock and/or vibration and may also experience rapid temperature changes (e.g., in covering hoist apertures), a fusible alloy fixeQ.-temperature-type shall be used.
Note: Vibration coinciding with rising, although not dangerously rising, temperature could induce false alanns from other types.
EBCS-10 1995353
16.4.8
(1) These detectors are affected by the same phenomenon as the point detectors, and the recommendations given in Clause 16.4.6 shall be complied with.
16.4.9 16.4.9.1
(1) Smoke detectors shall normally be sitted at the highest parts of the enclosed areas, and shall be mounted so that their sensing area is not less than 25.0mm or more than 600.Omm below roof ceiling, except as may be indicated by site tests.
16.4.9.2
Heat barrier
(1) The sitting of smoke detectors shall be arranged to take the effects of heat barrier.
Note: Wann air naturally collec~ under ceiling and in the apices of pitched roofs .. In some circumstances, this
wann air can form what is usually known as heat barrier to the products of combustion rising from fire which is producing little change in the ambient condition. The combustion products from such a fire will spread out below the heat barrier in the same way as they do beneath a ceiling or an apex of pitched roof.
16.4.9.3
Other factors
(1) Factors affecting the sitting, number, etc. of the smoke detectors shall be considered carefully and the necessary measures shalL be taken.
Note: Among facts which can establish temporary or permanent conditions which have their effect on the sitting of smoke detectors are various forms of overhead heating, air-cooled equipment, roof or ceiling of unusual shape, lofty buildings, staircases, canteen and restaurant, plant rooms, ambient air currents.
16.4~10
16.4.10.1 General
(1) Inside a building, at least two sounders shall be installed. (2) In case of an automatic system, an additional sounder outside the building (preferably near five brigades access) shall be installed.
354
EBCS-10 1995
16.4.10.2
(1)" Alarm sounders shall satisfy the following requinnents: a) Their type, number and location shall be such that the alarm is distinct from the background noise in every part of the premises. b) Their noise shall be quite distinct from any other sounders likely to be heard. c) Alarm sounders of the same kind on a particular installation shall produce a similar sound.
16.4.10.3
Restricted alarms
(1) Where a general alarm is undesirable (e.g. department stores, entertainment places, hospitals), the alarm system shall be restricted to the provision of sounders out of the hearing of the public or patients. (2) The sounders should be supplemented by an adequate number of visual signals throughout the premises for staff recognition only and/or by discrete special alerting facilities.
16.4.10.4
Silencing switch
(1) Silencing switches shall only be installed for transferring an alarm or fault warning to a supervisory sounders, and shall be so arranged as to put out of service the smallest practicable number of manual call points and detectors. (2) The operation of a silencing switch shall neither cancel the indications of the alarm or fault on any indicator concerned while an alarm or fault condition exists nor prevent the proper receipt of alarms or fault warnings on any circuit other than those with which the silencing switch is associated.
16.4.10.5
Two-stage ala,.",
(1) Where it is desired to distinguish between an alert and an evacuate signal, a two-stage alann shall be used in which the first type of signal indicates an alert and the second type indicates a need to evacuate the locality.
EBCS-10 1995
355
a) alarm of fire is automatically transmitted over the public addr~ss system, taking priority and over-riding every other facility and circuit conditions of the public address system; b) other signals such meal-break, start and stop work, are not at any time broadcastby the public address equipment in a manner which can be confused with a fire alarm signals; c) during alarm conditions, all microphones are automatically disconnected, except one designated a "fire microphone" which is retained in circuit so that it can be used for announcements and instructions relating to the fire; d) the power supply, cabling and wiring of the system shaH comply with the requirements of this Section.
16.5 16.5.1
16.5.1.1
CABLESANDWIRING Cables
General
(1) Cables shall have copper conductors and the cross-sectional area of the conductors shall be selected on the basis of the current consumption of the equipment used and the line length. 16.5.1.2
Insulation resistance
(1) The insulation resistance of the individual cable with respect to earth shall at least be 400.0Kohm.
356
EBCS-10 1995
-SECTION 16: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AND FIRE PUMPS 16.5.1.3 Conductors cross section
a) 1.5mm2 for individual cables pulled into raceway; b) O.8mm2 for individual cables laid into raceway; c) O.8mm2 for an integral assembly of two or more cables; d) O.5mm2 for an integral assembly of four or more cables.
16.5.1.4
Suitability
(1) Cables shall be suitable for the purpose of the type listed in Annex B of Section 4. (2) Notwithstanding the requirements in (I) above, cables smaller than 2.5mm2 installed in raceway shall be equipment-wire type.
16.5.2 16.5.2.1
(1) All conductors of a fire alarm system shall bt;~. a) installed in a Q1etal raceway of the totally enclosed type; b) incorporated in cable, having metal armQur or sheath; c) installed in rigid non-metallic conduit where embedded in at least 50.0mm of mansonary or poured concrete, or installed underground.
16.5.2.2
(1) Conductors installed in buildings of combustible construction shall be permitted to be: a) non-metallic sheathed cable; or b) fire alarm and signal cable.
EBCS-10 1995
357
16.5.2.3
Segregation
(1) The conductors shall be installed so as to be entirely exclusive to a fire alarm installation and the wiring of the alarm system shall be segregated from the wiring of any other circuits and shall not enter a fixture, raceway, box or enclosure occupied by other wiring, except as may be necessary for connection to: a) the source of supply, b) a signal, c) an ancillary device, d) a communication circuit.
16.5.2.4
(1) Fire-alarm wiring shall be spaced at least 50.0mm away from the circuits of any other service. (2) Notwithstanding the requirements in (1) above, where crossings are unavoidable, a bridgeinsulating material, at least 6.0mm thick, shall be securely fitted to
of suitable non-combustible
16.5.2.5
Highest voltage
(1) All conductors contained in the same rl},cewayor cable shall be insulated for the highest voltage in the raceway or cable.
16.5.2.7
(1) If necessary, special measures shall be taken to protect the fire-alarm networks against disruptive electrical influences (electrical interferences) resulting from lightning strike, switching on high-power loads, electrical sparks of all types and electromagnetic waves.
358
EBCS-10 1995
16.5.2.8
Connection point
(1) The number of connection points shall be as few as possible. (2) Any necessary connection point must be soldered or established using another very reliable mechanical method.
16:6
EQUIPMENT BONDING
16.7
,
(2) The power sources shall be permanently connected to the fire alarm system and it shall be ensured that failure of one power source does not result in failure of the other power source.
Notes:
i) Only batteries that are suitable for stationary operation and trickle-charging must be used. ii) Where no mains supply is available, a primary battery may be used for powt:ring fire alarm systems provided that a second similar battery in operational condition is held in reserve at all times.
EBCS-10 1995
359
16.7.3 16.7.3.1
(1) The power supply from the electrical mains shall: a) be dimensioned such that unrestricted bperation of the system and the altering facilities is guaranteed; and b) also be able to supply the trickle charge current for the battery when the system is in normal operating condition.
16.7.3.3
Fusing
(1) A fire alarm's separate circuit shall be provided with its specially marked overcurrent device
,
)
and disconnecting
legible manner as a fire alarm system; and the disconnecting means shall be co loured red and lockable in the "ON" position.
16.7.3.4
Charging facility
(1) The charging facility shall be dimensioned such that it if capable of recharging a battery, the charge state of which has dropped to the cut-off voltage, automatically to 80% of its nominal voltage within a maximum period of 24 hours.
360
EBCS-10 1995
16.7.3.5
Interruption
(1) There shall be no possibility of the fire alarm system power supply being' interrupted as a result of other plant facilities being switched off.
16.8
FIRE PUMPS
16.8.1 Conductors
(1) Conductors shall be of copper and shall have their ampacity in accordance with Section 4 and the requirements of the pump motor.
16.8.3 16.8.3.1
(1) Where fire-pump equipment is connected to a consumers' service, a separate box for the fire pump equipment shall be permitted.
16.8.3.2
Remote location
(1) A service box for the fire pump equipment shall be permitted to be located remote from other service box.
16.8.3.3
Labelling
(1) A service box for fire pump equipment shall be labelled in a conspicuous, legible, and permanent manner with the letter "FIRE PUMP".
EBCS-10 199
361
16.8.4 16.8.4.1
(1) The rating or setting of the over-current protection for feeders and branch circuits shall be permitted to be selected to carry locked-rotor current of the motor(s) plus the rated current of associated equipment on the circuit.
Note:
Where the locked-rotor current is not marked on a motor, 600% of the rated current shall be considered to be the locked-rotor current.
16.8.4.2
(1) The instantaneous short circuit characteristic shall be permitted to be selected or set at a minimum of the normal load current of the associated equipment on the circuit plus 12 times the full load current of the motor(s).
16.8.4.3
(1) The branch circuit conductors and control conductors or equ~pment of a fire pump shaU not require overload or overheating protection and shall be permitted to be protected by the motor branch-circuit over-current device(s).
16.8.4.4
362
EBCS-10 1995
ANNEX
A (INFORMATIVE)
Designations
1/1 FAP TS : : :
1 st digit
2nd digit - detector or alarm device number in the detector and alarm device group Fire alarm control and indicating panel Transmission unit for fire alarm signals
'" ~, '8' 'M on .. ~I '" VI ,"o...t-V, I~/////~ 'H1i' '8' '8' '8" ...,..... H g>---'ij' 'if
""
'"
."
l~ r:..
~.
'"
In'''"
'"
lilT "
1Il
EBCS-10 1995
363
4/1
)111
(j.il
Jl4
liS
2110
i.
Jl12
0
f, ~14 :i/lS
<'>
ll/ll
r
III ..,l~ l
Jll
f,
1I1
JIM
l/lIII,
RIO.
. Ill'
Hall
1319
,qlG
2/1
M~
IIG
1/1
1/4
III
II?
III
, ,I
, In 0 ~"IUMn. '''fI'cIt IIwll
'II
'01{1
IIIUO
Block circuit
diagram
BMZ
1/10
~
'II"
t::t
11.".101
1111"' 102 Ilu,n MMII,,,., IU4 w.lIt IMAt
___ -0
-?
)IlL)
lI.n
1"1 ~I
(1l1l.lIn
,---
Rus.
--~----:
Fiu O'~'f1ftl~.~
(FWI
uE:
Figure A.3 Installation plant of a fire alarm system with block circuit diagram
364
EBCS-10 1995
ANNEX
B (INFORMATIVE)
UIT DESIGN
Whilst there are but two basic call point control circuits, i.e. 'open circuit' and 'closed circuit', simple definition of each can be misleading because, in practice, there are employed numerous variations and combinations of each circuit.
The type of Circuit to be used should be determined by careful consideration of the functions required from the fire alarm system in the particular building concerned, taking into account simplicity, reliability, liability to damage, operational supervision, cost, environment and such other relevant factors. It is unwise to assume, in general, that one type of circuit is better thl:!n another.
Four simplified but typical, circuits are given below. Alarm and fault-sensing units may be relays, solid-state circuits or similar devices; call points may have mechanical contacts, solidstate circuits, variable-resistance devices, etc. It should be appreciated that many other circuit arrangements are possible and the following circuits should in no way be considered other than for the purpose of illustration. B.1.2
Alarm-sensing
unit
1 It
Open Circuit Call Point
0 supply
EBCS-10 1995
365
Current flows when the call point contacts are closed, causing the alarm-sensing unit to operate and initiate an alarm signal. A broken connection/conductor alarm-sensing unit. A short-circuit between conductors will cause the alarm-sensing unit to operate, producing an alarm signal. In this circuit, the alarm-sensing unit could be the alarm sounder. will prevent a call point beyond the break from operating the
B.1.3 Circuit 2 -
Closed circuit
Alarm-Sensing
Unit
supply
o
Closed circuit call point
366
EBCS-10 1995
short-circuit; thus, a call point beyond the short-circuit cannot interrupt the current and cannot, therefore, initiate an alarm signal. B.1.4
Limiting resistor .
supply
O---------l
a resistor
units to a value sufficient to hold operated the low-current (faults) sensing unit, but insufficient to operate the high-current (alarm) sensing unit. Open circuit call points are connected across the conductors. (alarm) sensing unit which initiates an alarm signal. A broken connection/conductor will interrupt the current, releasing the low-current (fault) Operation of a call point allows
the current to by~pass the resistor. The resultant increase in current operating the high-current
sensing unit- which initiates a fault signal. A short-circuit between conductors by-passes the resistor, the resultant increase in current
operates the high-current (alarm) sensing unit, which initiates an alarm signal.
EBCS-10 1995
367
B.l.S
Circuit -I -
High-current Supply
sensing ~
/ unit (fault)
-~~;;i~~~
.
Limiting resistor
,nin, r..i::::
-
'_._M__ '
The conductors are "closed circuit" connected, the open-circuit call points being wired in series, their contacts being bridged by resistors. The values of the call point resistors and of the limiting resistor are carefully chosen to ensure that the correct current flows in the circuit during the various conditions of fault and alarm. Under normal conditions, the current flowing in the circuit is sufficient to hold the low-current (fault) sensing unit operational, but is insufficient to operate either the medium- or the highcurrent alarm or fault-sensing units. Operation of a call point by-passes its call point resistor. The resultant increase in current is
sufficient to operate the medium-current alarm-sensing unit, which initiates an alarm signal, but is insufficient to operate the high-current fault-sensing unit. A broken connection/conductor will interrupt the current, releasing the low-current fault-sensing unit which initiates a fault signal. A short-circuit between conductors by-passes the limiting resistor. The resultant increase in
current is sufficient to operate both the medium-current alarm and the high-current fault-sensing units. The former's attempt to initiate an alarm signal is overridden by the latter and a fault signal is initiated. Study of the above circuits will indicate that each circuit has advantages and disadvantages. Some of these are outlined in Clause B.2.
368
EBCS-10 1995
B.2
ANTAGESOFV
ARIOUSCALLPOINT
CIRCUITS
b.2.!
a) Advantages i) ii) This is a simple and reliable circuit. No current is consumed on stand-by; therefore, a battery and charger of moderate size and cost may be used. iii) A broken connection or conductor will not result in a false alarm. b) Disadvantages i) ii) There will be no indication of a break in the circuit which may make some parts of the system inoperative. A short-circuit between conductors will produce a false alarm.
a) Advantages i) ii) This is a simple and reliable circuit. The call points are monitored.
iii) The contacts and connections are monitored. b) Disadvantages i) ii) Current is consumed on stand-by; therefore, the size and cost of the battery and charger will be increased. There will be no indication of a short-circuit between conductors which may make some parts of the system inoperative. iii) A broken connection or conductor will cause false alarm.
EBCS-10 1995
369
B.2.3
Circuit 3 Type A
a) Advantages
i) The conductors are monitored. ii) An open circuit of a connection or a conductor will produce afault signal; not a false alarm. b) Disadvantages i) ii) Current is consumed on stand-by. A short circuit between conductors will cause a false alarm.
iii) The call points are not monitored. B.2.4 Circuit 4 Type B
a) Advantages i) ii) The conductors are monitored. An open circuit of a connection or a conductor will produce a fault signal, not a false alarm.
Hi) A short-circuit between conductors will produce afault s~gnal, not a false alarm. b) Disadvantages i) ii) Current is consumed on stand-by. The selection of values of call-point resistors and limiting resistors is critical. A number of call points operated together may result in a fault signal instead of an alarm signaL iii) There is a need for introduction of additional and complex sensing equipment.
310
EBGS-10 1995
SECTION
17
17.1
SCOPE
(1) This provisions of this Section apply to the installation of signs and outline lighting wherein the source of light are: a) incandescent lamps, b) fluorescent lamps, c) high-voltage luminous discharge tubes including neon tubes, and d) high intensity discharge lamps.
Note: The word "sign", when used throughout this Section, includes those of the through-wall type.
17.2
NORMATI\%REFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. a) IEE:1970 The Institute of Electrical Engineers, Regulation for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings, Fourteenth Edition (1966), Incorporating Amendments. Canadian Electrical Code, Part Installation, Sixteenth Edition 1, Safety Standard for Electrical
b) C22,1: 1990
17.3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
17.3.1 Construction (1) All signs and outline lighting apparatus, accessories, and fittings manufactured wholly or in part in the field shall comply with the relevant requirements of:
EBCS-10 1995
371
a) this Code; and b) the applicable international standards, if any, except so far as these requirements may be modified by this Code. 17.3.2 Disconnecting Means
(1) Each outline lighting installation and each sign other than the portable type shall be provided with a disconnecting means which shall: a) open all unearthed conductors; b) be suitable for condition of installation such as exposure to weather; and c) be integral with the sign or outline lighting. 17.3.3 Rating of Disconnecting Means and Control Devices
(1) Switches, flashers, and similar devices breaking inductive loads shall be either of a type approved for the purpose or have a current rating of not less than twice the current rating of the loads. 17.3.4 Thermal Protection (1) Ballasts of the thermally-protected type shall be required for all signs and outline lighting
which employ fluorescent lamps except where the ballasts are of the simple reactance type. 17.3.5 Branch Circuit Capacity (1) Circuits shall be arranged so that the load imposed by lamps and associated gears shall not exceed 80% of the branch circuit overcurrent protection. 17.3.6 Location (1) Signs and outline lighting shall be located so that all the following requirement are met: a) Any person working thereon is not likely to come into contact with overhead conductors. b) No part of the sign or its support will interfere with normal work operations performed on electrical and communication utility lines. c) No part of the sign or its support is in such proximity to overhead conductors as to constitute a hazard.
372
EBCS-10 1995
d) Unless mechanical protection is provided to prevent persons or vehicles from coming into contact with the electrical components of the sign, no part of the sign, other than its support, shall be located within 2.2m above grade. 17.3.7 Bonding (1) All conductive non-current-carrying parts of the lighting installation shall be bonded to earth
in accordance with the requirements of Section 7 except for conductive parts of letters attached to the building and illuminated from the rear. 17.3.8 Protection of Sign Leads (1) Sign leads which pass through the walls or partitions of the sign structure shall be protected by non-combustible, moisture-absorption resisting bushings.
17.3.9 Installation of Conductors (1) Conductors for sign and outlying lighting shall be installed in accordance with the
requirement of Section 8. 17.3.10 Fuseholders and Flashers (1) Fuseholder, flashers, etc. shall be enclosed in metal and shall-be accessible without the necessity of removing obstructions or, otherwise, dismantling the sign.
17.4
(1) Enclosure for transformers, switches, timers, relays, sequencing units and other similar devices shall be of metal or of heat and moisture resistant, non-combustible material.
EBCS-10 1995
373
17.4.1.2
Construction
(1) The enclosure shall be cC'nstructed to prevent the emission of flames or any burning or ignited material.
17.4.1.3
Ventilation
(1) Openings for ventilation shall be arranged to comply with the requirement of 17.4.1.2 and shall at least be 100.0mm from live parts.
17.4.1.4
Thickness
(1) Metal enclosures shall not be less than O.8mm thick and at the point where it is intended that the supply connections be made, the enclosure shall be of not less than 1.6mm in thickness.
17.4.1.5
Marking
(1) Each enclosure housing a transformer shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of Clause 2.4.6.
of indoor signs or outline lighting shall either be provided with interlock switches which, on the opening of the doors or covers, disconnect the primary circuit or shall be fastened so that the use of other than ordinary tools will be necessary to open them.
17.4.05
17.4.3.1
(1) The rated secondary open-circuit voltage of transformers shall not exceed 15.0kV, except as in (2) below. (2) In end-earthed transformers, rated secondary open-circuit voltage shall not exceed 7.5kV.
f .
374
EBCS-10 1995
17.4.3.2 .
(I)
17.4.3.3
(I)
Transformers used outdoor shall be of the weather':'proof type or shall be enclosed in the
17.4.3.4
Installation
(1) Transformers shall be installed in such location that they are accessible and capable of being removed and replaced. (2) They shall be supported by attachment to the enclosure in which they are housed by at least two studs or bolts.
17.4.3.5
Overcurrent protection
(1) Each transformer shall be protected by an overcurrent device except that two or more transformers may be protected by one ove-current device if their combined load does not exceed 12.0A.
Conductor installation
High-voltage conductors shall be installed in: a) transformer enclosure, b) sign enclosure, c) flexible metal conduit, d) rigid conduit, or e) other acceptable type of raceways except for surface raceways.
EBCS-10 1995
375
17.4.4.2
Conductors run
(1) High-voltage conductors may be run from the ends of gas tubes to the earthed midpoint of transformers which have terminals at the midpoint.
17.4.4.3
Bends
17.4.4.4
Type of conductors
installed inside metal sign enclosures shall be of the
17.4.4.5
(1) In a metalic raceway and in a non-metallic raceway, cables not more than a total of 6.0m and 16.0m, respectively, shall be run from transformer to other parts of the sign.
17.4.4.6
Connection of conductors
(1) Connection of high-voltage conductors to neon tubing outside the building or structure shall be made by means of one of the following. a) an electrode receptacle; b) a direct connection in the neon tubing outside the building or structure wall provided that not more than 1.0m of high-voltage wiring extends beyond the end of the raceway; c) any other acceptable methods.
Note: The connection in (b) shall be electrically secure and provided with acceptable wrapping of insulating tape.
376
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION
18
18.1
dual-purpose elevators (lifts), including dumbwaiters, escalators, movmg walks, freight platform lifts, and elevating devices for the handicapped.
18.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. a) C 22.1: 1990 Canadian Electric(il Code Part I, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Sixteenth Edition. National Firr Protection Association/American Electrical Code, 1987 Edition. National
b) NFPA 70/NEC:1986
18.3
GENERAL
18.3.1 Voltage Limitation (1) The nominal voltage used for lift operating control and signalling circuits, operating equipment, driving machine motors, machine brakes, and motor generator sets shall not exceed the following: a) 380.0Y for operating control and signalling circuits and related equipment, including door operator motors. b) 750.0Y for driving motors, machine brakes, and motor-generator sets.
EBCS-10 1995
377
Exemption:
18.4
CONDUCTORS
(1) The conductors to the hoistway door interlocks from the hoistway flame-retardant and suitable for temperature of not less than 200C.
18.4.1.2
Travelling cables
(1) Travdling cables used as flexible connections between the lift car and the raceway shall be of the types of lift cables or other approved type.
18.4.1.3
Other wiring
(1) All conductors in raceways, in or on the cars of lifts and dumbwaiters, in the well-ways of escalators and moving walks, and in the machine room of lifts, escalators, and moving walks shall have flame-retardant insulation.
18.4.1.4
Insulation rating
(I) All conductors shall have an insulation voltage rating equal to at least the maximum nominal circuit voltage rating of any conductor within the enclosure, cable or raceway.
378
EBCS-10 1995
a) for lighting circuits, 1.5mm2; and b) for operating control and signalling circuits, 0.5mm2
18.5
WIRING
Conductors located in hoistway, machine rooms and escalator well-ways, except travelling
cables, shall be installe~ in rigid metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or metal wireways, except that flexible metal conduit or armoured cable shall be permitted only if not subjected to mechanical damage.
Exemption: Mineral-insulated cable or aluminium-sheathed of damage to the sheath. cable may be used if located so that there is no liability
18.5.1.2
(In cars
(l) Conductors on lift and dumbwaiter cars shall be run in rigid metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or wireways, except that: a) short runs of flexible metal conduit or armoured cable may be used where they are securely fastened in place and not exposed to oil or grease; b) hard usage flexible cord shall be permitted to be used between fixed wiring on the car and switching or sensing devices on the door or gate, and between the fixed car top inspection light and an extension light controlled by the same switch, provided it is securely fastened and so located as to not be subject to mechanical injury;
EBCS-10 1995
379
c) mineral-insulated cable. or aluminium-sheathed cable may be used if located so that there is no liability or damage to the sheath.
18.5.2 18.5.2.1
(1) In passenger lifts, at least one branch circuit shall be provided solely for the lighting and accessories on each car.
18.5.2.3
(1) The overcurrent device protecting each branch circuit shall be located in the machine room.
18.6
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS
raceways shall not exceed 40% the interior cross-sectional area of the raceway.
18.6.2 Supports
(1) Supports for cables or raceways in a hoistway or in an escalator or moving walkways shall be securely fastened to the guide rail or to hoistway well-way construction.
380
EBCS-10 1995
(2) Such travelling cable or raceway in (1) above shall be pennitted to include shielded conductors and/or one or more coaxial cable if such conductors are insulated for the maximum voltage found in cable or raceway system. Conductors shall be pennitted to be covered with suitable shielding for telephone, audio, video or higher frequency communication circuits.
18.7
TRAVELLING CABLES
18.7.1 Suspension
(1) Travelling cables shall be so suspended at the car and hoistway's ends as to reduce the strain on the individual copper conductors to a minimum and shall be supported by one of the following means: a) by its steel supporting members; b) by looping the cable around supports for unsupported lengths less than 30.0m;
EBCS-10 1995
381
c) by suspending from the supports by means that automatically tightens around the cable when tension is increased for unsupported lengths upto 60.0m.
18.7.4 Installation
(1) Travelling cable shall be permitted to be run without the use of raceway or conduit for a distance not exceeding 1.8m from the first point of support on the lift car or hoistway wall provided the conductors are grouped together and tapped or corded or in the original sheath. (2) Travelling cables shall be permitted to be continued to lift control panels and to lift car and machine room connections as fixed wiring provided they are suitably supported and protected from damage.
18.8
18.8.1 General
(1) Lifts, dumbwaiters, escalators, and moving walks shall have a single means for
disconnecting all unearthed main power supply conductors for each unit. (2) Where multiple driving machines are connected to a single lift, escalator, moving walk or pumping unit, there shall be one disconnecting means to disconnect the motor(s) and control devices.
382
EBCS-10 1995
(3) Where there is more than one driving machine in a machine room, disconnecting means shall be number-marked control. to correspond to the number-mark of the driving machine which they
18.8.2 Type
(1) The disconnecting means shall be an enclosed, externally operable, fused motor circuit
switch or circuit breaker to be locked in the open position. (2) No provision shall be made to close the disconnecting means in (1) above from any other part of the premises; nor shall circuit breakers be opened automatically by a fire alarm system.
18.8.3 Location
(1) Disconnecting means shall be located where they are readily accessible to qualified persons.
18.8.4
Phase Protection
18.9
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
EBCS-10 1995
383
18.9.2 18.9,2,1
(1) Duty on lift and dumbwaiter driving-machine motors and driving motors of motor-generators used with generator field control shall be classed as non-continuous. Such motors shall be protected against overcurrent in accordance with applicable Clauses of Section 11.
18.9,2.2
Continuous duty
Such
(1) Duty on escalators and moving-walk driving motors shall be classed as continuous. motors shall be protected Section 11. against overcurrent in accordance with applicable
Clauses of
(1) Lifts, dumbwaiters, escalators, and moving walk driving machines, motor-generator sets, motor controllers, and disconnecting means shall be installed in a room or enclosure set aside for that purpose. (2) The room or the enclosure in (1) above shall be secured against unauthorized access.
18.10.2
(1) Sufficient clear working space shall be provided around control panels and disconnecting means to provide safe and convenient access to all live parts of the equipment necessary for maintenance and adjustment.
(1) Metal raceways attached to lift cars shall be bonded to earthed metal parts of the car with which they come into contact.
384
EBCS-10 1995
18.11.2
Electric Lifts
(1) For electric lifts, the frames of all motors, lift machines, controllers, and the metal enclosures of all electric devices in or on the car or in the hoistway shall be earthed in accordance with Section 7.
18.11.3
Non-Electric Lifts
(1) For lifts other than electric and having any electric conductors attached to the car, the metal frame of the car, where normally accessible to persons, shall be earthed in accordance with Section 7.
18.11.4
Method of Bonding
18.11.4.1 Equipment
(1) Equipment mounted on members of an earthed structural metal frame of a building shall be deemed to be bonded to earth.
(1) Under overhauling load conditions, a means shall be provided on the load side of each lift power disconnecting means to prevent the lift from attaining a speed equal to the governor tripping speed or a speed in excess of .125% of the lift rated speed, whichever is smaller. (2) Overhauling load conditions shall include all loads upto rated lift loads for goods lifts and all loads upto 125% for the rated lift loads for passenger lifts.
EBCS-10 1995
385
____
~~~~~~~===~~~~========J.4
l
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS 18.12.2 Motor-Generator Overspeed Device
(1) Motor generators driven by direct current motors and used to supply direct current for the operation of lift machine motors shall be provided with speed-limiting devices that will prevent the lift from attaining, at any time, a speed of more than 125% of its rated speed.
18.13 18.13.1
(1) A lift shall be permitted to operate from an emergency power supply in the event of normal supply failure, provided the lift operates on such emergency power in accordance with the emergency power system requirements of a recognized international safety code for lifts.
18.13.2
Disconnection
(1) The disconnecting means shall disconnect the emergency power service from the normal power service.
18.13.3
(1) In the case of hydraulic lifts where emergency power is supplied from a second source for lowering the car only, the disconnecting means shall be provided with an auxiliary contact that is positively opened mechanically, the opening not being solely dependent on springs, and connected in the control circuit to prevent movement of the car when the disconnecting means is open.
18.14
MACHINE ROOMS AND HOISTWAY PITS LIGHTING AND AUXILIARY SYSTEMS Machine Room
18.14.1
18.14.1.1 Lighting
(1) Permanent provision of adequate artificial light shall be made in machine rooms of power lifts.
386
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION
18:
LIFTS, ESCALATORS
AND'SIMILAR
EQUIPMENT
at floor level.
18.14.2
Hoist Pits
18.14.2.1 Luminaire
(I) -OneQf mote p.ennaAent luminaire equipped with a guar.d of metal, safety glass or suitable plastic matedal shaH tbeprovided in aU pits. t8.14.2.2
Illumination level
lOO.O/x
The luminaires shall provide an illuminations level of at least 18.14.2.3 Lighting switch
(I)
EIHUOPIAN
EBCS-10
1995387
\SECTION
19
THEATRE INSTALLATION
19.1
SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to electrical equipment and their installations in buildings or parts' of a building designed, intended, or used for drama, opera, motion picture, or other shows.
19.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) The following reference contains provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of ,the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. a) C22.1: 1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard Installation, Sixteenth Edition. for Electrical
19.3
WIRING METHOD
(1) Wiring in stage and stage wing areas, orchestra pits, and projection booths shall be in rigid metal conduit, armoured cable, lead-sheathed armoured cable, or aluminium-sheathed cable except that: a) other wiring methods shall be permitted for temporary work,and b) flexible cord or cable shall be permitted in accordance with other Clauses in this Section. (2) Surface raceways shall not be used on the stage side of the proscenium wall. (3) Wiring in areas other than those listed in (1) above shall be in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate Sections of this Code. (4) Circuits for aisle lights located under seats may supply 30 outlets provided that the size of lamp which can, be used with each outlet is limited by barriers or the equivalent to 25.0W or less.
388
EBCS-10 1995
19.4
(1) Stage switchboard shall be: a) of the dead-front type, and b) protected above with a suitable metal guard or hood extending the full length of the board and completely covering the space between the wall and the board to protect the latter from falling objects. (2) Where a stage switchboard has exposed live parts on the back of the board, it shall be enclosed by the walls of the building, by wire mesh grills, or by other acceptable methods. (3) The entrance to the enclosures shall have a self-closing door. (4) Switches shall be of the enclosed type and externally operated. (5) Pilot lamp on switchboard shall be: (a) (b) (c) installed within every switchboard enclosure, connected to the circuit supplying the 'switchboard so that the opening of the master switch does not cut off the supply to the lamp, and on an independent circuit protected by an overcurrent device rated or set at not more than 15.0A.
19.4.1 Fuses
(1) Fuses on switchboards shall be: a) of either the plug or cartridge type, and b) provided with enclosures in addition to the switchboard enclosure.
EBCS-10 1995
389
ELECTl1lCALINSfALtAflON
,~, , '_'_~"" __"'_<" .. "._ .. _. H
__ ."._,
OF BUILDINGS
_. om. ~_. _
19.4.3 Dimmers
(1) Dimmers shall be connected so as to' be dead when their respective circuit switches are open. (2) Dimmers which do Mt open the circuit may be connected in earthed neutral conductor. (3) The tenninals of dimmers shall be enclosed. (4) Dimmer faceplates shall be llf1'anged so thllta~cidental contact cannot readily be made with the faceplate ContactS.
Gallery Pockets
(1) Stage and galiery pockets shall be ~ontrolled from the switchboard. 19.4.5 Conductors
(1)
wired witheonductotshaving insulatio'nsuhable for the temperature generated therein; put in no case shaH the design temperature be less than f2sot. (2) Th'e conductors in (1) above shall have anampadty overcurtent device to which they are connected. (3) Holes in the metal enclosure through which conductors pass shaH be bushed. (4) The strands of the conductor shall be soldered together hefore they are fastened under!a clamp or binding screw. (5) Where a conductor
of
lO.Omm? or
'Of
etHloP1AN
19.5
ON STAGE
19.5.1 Construction
Switc"bo~rds
(1) portable switchboards shall be pla~ed within ~nclosure of substanti!ll construction; but they may be arranged so that the enclosure is open during operation. (2) Then~ shall be no live parts exposed wit.hin the, enclosure. ~x.cept thos~.on.dimmer faqeplates. 19.5.2 Supply for Portable SwjtcbbOjlrd
(1) Portable switchboards shall be supplied by means of flexible cord elf cable. of e.xtra"bard usage type tenninating fused master switch. within the switchboard enclps\lre in an e~terncllly operated, en~loseQ~
(2) The master switch in (1) llbove shall be arrMged so as tel cyt off qurr~l1t from all apparatus. within the enclos\lre except the pilot light. (3) The flexible cord or cable shall have sufficient ~apcity the switchboard. to carry the total load, CijITent of
(4) The ampere-rating of the fuses of the m!lster switch shall not be greater than tile tQtlllloaQ current of the swltehboCU'd.
19.6
19.6.1 FoptHght$ (1) Where footlights are wired in rigid metal conduit or electrical me.taJli9 tubing, every lampholder shall b~ instllUed in an indivig)Jal outlet box. (2) Where footlights are not wired in rigid metal conduit or electrical met/dUe tubing, the wiring shall be installed in a metlll trough. 19.6.2 Metalwork (1) The metalwork for footlights, borders, pro!!ceniu!ll sidelights, and strips shall not be les'" than Q.8mm thick.
EBC$-1 0
199~
391
(2) The metalwork for bunches and portable strips shall be not less than O.5mm thick.
be constructed with double walls and with adequate ventilation between the walls.
392
EBCS-10 1995
19.6.12
(1) Where the wiring to arc pockets is in rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing, the, end of the conduit or tubing shall be exposed at a point approximately 300.0mm away from the pocket, and the wiring shall be continued in flexible metal conduit in the form of a loop at least 600.0mm long, with sufficient slack to permit the raising or lowering of the box.
19.6.13
(1) Socket outlets intended for the connection of arc lamps shall: a) have an ampere rating not less than 40.0A, and b) be supplied by copper conductors not smaller than 16.0mm2
EBCS-10 1995
393
(2) Socket outlets intended for the connection of incandescent lamps shall: a) have an ampere rating not less than 16.0A, and b) be supplied by conductors not smaller than 4.0mm2 copper or 6.0mm2 aluminium. (3) Plugs for arc and incandescent socket outlets shall not be interchangeable.
19.6.14
Curtain Motors
19.6.15
(1) Where stage flue dampers are released by an electrical device, the circuit operating the device shall, in normal operation, be closed. (2) The circuit shall be controlled by at least two single-pole switches enclosed in metal boxes with self-closing doors without locks or latches. (3) One switch shall be placed at the electrician's station and the other at a suitable place. (4) The device shall be: a) designed for the full voltage of the circuit to which it is connected, or resistance being inserted; b) located in the loft above the scenery; and c) enclosed in a suitable metal box with a tight self-closing door.
19.7
394
EBCS-10 1995
(3) The stems of the fixtures shall be carried through to the back of the scenery and shall have a suitable bushing on the end thereof.
EBCS-10 1995
395
SECTION
20
20.1
SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to: a) the installation, operation and maintenance of emergency system and unit equipment intended to supply illumination and to emergency systems intended to ~upply power, where required by the authority having jurisdiction, and b) thewiring of exit signs.
20.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCE
(1) The following reference contains provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings. a) C22.1: 1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard Installations, Sixteenth Edition. for Electrical
20.3
GENERAL
20.3.1 Capacity
(1) Emergency systems and unit equipment shall have adequate capacity and rating to ensure the satisfactory operation of all connected equipment when the general power supply fails.
396
EBCS-10 1995
20.3.2 Instruction
(1) Complete instructions for the operation and maintenance of the emergency system or unit equipment which shall also specify testing at least once every month td ensure security of operation, shall be posted on the premises in a frame under glass.
20.3.4 Lamps
(1) Emergency lights shall be so arranged that the failure of one lamp will not leave the area normally illuminated by it in total darkness.
20.3.5 Circuits
(1) No appliance or lamp, other than those req~ired for emergency purposes, shall be supplied by the emergency circuits.
20.3.6 20.3.6.1
(1) The method of wiring, including that between unit equipment and remote lamps, shall be in accordance with the provisions of Section 8.
20.3.6.2
Segregation
(1) The wiring shall be kept entirely independent of all other wiring and equipment and shall not enter a fixture, raceway, box, or cabinet occupied by other wiring except, where necessary: a) in transfer switch, and b) in emergency lighting fixtures supplied from two sources.
EBCS-10 1995
397
20.4
EMERGENCY SYSTEMS
20.4.1 Supply
(1) The emergency supply shall be a standby supply consisting of: a) a storage battery of the rechargeable type having sufficient capacity to supply and maintain the total load of the emergency circuits at not less than 91% of the full voltage for the time period required by the authority having jurisdiction, but in no case less than Y2hr, and be equipped with a charging means to maintain the battery in a charged condition automatically.
Note:
Automobile batteries and lead batteries not of the enclosed glass-jar type are not considered suitable.
b) a generator driven by a dependable prime mover and it shall be: i) of capacity sufficient to carry the load, and ii) ~rranged to start automatically without failure and without undue delay upon the failure of the current supply of the principal equipment of the building. iO.4.2 Control (1) The current supply for emergency systems shall be controlled by an automatic transfer switch which energizes the emergency system upon failure of the normal current supply and is accessible only to authorized persons.
20.4.4 20.4.4.1
(1) Every emergency system shall be equipped with audible and visual trouble signal devices which give warning of derangement of the current source or sources and which indicate when the emergency load is supplied from batteries or generators.
398
EBCS10 1995
20.4.4.2 Wiring
(1) Audible trouble signals may be wired so that: a) they can be silenced, but a red-warning or trouble light shall continue to provide the protective function, and b) when the system is restored to normal, the audible signal wiU: i) sound, thus indicating the necessity of restoring the s.ilencing switch to its normal position, or ii) reset automatically so as to sound for any subsequent operation 'of the emergency system.
20.4.4.3 Voltagedrop
(1) The voltage drop in the wiring feeding lamps mounted remote from the 'currenfsupply shaH not exceed 5% of the applied voltage.
20.S
UNIT EQUIPMENT
20.S.1Mounting
(1) Each unit equipment shall be mounted with the bottom of enclosure not'less above the floor wherever practicable.
Note: Unit equipment for 'emergency lighting i) is defined ,as an -item of equipment that:
than 2.0m
is intended to provide automatically , in response to ,afailure of a power supply 'to which it is connected, 'specified ,light output and a specified amount of power for illumination purposes, for a specified period of time, but in any case not :Iess than 30.0min;
ii) comptises,in
'a unit construction, a storage battery , 'charging means to maintain the battery in a charged lamps, ot output terminals to which specifically listed lamps may be connected, conditions of the
condition automatically,
means to energize the lamps when the normal power supply fails and to de-energize the lamps when the normal power supply is reStored, and means to indicate and test the operating equipment.
ETHIOPIAN BUilDING
CODE STANDARD
iEBCS..:10
1'995
399
20.5.2 20.5.2.1
(1) Outlet point to which unit equipment is to be connected shall be not more than 1.5m.from the location of the unit equipment.
20.5.2.2
Connection to supply
(1) Unit equipment shall be permanently connected to the supply if: a) the voltage rating exceeds 230.0V, or b) the marked input rating exceeds 24.0A. (2) Where the above ratings are not exceeded, the unit equipment may be connected using the flexible cord and attachment plug supplied with the equipment.
20.5.2.3
Installation
(1) Unit equipment shall be installed in such a manner that it will be automatically acthlated upon the failure of the power supply to the normal lighting in the area covered by that unit equipment.
20.5.2.4
Feeding
(1) Unit equipment shall be fed, where practicable, from the same panel board, and may be fed from the same branch circuit which feeds the normal lighting in the area covered by that unit equipment.
20.5.2.5
Voltage drop
(1) The circuit conductors to lamps mounted remote from supply source shall be of such size that the voltage drop does not exceed 5% of the marked output voltage of the unit equipment.
20.5.2.6
Excess load
(1) The number of lamps connected to single equipment shall not result in a load that is in excess of the watt output rating marked on the equipment for the required emergency period.
400
EBCS-10 1995
20.6
EXIT SIGNS
20.6.1 Power Supply (1) The power supply for exit signs shall be provided from: a) a separate circuit or circuits used for no other purpose, or b) the circuit supplying exit lighting 20.6.2 Wiring (1) Exit signs shall be wired in accordance with the provisions of Section 8 of this Code.
EBCS-10 1995
401
SECfION
21
21J.
SCOPE
(1) This Section sets provisions and installation requirements that apply to motion-picture studios, projection rooms, exchanges, factories and any building in which motion-picture films, pyroxylin plastic and nitrocellulose x-ray and photographic films are manufactured, projected, developed, printed, rewound, repaired or stored. 21.2 NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) The following r,eferencescontain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions ,ofthe Ethiopian Building Code Standard conElectrical Installat,ionof Buildings: a) C22.1.:199(:) Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Sixteenth Edition. National Fire Pwtection Association / American National Electrical Code, 1987 Edition
b) NFPA70/NEC:1986
21.3
GENERAL
(1) The wiring method, unless specifiedofherwise in subclauseof'this Section, shall be rigid conduit, steel electrical metallic tubing, or mineral-insulated cable. (2) The wiring for stage-set lighting, stage. ,effects, electric equipment used as stage properties, ,and other wiring not fixed as to location, shall 'be done with approved flexible cords and cables.
,402
EBCS-1G 1995
in a motion-picture
set on a
studio stage or similar location, the lamp holders shall be: a) unswitched, b) of composition c) provided 21.4 or metal sheathed procelain, and with a guard hook and handle.
(1) All lighting fixtures, except lamps forming an integral part of table equipment, of the totally-enclosed gasketted type. 21.5 FILM VAULTS AND STORAGE ROOMS in Film Vaults and Storage. Rooms
21.5.1 Equipment
(1) In rooms used for storage of pyroxylin plastic, no socket outlet or attachment shall be installed.
plugs
21.5.2 Wiring Method in Film Vaults (1) The wiring method in film-vault shall be rigid-conduit with threaded joints at couplings boxes and fittings. or mineral-insulated cable only,
(2) Conduit or cable shall not run directly from vault to vault, but only form the switch to the lighting fixture within the vault. (3) Conduit approved shall be sealed off near the switch enclosure with a fitting and compound
(l)
EBCS-10 1995
403
~-L
(2) The fixtures in (1) above shall be located as close as practicable to the ceiling to avoid their being damaged through handling of film containers.
21.5.4 Film Vault Circuits
(1) Fixtures shall be controlled by a double pole switch located outside the film vault. (2) A red pilot light shall be provided to indicate when the switch is closed and shall be located outside the film vault. (3) Wiring shall be arranged so that, when the switch is off, all conductors within the film vault will be dead.
21.6 MOTION PICTURE PROJECTION ROOMS
(1) Incandescent lamps in projection rooms or booths shall be provided with a lamp guard unless otherwise protected by noncombustible shades or other enclosures.
21.6.2 Arc Lamp Current Supply
(1) Motor generator sets, frequency changers, transformers, rectifiers, rheostats, and similar equipment for the supply or control of current to arc lamps or projectors shall be located in a room separate from the projection room.
21.6.3 Ventilation
(1) Exhaust ventilation fans for the projection room shall be controlled from inside the projection room.
21.7 MOTORS AND GENERATORS
(1) Motors and generators having brushes or sliding contacts, other than those used on studio stages or those installed in accordance with Clause 21.6.2, shall be of approved dusttight or enclosed types.
404
EBCS-10 1995
SECfION
22
22.1
SCOPE
of x-ray and other diagnostic
imaging equipment operating at any frequency. However, it does not specify safeguards against direct, stray, or secondary radiation emitted by the equipment.
22.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings: a) C22.1:1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Sixteenth Edition. National Fire Protection Association! American Electrical Code, 1987 Edition. National
b) NFPA70/NEC:1986
22.3
DEFINITIONS
(1) For the purpose of this Section, in addition to the terms defined in Section 1, the following definitions shall apply when referring to x-ray or computerized tomography equipment,
a rating that is applicable for an operating period of5.0min or more. a rating that is applicable for an operating period of not more than 20.0s.
EBCS-10 1995
405
22.4
mGH-VOLTAGE
GUARDING
(1) High-voltage parts shall be mounted within metal enclosures that are bonded to eaith except when installed in separate rooms or enclosures where a suitable switch shall be: a) provided to control the circuit supplying diagnostic imaging equipment, and b) arranged so that it will be in an open position except when the door of the room or enclosure is locked. (2) High voltage parts of diagnostic imaging equipment shall be insulated from the enclosure. (3) Conductors in the high voltage circuits shall be of the shock-proof type. (4) A milliammetre, if provided, shall be: a) connected, if practicable, in the lead that is bonded to earth;' or b) guarded if connected in the high voltage lead.
22.5
(1) Permanently
source by means of a wiring method meeting the general requirements of this Code except that equipment properly supplied by a bran~h circuit rated at not over 30.0A shall be permitted to be supplied through a suitable attachment plug and hard-service cable or cord. (2) Mobile diagnostic imaging equipment of any capacity may be connected to its power source by ,suitable temporary connections and hard-usage cable or cord.
22.6
DISCONNECTING MEANS
. (1) A disconnecting means of adequate capacity for at least 50% of the input required for the momentary rating or 100% of the input required for the long-time rating of x-ray or computerized tomography equipment, whichever is greater, shall be provided in the supply
406
EBCS-10 1995
22.7
(1) Capacitors fonning part of a diagnostic imaging equipment shall be provided with an automatic means for discharging and grounding 11leplates whenever the transformer primary is disconnected from the source of supply unless all current-carrying parts of the capacitors and of the. conductors connected therewith are: a) at least 2.5m from the floor and .are inaccessible to unauthorized persons, or b) within metal enclosures that are bonded to earth or within enclosures of insulating material if within 2.5m of the floor.
22.8
CONTROL
(1) For stationary equipment, the low-voltage circuit of the step-up transfonner shall contain an overcurrent device which: a) has no exposed live parts, b) protects the radiographic circuit against fault conditions under all operating conditions, and c) is installed as part of the equipment or adjacent thereto. (2) Where as in (I) above, the design of the step-up transfonner is such that branch fuses
having a current rating lower than that of the overcurrent device are required for adequate protection for fluoroscopic and therapeutic circuits, they shall be added for the protection of these circuits. (3) For portable equipment, the requirements of (I) and (2) above shall apply; but, the
overcurrent device shall be located in or on the equipment except that no current-limiting device is required when the high-voltage parts are within a single metal enclosure that is provided with a means for bonding to earth. (4) Where more than one piece of equipment is operated' from the same high-voltage circuit, each piece or group of equipment, as a unit, shall be provided with a high-voltage switch or equivalent disconnecting means.
EBCS-10 1995
407
22.9
AMPACITY OF PROTECTION
SUPPLY CONDUcrORS
AND RATING
OF
OVERCURRENT
(1) The ampacity of supply conductors and the rating of overcurrent protection devices shall not be less than: a) the long-time current rating of x-ray or computerized tomography equipment, or b) 50% of the maximum momentary current rating required by x-ray or computerized tomography equipment on a radiographic setting. (2) Theampacity of conductors and the rating of overcurrent protection devices for two or more
branch circuits supplying x~ray or computerized tomography units shall not be less than: a) the sum of the long-time current rating of all x-ray or computerized tomography units which are intended to be operated at anyone time, or b) the sum of
SO%
tomography equipment on a radiographic setting for the two largest units plus 20% of the maximum current rating of the other units.
22.10 .BONDING
(1) N on-current-carrying parts of tube stands, tables and other apparatus shall be bonded to
earth in accordance with the requirements of Part I" Section 7 of this Code.
408
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION
23
23.1
SCOPE
systems including
(1) This Section applies to the installation of electrical communication infonnation processing systems.
23.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCE
(1) The following reference corttains provisions which, through reference In this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings: a) C221: 1990 Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical
Installations, Sixteenth:'Edition.
23.3
GENERAL
.
23.3.1 Circuits in Communication Cables
(i) Radio and television circuits, remote control circuits, fire alarm circuits, or parts thereof
shall be: a) pennitted to use conductors in a cable assembly of communication building entrance having other conductors used as communication circuits, b) deemed to be communication cir.cuits within the portions of circuits that use conductors within the communication building entrance cable assembly, and c) suitably protected at the point of interface connection with the communication conductors. cable
EBCS-10 1995
409
23.4
INSIDE CONDUCTORS
23.4.1, Conductors Arrangement (1), Conductors shall be neatly arranged and'secured in place in a'convenient and workmanlike manner.
(2) Raceways for communication circuitsihall Section 7. be installed in accordance with the requirements
of Section 10 and, in case of metal, they shall be earthed in accordance with the provisions' of
23.4.2 Insulation
(1) Wire and cable used for communication system in a building shall be of the approved types as specified in Annex B, Section 4 of this Standard.
410
EBCS-10 1995
operating
at 380.0V or less, and shall be separated at least 600.0mm. from any insulated
conductor or an electric light or power system operating at more than 380.0V unless: a) one system is in earthed metal raceways, metal sheathed cable, or earthed armoured cable, 'b) the Class 1 circuit or electric light or power system operating at 380.0V or less utilizes a nonmetallic sheathed cable or hard~llsage or extra-hard-usage flexible cord, or c) both systems are permanently separated by a continuous, firmly fixed non-meta! raceway in addition to the insulation of the conductors. (2) Where the light or power conductors are bare, all communication conductors in the same room or space shall be enclosed in an earthed metal raceway and no opening, such as an outlet box, may be located within 2.0m of bare conductors of up to and including 15.0kV oLwithin 3.0m of bare conductors above 15.0kV.
(3) The conductors of an electrical communication system shall not be placed in any outlet box, junction box, raceway, or similar fitting or compartment which contains conductors of electric light or power systems or of Class I circuits (as defined in Section 10) unless: a) the communication conductors are separated from the other conductors by an acceptable partition, or b) the power or Class 1 conductors are placed solely for the purpose of supplying power to the communication system, or for connection to remote control equipment. (4) The conductors of an electrical communication system in a building shall not be placed in a shaft with the conductors of an electric light or power system unless: a) the conductors of all systems are insulated and are separated by at least 50.0mm, or b) the conductors of either system are encased in noncombustible tubing.
TANDARD
EBCS-10 1995
411
(3) Pullboxes required for communication interconnection shall be located outside the hoistway.
23.4.10
(1) Where the ends of cables or conductors are not terminated on a device, they shall be capped or taped.
412
EBCS-10 1995
23.4.11
23.4.11.1 General
(1) The provisions of Clause 23.4.11 apply to the installation of communication flat-cable-type (CFC) systems which, together with the connecting devices, shall be approved or acceptable for the purpose.
from the transition point ~all not exceed IS.0m; c) on hard, smooth, continuous floor surface made of concrete if sealed, ceramic or composition flooring, wood, or similar material; d) in dry or interior damp locations; e) on floors heated in excess of 30C only, if approved and identified for that purpose.
EBCS-10 1995
413
23.4.11.5 Coverings
(1) Type CFC system wiring shall be permitted to cross over or under each other, and over or under power supply system wiring provided there is a layer of earthed metal shielding between the CFC and the power supply syste~ cables.
23.5
EQUIPMENT
and shall be located so that no part may be reached or used from the bath or from the shower enclosure; however, it shall be permitted to be actuated by means of a cord with an insulating link. . (2) Communication jacks shall not be located in a bathroom.
spaces which are used to transport air nor in suspended ceiling areas except where a duct, plenum, or hollow space is created by a suspended ceiling having lay-in panels or tiles; connecting blocks which are a non-protective type may be installed provided they are placed in an accessible enclosure.
414
EBCS-10 1995
------ ---
---
---
--- ---
-----------
----,,----------------------------
suitable room separate from electrical light or power installations, except where necessary to place them in a joint-use room in which case a minimum separation of 900.0mm from electrical equipment requiring adjustment and maintenance shall be provided and maintained.
via local earth or other circuitry which similarly could present a fire hazard, shall be provided device installed in or adjacent to the equipment of a type recommended by the equipment manufacturer as suitable for the application, which will limit the current under normal operating conditions and under fault conditions, to prevent fire hazards.
23.6
OUTSIDE CONDUCTORS
EBCS-10 1995
415
communication
23.7
UNDERGROUND CIRCUITS
b) maintain a minimum horizontal separation of300.0mm from other underground system"s, except when installed in accordance with (g) below; c) not be less than 600.0mm deep, unless rock bottom is encountered at a shallower depth in which case a minimum depth of 450.0mm shall be permitted, except that for service wire under parkways and lawns, the depth may be reduced to 450.0mm; d) be placed with a layer of sand 75.0mm deep, both above and below the cable, if in rocky or stony ground; e) not be less than 900.0mm deep under an area which is subject to vehicular traffic, except that the depth may be reduced to 600.0mm when mechanical protection is provided, which shall consist of: i) treated plank at least 38.0mm thick or other acceptable material which shall be placed over the conductor or cable after first backfilling with 75.0mm of sand or earth containing no rocks or stones, or ii) a conduit suitable for earth burial placed to facilitate cable replacement minimize traffic vibration damage; and to
416
EBCS-10 1995
f) not be placed in a common trench involving random separation with power supply cables
or wires operating at over 750.0Y; and g) have a metal sheath when placed in a common trench involving random separation with power supply cables or wiring operating at 750.0Y or less, in which case the communication conductor or cable assembly shall not cross under the supply cable~,.
assembly shall not be placed in the same manhole used for electric power system; d) the cables shall not be placed in the same raceway containing electric lighting or power supply cables; and e) the cable sheath shall be suitable for wet locations.
23.8
EARTHING
EBCS-10 1995
417
418
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 23:
EBCS-10 1995
419
SECTION
24
24.1. SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to the installation of: a) community antenna assembly, b) head station (amplifier and other power sources), and c) distribution network (conductors, branching boxes and antenna or feeder outlets),
24.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings: a) C22.1:1990 Canadian electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard for Electrical Installations, Sixteenth Edition.
b) lEC 597
Aerials for the Reception of Sound and Television Broadcasting in the Frequency Range 30.0MHZ to 1.0GHZ:
i) ii)
Electrical and mechanical characteristics. Methods of measurement of electrical performance parameters. Methods of measurement of mechanical properties, vibration and environmental tests. Guide for the preparation of aerial performance specification, detailed specification sheet format.
420
EBCS~10 1995
-.-
c) IEC 728:1982
Cabled Distribution
System Primarily
Intended
24.3
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
24.3.1 Mechanical
(1) A community antenna shall comply with' all mechanical properties or requirements outlined in the IEC 597 and IEC 728.
24.3.2 Electrical
(1) A community antenna shall: a) be desi.gned for the reception of signals within the permitted bandwidth for sound and television broadcasting; b) be immune to extraneous signal interference; and c) comply with all ether necessary electrical parameters that are required for the satisfactory operation of the system (see IEC 597 and IEC 728).
24.4
EQUIPMENT
ETHIOPIAN BUilDING
CODE STANDARD
EBCS-10 1995
421
(4) Where a cabinet containing an amplifier or other power device is mounted accessible to the public, it shall be provided with a lock or similar closing device. 24.4.2 EXDosed Equipment and Terminations (1) Exposed community antenna distribution equipment and/or associated terminations shall be located in a suitable room or similar area, separate from electrical light or power installations, except where necessary to place them in a joint-use room in which case a minimum separation of 900.0mm from electrical equipment requiring adjustment and maintenance shall be provided and maintained. 24.4.3 Equipment Earthing (1) Non-powered equipment and enclosures or equipment powered exclusively by the coaxial cable shall be considered earthed when they are effectively connected to the earthed outer conductive coaxial cable shield. 24.5 COMMUNITY ANTENNA DISTRIBUTION NETWORK
24.5.1 Conductor (1) The conductors used in the distribution network shall consist of coaxial cable having inner conductor and an outer conductive shield of circular cross-section . (2) Conductors placed within buildings shall be of the approved types as specified in Annex B, Section 4, of this Code. (3) Conductors placed outside of buildings shall be of the types that are acceptable for the application. 24.5.2 Voltage Limitation
(1) The coaxial cable shall be permitted to deliver low energy power to equipment directly associated with the community antenna distribution circuits if the voltage is not over 60.0V and if the current supply is from an approved amplifier, transformer, or other device having energy limiting characteristics.
422
EBCS-10 1995
--
24.5.4 Supports
(1) Where conductors are attached to or supported on buildings, the attachment or supporting fixtures shall be acceptable for the purpose.
EBCS-10 1995
423
(5) Where two or more coaxial cables, which have outer conductive shields differing in size and ampacity, join at a common connection to the earthing conductor, the ampacity of the earthing conductor shall be equal to or exceed the ampacity of the largest coaxial outer conductive shield. (6) The earthing conductor shall be run from the coaxial cable shield to the earthing electrode in as straight a line as possible. (7) The earthing conductor shall be protected in situations where it is or can be exposed to mechanical damage. 24.5.7 Earthing Electrode (1) Earthing electrodes shall conform to the requirements of relevant Clauses of Section 7. (2) Where artificial earthing electrodes are installed, they shall be in accordance with applicable Clauses of Section 7 except that the minimum driven length of the rod electrode shall be 2.0m. (3) Artificial earthing electrodes for community antenna distribution shall be spaced and bonded with other electrodes in accordance with relevant Clause of Section 7. 24.5.8 Earthing Electrode Connection (1) The earthing conductor shall be attached to an earthing electrode by means of.an approved earth clamp except, in the case of an earth rod, a wire lead may be permanently connected to the rod and the wire lead connected to the earthing conductor by means of pressure connector or other acceptable means. (2) Where an earth clamp is used, the earthing conductor shall be acceptably connected to the clamp in an effective manner. 24.6 CONDUCTORS WITHIN BUILDINGS
24.6.1 Separation from Other Conductors (1) Conductors of community antenna distribution circuits shall be separated at least 50.0mm from insulated conductors of electric lighting, power, or Class 1 circuits operating at 380.0V or less, and shall be separated at least 600.0mm from any insulated conductor of an electric
424
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 24:
COMMUNITY
ANTENNA
INSTALLATION
lighting, power, or Class 1 circuit operating at more than 380.0V unless effective separation is afforded by use of: a) earthing metal raceways for the community antenna distribution circuits, or for the electric lighting, power and Class I circuits, b) earthed metal sheathed or armoured cable for the electric lighting, power, and Class 1 conductors, c) nonmetallic sheathed cable for the electric lighting, power, and Class 1 circuits operating at 380.0V or less, or d) raceways of a non-metal type as permitted in Sectio~8 in addition to the insulation on the community antenna distribution circuit conductors, or the electric lighting power, and Class I circuit conductors. (2) Where the electric lighting or power conductors are bare, all community antenna distribution conductors in the same room or space shall be enclosed in an earthed metal raceway and no opening, such as an outlet box, shall be located within 2.0m of bare conductors of up to and including 15.0kV or within 3.0m of bare conductors above 15.0kV. (3) The conductors of a community antenna: distribution circuit shall not be placed in any raceway, compartment, outlet box, junction box, or similar fitting which contains conductors of electric light, power, or Class I circuit unless: a) the conductors of the community antenna distribution circuit are separated from the electric light, power, or Class I circuit conductors by an acceptable barrier, or b) the power or Class I conductors are placed solely for the purpose of supplying power to the community antenna distribution circuit. 24.6.2 Conductors in a Vertical Shaft (1) Conductors of a community antenna distribution circuit in a vertical shaft shall be in a totally enclosed noncombustible raceway.
ETHIOPIAN
BUILDING
CODE STANDARD
EBCS-10
1995
425
24.6.5 Raceways
(1) Raceways shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of Section 80
24.7
426
EBCS-10 1995
(2) Community antenna distribution conductors subject to accidental contact with light or power conductors operating at voltages exceeding 380.0V and attached exposed to buildings shall be separated from combustible material by being supported on glass, porcelain, or other insulating material acceptable for the purpose, except that such separation is not required where the outer conductive sheath of the coaxial cable is earthed. (3) Community antenna distribution conductors attached to buildings shall not conflict with other communication conductors attached to the same building and sufficient clearance shall be provided so that there will not be unnecessary interference to maintenance operations; and in no case should the conductors, strand, or equipment of one system cause abrasion to the conductors, strand, or equipment of the other system.
24.8
UNDERGROUND CONDUCTORS
EBCS-10 1995
427
at a
shallower depth, in which case a minimum depth of 450.0mm shall be permitted, except that for service wires under parkways and lawns, the depth may be reduced to 450.0mm; d) placed with a layer of sand 75.0mm deep, both above and below the cable, if in rocky or stony ground; e) placed at a minimum depth of 900.0mm under an area which is subject to vehicular traffic, except that the depth may be reduced to 600.0mm when mechanical protection is provided which shall consist of: i) treated plank at least 38.0mm thick or other acceptable material which shall be placed ~ver the conductor or cable after first back-filling with 75.0mm of sand or earth containing no rocks or stones; or ii) a conduit suitable for earth burial placed to facilitate cable replacement and to minimize traffic vibration damage; and f) equipped with a metal shield when placed in a common trench involving random separation with power supply cables or wiring operating at 750.0V or less, in which case the community antenna distribution conductors shall not cross under the supply cables
a) the raceway, including materials, shall be separated from those used for the electric power system by not less than 50.0mm of concrete or 300.0mm of well-ta!T';,r..l -.alth; b) the raceway shall be located to maintain a minimum depth of 600.0mm in areas subject to vehicular traffic and 450.0mm in all other areas except that, where rock bottom it encountered at shallower depth, the raceway shall be encased in concrete; c) the raceway shall not terminate in the same manhole and the conductors or cable assembly shall not be placed in the same manhole, used for electric power system, d) the conductors shall not be placed in the same raceway containing electric lighting, power or Class 1 circuit conductors; and e) the cable sheath shall be suitable for wet locations.
428
EBCS-10 1995
24.9
24.9.2
24.9.2.1
Earthing Conductor
Material
(1) The earthing conductor shall be of copper, aluminium alloy, copper-clad steel, bronze, or other corrosion-resistant 24.9.2.2 Insulation material unless otherwise specified.
(1) The earthing conductor shall be securely fastened in place and may be directly attached to the supporting surface without the use of insulating supports.
EBCS-10 1995
429
24.9.2.5
(1) The earthing conductor shall be run in as straight a line as is practicable from the lightning arresters of antenna mast, or both, to the earthing electrode.
24.9.3 24.9.3.1
(1) The earthing conductor shall be connected to an earthing electrode as specified in Section 7.
24.9.3.3
(1) The size of protective earthing conductor for receiving stations providing earth connection for mast and lightning arresters shall be in accordance with the provisions of Section 7.
24.9.3.4
Common earth
(1) A single earthing conductor may be used for both protective and operating purposes; but it must be installed so that disconnection of the operating earth will not be after the protective earth circuit.
1995
..
ANNEX
A (INFORMATIVE)
A.I A.I.1
GENERAL Introduction
antenna installation is one of the prerequisites for interference-free reception of
An efficient
A.I.2
Terminology
antenna installations that supply radio and television signals to a single household. Modern household are provided with a number of antenna sockets. To make an adequate signal level available at each socket, amplifiers may also be required in some individual antenna installations (see Figure A.I).
individual antenna
antenna installations that supply radio and television signals to households in one or more buildings. They consists of an unit) and the antenna assembly, a head station (amplifier
distribution network including the cables, branch-in units, antenna sockets and the associated receiver connection cables (see Figure A.3). It is usual nowadays to install community aerial systems in apartment buildings. They are considerably more satisfactory than large number of individual antennas because mutual interference is eliminated and the most suitable position on the roof can be chosen for the antenna.
EBCS-10 1995
431
The
signals to be received are fed to the private wide-band system from a primary cable network (see Figure A.2).
A.2
PLANNING
Before the planning of a system ,is started, an accurate survey of the site should be carried out. In the process, the followi~g data should be collected with the aid of the building plans 9r from the direct observation: Number and position of antenna sockets - Modem antenna system should be equipped with at least two, and preferably three or four, antenna sockets per apartment. The number and position of the sockets must be known for planning purposes. Sound and television broadcast transmissions - The choice of transmission that are worth" receiving depends on the reception conditions. If these are not known, measurement must be undertaken with a suitable signal-strength meter. Position of antenna - The antenna should be erected in the most satisfactory position for reception and be as far positioned as possible from chimney and power cables. Amplifiers, frequency-converters and power-supply units - A readily accessible location should
be detennined for the head station under the r<;>of.It must also be conflnned that a connection to the electricity supply is available, or can be provided, close to the head unit. (see, Figure A.3) Quality of reception - To assess the quality of reception, it is necessary to make measurement with a suitable signal strength meter. The measurement point is detennined by the antenna location appropriate to the building. If a different location is more satisfactory from the point of view of reception, it should be adopted after consultation with the building owner or the architect.
432
EBCS-10 1995
A.3 A.3.1
The distribution system begins at the output of the head station and ends at the antenna socket outlets. Its purpose is to provide reliable transmission of the signal from the head stations through the sockets to the radio and television receivers.
A6).
A7 shows the combined distribution method applied to a community antenna system with three television channels. Figure A8 provides a similar arrangement with six television channels.
Figure
ETHIOPIAN BUilDING
CODE STANDARD
EBCS-10 1995
433
A.3.5
Private wide-band cable-network systems supply subscribers on demand with radio and television transmissions. These are comparable in terms of design to large community antenna systems. Following The transmissions are obtained from a broadcast receiving station and relayed via cables and amplifiers to system connection points on the perimeters of the private properties. this, the received signals are amplified and fed to the antenna sockets (see Figure A.9). A.4 PROTECTION
As a protection against accidental voltage transfer from the electrical installations, all inactive conductive parts of the antenna system, such as the antenna post, housings, junction boxes and amplifiers, outer conductors and metallic sheaths of the antenna cables should be connected together and earthed, or included in the potential equalization system. For potential equalization, a permanent connection must be made between the antenna system and the main equipotential conductor (see Figure A.I 0). A.5 A.5.l CONSTRUCTION General OF A RECEIVING-ANTENNA SYSTEM
Reliable performance by radio and television receivers is dependent upon the careful planning and competent construction of the aerial installation. Information relative to the length and design of the antenna post is presented in Figure A.II and A.12. A.5.2 Length of Aerial Post
The necessary length and strength of the post is determined by the number and separation of the antennas. The upper end of the tubular post is usually closed by the LF/MFIHF and USW antennas. The order of the other antennas is immaterial in itself. It is appropriate, however, to mount the antennas that present a high wind load near the bottom so long as higher placing is not called for on grounds of efficient reception.
434
EBCS-10 1995
number of elements, particularly if they are aimed in the same direction. The separation between the lowest antenna unit and the roof should be at least I.Om. Table A.I Guidance values for the minimum separation "a" [em] between antennas on the spot
Band
TV t
usw
140 110
80 80 80
TV III
TV IV
TVV
80 80 80 50 50
140
80 80 80 60
80
80 80 80
TVN
TVV
50
(AI)
where, L is length [m] and W is windload [N]. A post should be chosen where permissible bending moment (from the manufacturer's at least equal to the calculated bending moment
Mb
data) is
in Equation (AI).
The capacity of the structural parts (buildings) to withstand the forces produced in the antenna installation shall be verified.
EBCS-10 1995
435
enters the head station to prevent condensat.e from running out of the tabular post into the amplifier (Figure A.14). Attention should be paid to good accessibility in consideration of subsequent maintenance. If there is no suitable wall on which to mount the headstation, it can be mounted on a wooden board or fTame. Where headstations are mounted in public-accessible places such as, for example, in stair walls, they should preferably be accommodated in lockable cabinets. A.6 A.6.1 Such COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE
Measurement on Commissioning measurements should be carried out in commissioning as are necessary to prove the
technical performance of the aerial system. Table A.3 shows a measurement schedule, representing a community antenna system in tabular form, in which the test points and the required measurements are detailed and the results record. To assess picture quality, the assessment symbols given in Table A.2 should be entered in the measurement schedule. Table A.2 Assessment grades for interference according to prescribed assessmen.t criteria
(8) picture channel Not one halfR2G2 For common visible S3 GO a times R1 relative to(G) Just5visible SO2 G1 criteria Not Assessment visible 3RO S1 1 R3 interference Clearly S2 G3 interference (R)
nce
436
EBCS-10 1995
A.6.3 Maintenance
Trouble- free operation of the aerial system is assisted by regular checking of the mechanical and electrical components. The following routine checks should be carried out during maintenance: a) Aerial structure: - Orientation of aerials, - Fixing clamps, - Sealing of roof lead-in, Seating of earthing clamps. b) Headstation: - Measurements as for commissioning at test points TPI and TP2. The checking and measurement results from each maintenance operation should be recorded in a suitable schedule Table A.4 for comparison with other tests.
EBCS-10 1995
437
IV ote x stereo Picture Attenuatihum, LF/MF ~ -6x dB TVand~84to data (see x LF/MF~94 of N Test-point sound mono carrier Measurements of ofx commissioning ~S7outputx signal x TV xIhiss maximum Observe aerial'~S2 End TV according '!"position (Valuesrelative~S4 xinstructions) catalogue USWdBI!V) ~SOto permissible quality measurement' Output Signal-levelIVN~84 reference "lining-up" level 11~84 ~40 in III s80 Ouput of IVN FN5.W Sound quality signal levels in cable ~2 dB station or spur ~ Difference
" n --TPO on Recommended introduc noise and --TP3distortio --TPI cracking, ~'TP2 FIMFI
x Insert appropriate entries 1) For sound broadcast transmissions, the selectively measured transmitters in the LF, MF, HF and USW bands should be For television transmissions, the channel signal levels (the synchronizing pulses occur) in the receiving or distribution Assessment of picture quality, carriers: at least the Lm,s. values of the local and district measured, r,m.s, level of the vision carrier at the point where the channels
2)
438
EBCS-10 1995
No.:
__ _ no _. ~_n _. _ _.
Project :
~ __ __ u __
_
__
No.:
wow. __ " _.". _
Address:
Street No.:
Contract No.:
Ch TP1.../. ..
Date: TP1 TP2 5TP2 '.hum, Picture qualitysound: hiss) [dB] G TP2 Name: Assessment Name: Amplifier RR [dB] Date: ~ignalleve aR noise, nB,nt dB"V I chrackling,of Geometry, Date: TP1 leve lSignal firmness .../.... ./.... / Ch ..../... .. structure: .. .1... Aerial
t--
- f------
mechanical
j-----
Name:
EBCS-10 1995
439
LF/MF/HF/USWaerial
LF/MF/HF/USWaerial
DO
DO
Aerial
sockel
CP WC nelWQrk
'\'HF widebRnd amplilier 11 :>Iece 01 previous r.eJd slallon in loll ,":MRln distribution , , ,\system, fed Irom above
system',
Apartment building
a)
Aar\ill structure
EBCS-10 1995
441
I I ). . ay. t Ol$UlbYllOt\
'
14.'#j'V l d"lfibullOn
blanf\lng
Sino"
"r-~-ll" ~ ~
l
: I
::
f'J"rII
::I ~ I I II : :: :I: I
II
I I
DlllllbuiiOt'l "1>1'
: I
tlOll
O'SU'10uhOn l;iol
OllUlbuuOl
of junction boxes
Oi.lnbYlio-l
~~DULIOn ,
eaol.
bOl. . 11';
method
method
442
EBCS-10 1995
I I
~I ' Ch ~
Ch 6 Ch 21 I USW I I
I III I 'ft
C~2
I Ch th8 12 eh 3~ Ch 8 'ft
tlFI
I I
LF/MFI
Figure A.7 Community aerial system for LF MF, HF and USW reception and three television transmission
Figure A.8
Community aerial system for LF, MF, HF and USW reception and six television transmissions
Privale wide;band
system
EBCS-10 1995
443
I I I
cuismm'l
I I I
I I I I
1:1,L2: L1
Phis.
conductors conductor
N - neultill
Figure A.tO Protection of an aerial installation by inclusion in the equipotential bonding of all the metallic conducting systems of a building
LF/MF/HF
aenal
f
IV,
USWaerial
1,I
UHF aerial
VHF~al
I
L
Figure A.l1
Figure A.12
444
EBCS-10 1995
I'
Ring section complelely lemovl1d oV,era lenglh 015 mm allhe Ipwesl point ollhe waler Irap or,shealh
EBCS-1d 1995
445
SECTION
25
25.1
SCOPE
(1) This Section applies to electrical installations, electrical equipment in or adjacent to pools, and non-electrical metal accessories in a pool or within 3.0m of the inside wall of a pool.
Note: The tenn "pool", as referred to in this Section, is deemed to include permanently installed and storable pools, hydromassage bathtub, spas and hot tubs, wadding pools, baptismal pools,'and decorative pools.
25.2
NORMATIVE REFERENCE
(1) The following reference contains provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings: a) C 22.1: 1990 Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Safety Standard Electrical Installation, Sixteenth Edition.
25.3
DEFINITIONS
(1) In this Section, in additions to the terms defined in Section 1, the following definitions shall apply: permanently installed swimming pool a pool constructed in such a manner that it cannot be disassembled for storage. storable swimming pool a pool constructed in such a manner that it may be readily disassembled for storage and reassembled to its original integrity.
446
EBCS-10 1995
forming shell
a structure intended for mounting in a swimming pool structure to support a wet-niche luminaire assembly.
wet-niche luminaire
a luminaire intended for installation in a forming shell mounted in a pool structure where the luminaire will be completely surrounded by pool water.
dry-niche Luminaire
a luminaire intended for installation in the wall of a pool in a niche which is sealed against the entry of pool water by a fixed lens.
a pool or tub designed for the immersion of persons in heated water circulated in closed system incorporating a filter, heater, pump, and with or without a motor driven blower, but not intended to be filled and drained with each use.
hydromassage bathtup
a permanently
waterpump or air blower, and having a fill and drain water system, and includes therapeutic pools.
a section of corrosion resistant metal tubing. at least five times as long as its diameter, provided with a brazed or welded copper lug .placed in a run of nonmetallic pipe to provide a path to earth for currerit leakage originating from device in contact with pool water.
decorative pool
a pool that could be used as a wadding pool that is larger than 1.5m in any dimensions and that is readily accessible to the public.
25.4
GENERAL
EBCS-10 1995
447
25.4.2 25.4.2.1
Overhead Wiring
General
(1) There shall not be ~y overhead wiring above the pool, diving structures, observation stand, tower or platform, or above the area extending 3.0m horizontally from the pool edge (see Figure 25.1) except as permitted by 25.4.2.2 and 25.4.2.3. 25.4.2.2 Communication conductors and cables not exceeding 750.0V
(1) Insulated communication conductors, communication antenna distribution conductors, and I neutral supported cables not exceeding 750.0V shall be permitted to be located over a pool, diving structure, observation stand, tower or platform, or above the area ~xtending 3.0m horizontally from the pool edge, provided there is a clearance measured radially of at least 4.5m. 25.4.2.3 Conductors oper4ting at no more than 50.0kV
(1) Conductors other than those covered by 25.4.2.2 and operating at not more than 50.0~Y phase-to-phase shall be permitted to be located above a pool, diving structure, observation stand, tower or plate, or above the area extending 3.0m horizontally from the pool edge provided there is a clearance measured radially of at least 7.5m.
448
EBCS-10 1995
[m]
25.4.4 25.4.4.1
(1) The metal parts ofthe pool and other non-electrical equipment associated with the pool such as piping, pool reinforcing steel, ladders, diving board supports, and fences within 1.5m of the pool, shall be bonded together and to' non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment such as decorative type-pool luminaries and lighting equipment not located in a forming shells, metal screens of shields for underwater speakers, conduit, junction boxes, and the like by a copper bonding conductor.
Exemption: The metal parts of a pool need not be bonded to earth or to each other where the electrical equipment
associated with the pool is: a) not located within 3.0m of the pool, b) suitably separated from the pool by a fence, wall, or other barrier, or c) approved without a bonding conductor
25.4.4.2
Reinforcing steel
(1) Pool reinforcing steel shall be bonded with a minimum of four connections equally spaced around the perimeter.
EBC$-10 1995
449
--------------------------------------------------------------~
25.4.4.3
(1) Bonding conductors for pools shall be: a) no smaller than 16.0mm2 for permanently installed pools and for all in-ground pools; or b) as required by Table 7.1 of Section 7 for all other pools.
25.4.4.4
Bonding medium
(1) Metal sheath and raceways shall not be relied upon as the bonding medium and separate copper bonding conductor shall be used.
Exemptions: a) A metallic conductor between a forming shell and its associated junction box shall be permitted to be used as the bonding medium provided the forming shell and junction box are installed in the same structural section.
b) The bonding conductor shall be of copper and not smaller than that required by Table 7.1.
25.4.4.5
(1) The bonding conductor from the junction box referred to in Clause 25.4.5 shall be run to the main distribution board, and, if it is smaller than 16.0mm2, it shall be installed and mechanically protected in the same manner as the circuit conductor.
25.4.5 25.4.5.1
(1) Junction boxes: a) shall be permitted to be submerged in decorative pools provided the boxes are marked for such usage; and b) conduits shall be water-tight and provided with a packing seal that will seal\around the cord and effectively prevent water from entering the box through the conduit from the forming shell.
450
EBCS-10 1995
25.4.5.2
(I)
Deck boxes
shells, referred
hereinafter as "deck boxes", shall be specifically approved for the purpose and shall: a) be provided with a means for independently tenninating at least three bonding conductors inside the box and one 16.0mm2 bonding conductor outside the box; b) not contain the conductors of any circuits other than those used exclusively to s\lPply the underwater equipment; and c) be provided with electrical continuity between every connected metal conduit and the bonding tenninals by means of copper, brass or other corrosion-resistant integral with the box. metal that is
25.4.6 25.4.6.1
separated from the pool area by a fence, wall or other penn anent barrier which will make the not accessible to persons using the pool area.
25.4.6.2
Bonding
(I) A metal shield, if provided between the primary and secondary windings of a transfonner, shall be bonded to earth.
EBCS-10 1995
451
25.4.6.3
Audio transformer
(1) Audio isolation transformers shall: a) be connected between the audio output terminals of each amplifier and any loudspeaker which is located within 3.0m of the pool wall; and b) be located in or adjacent to the amplifier with which they are used; and c) have an audio output voltage of not more than 75.0V r.m.s.
25.4.7
25.4.7.1
Socket Outlets
Location
(1) Socket outlets shall not be located within 1.5m of the inside walls of the pools. 25.4.7.2 Protection
(1) Sockcl Dutlets located between 1.5m and 3.0m of the inside wall of a pool shall be prote~ted by an earth-fault circuit breaker.
Note: In maintaining the dimensions referred to in Clause 25.4.7, the distance to be measured is the shortest path that the power supply cord of an appliance connected to the socket outlet would follow without piercing a building floor, wall, or ceiling.
(1) Wet-niche luminaries shall, except for decorative pools, be mounted in forming shells which shall have provision for suitable connection to the wiring method used. 25.4.8.1.2 Submersion depth
(1) Wet-niche luminaries shall, unless specifically approved and marked for submersion at a greater depth, not be submersed in the pool water at a depth of more than 600.0mm, such distance being measured from the centre of the lense face of the luminaire to the normal water level.
452
EBCS-10 1995
25.4.8.1.3
Voltage
(1) Wet-niche luminaire shall operate with neither the supply voltage to the luminaire nor the associated ballast or transformer, if applicable, nor the secondary open-circuit voltage of the ballast or transformer exceeding 230.0V during either starting or operating voltage.
25.4.8.2 25.4.8.2.1
(1) Where dry-niche luminaries are installed so as to be accessible from a walkway or a service tunnel outside the walls of the pool or from a closed drained recess in the wall of the pool, neither the supply voltage to the fixture nor its associate ballast or transformer shall exceed 380.0V during either starting or operating conditions.
25.4.8.2.2
Accessib~lity
(1) Dry-niche luminaries shall be accessible for maintenance: a) from a service tunnel or walkway outside the walk of the pool, or b) through a handhole in the deck of the pool to a closed, drained recess in the wall of the pool.
25.4.8.3
Metal parts
(1) Metal parts of lumnaires in contact with the pool water shall be of brass or other suitable corrosion-resistant material
25.4.8.4
Luminaire support
(1) Stands or supports for luminaries shall not be installed within 3.0m of the inside walls of a swimming pool unless such luminaries are protected by earth-fault circuit breaker.
25.4.8.5
Luminaire protection
(1) Luminaries installed below or within 3.0m of the pool surface or walls, and not suitably separated from the pool area by fence, wall or other permanent barrier shall be electrically protected by an earth-fault circuit breaker.
EBCS-10 1995
453
ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
OF BUILDINGS
25.4.8.6
(1) Forming shells for lamps supplied from an earthed circuit or a circuit operating at voltage exceeding 30.0V shall be made from metal and have provision for a threaded connection to a rigid metal conduit.
25.4.9
25.4.9.1
25.4.9.2
Other classes
(1) Where earth-fault circuit breakers of the Class A type are not available due to rating, the equipment shall be protected by an earth-fault circuit breaker which will clear an earth fault within the time specified for Class A type breaker.
25.4.9.3
Installation
(1) Earth-fault circuit breakers shall be: a) permanently connected, b) permitted to be applied to a feeder, a branch circuit or an individual device, c) installed in a location which will facilitate testing required in 25.4.9.4, but not closer within 3.0m of the pool water.
25.4.9.4
Warning sign
(1) A warning sign shall be located beside the switches controlling circuits, electrically protected by earth-fault circuit breakers, advising that the circuits are protected and that the equipment shall be tested regularly.
454
EBCS-10
1995
ETHIOPIAN
BUILDING
CODE STANDARD
25.5
PERMANENTLY
25.5.1 General (1) The wiring between the wet-niche luminaries and the junction boxes referred to in Clause 25.4.5 shall be of flexible cord suitable for use in wet locations and supplied as a part of the luminaire. 25.5.2 Conduit Type (1) Rigid conduit of copper or other corrosion-resistant junction box referred to in Clause 25.4.5.
Exemption: Where Clauses 25.5.1 and 25.5.2 do not apply, any suitable wiring method specified in Section 8 of this Standard shall be permitted.
provided between the forming shell of luminaire installed below the pool surface and the
25.5.3 Circuft Segregation (1) Conductors independent on the load side of each earth-fault circuit breakers shall be kept entirely
of all other wiring which is not so protected and shall not enter a luminaire
raceway, box, or cabinet occupied by other wiring except for panelboards which house the breakers. 25.5.4 Drainage (1) Conduits in the walls and deck of a swimming pool shall be installed so that suitable drainage is provided. 25.6 STORABLE SWIMMING POOLS
/'
(1) No electrical equipment shall be located in the pool water or on the pool wall unless specifically approved for the purpose.
EBCS-10 1995
455
25.6.2
25.6.2.1
Pumps
General
(1) Swimming pool pumps located within 3.0m ofthe pool walls shall be specifically approved for the purpose. 25.6.2.2 Supply
(1) Swimming pool pumps shall be supplied from a pern'lanently installed receptacle located not less than 1.5m nor more than 7.5m from the pool walls. 25.6.2.3 Protection
(1) Swimming pool pumps shall be protected by an earth fault-circuit breaker if located within 3.0m of the inside walls of the pool and not suitably separated from the pool area by a fence, wall, or other permanent barrier.
25.7
HYDROMASSAGE BATHTUB
25.7.1 Protection
(1) Electrical equipment forming an integral part of a hydromassage bathtub shall be protected by an earth-fault circuit breaker of the Class A type.
25.7.2
25.7.2.1
Control
Timer switch
(1) A hydromassage bathtub shall be controlled by an automatic shut-off timer with an "on" time of not more than 30.0min. 25.7.2.2 Controls location
(1) Electrical controls associated with a hydromassage bathtub shall be located behind a barrier or shall be located not less than 1.Om horizontally from a wall of the bathtub unless they form an integral part of an approved factory-built hydromassage bathtub.
456
EBCS-10 1995
25.7.2.3
(1) Subject to 25.7.2.2 and notwithstanding the provisions of 25.4.9.3(1c), earth-fault circuit breakers shall be permitted to be closer than 3.0m to the pool but not less than 1.5m from the pool wall.
(1) Metal parts of spas and hot tubs shall be bonded together and to earth in accordance with the provisions of Clause 25.4.4.
Exemption: Metal rings or bands used to secure staves or wooden hot tubs need not be bonded.
25.8.1.2
(1) A copper bonding conductor whose size is not less than that of the circuit conductors supplying the equipment shall be connected between the control panel of a spa or hot tub and the consumer's service or distribution panel.
25.8.2 25.8.2.1
(1) Controls for spa or hot tub shall be located behind a barrier or shall be located not within 1.5m horizontally from spa or hot tub unless they form an integral part of an approved factory built spa or hot tub.
EBCS-10 1995
457
25.8.2.2
Socket outlet
25.8.2.3
Luminaries
25.8.3 25.8.3.1
(1) Leakage current collectors shall be installed in all water inlets and in all water outlets of a field-assembled
Exemption:
spa or hot tub so that all water flows through leakage current collectors.
is a
Leakage water current collection shall not be required in a system in which the only component pump marked as "insulated wet-end pump".
25.8.3.2
be bonded to the control panel or the main service earth with a copper bonding conductor.
25.8.3.3
(1) The bonding conductor for leakage current collectors shall be not smaller than that required by Table 7.1, Section 7, where the bonding conductors are mechanically protected in the same manner as the circuit conductor or a minimum 16.0mm2 copper conductor.
25.8.4 25.8.4.1
(1) Spas and hot tubs, field-assembled within divided components, shall be installed III accordance with the provisions of Clauses 25.8.1 through 25.8.3, 25.8.4.2 and 25.8.4.3.
458
EBCS-10 1995
25.8.4.2
Component
(1) Individual components, such as pumps, heaters, and blowers, shall be specifically approved for use with spas or hot tub.
25.8.4.3
(1) Air blower shall be installed above the tub rim, or other acceptable means shall be used to prevent water from coming into contact with live parts of the blower.
Note:
No conductors
be permitted. Any other conductors operating at not more than 50.0kV might be permitted above the area outlined by line 2. All dimensions are in metres.
EBCS-10 1995
459
ANNEX
A (INFORMATIVE)
A.I
a) have either the primary and secondary windings wound on separate bobbins 'On the core legs or a grounded and metal shield between the primary and secondary windings;
b) be capable of withstanding a 60.0Hz test voltage of ,2500.0V applied between the primary and secondary windings for a period of 1.0min without a breakdown. Microphones transformers preamplifier, used in the vicinity of pools and baptismal fonts must have audio isolation and cables with ungrounded conductors installed between them and any mixer, amplifier or similar equipment.
A.2
AN EARTH FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER circuit interrupter is a device whose function is to interrupt, the overcurrent WHnm a protective
An earth-fault predetermined
time, the electric circuit to a load when the current to earth exceeds some
predetermined value that is less than that required to operate device of that circuit.
More specifically, a Class A earth-fault circuit interrupter is one which will interrupt the circuit to the load when the earth-fault current is 6.0mA or more, but not when the earth f~,ult current is 4.0mA or less in a time: a) not greater than that given by:
20
(A.I)
46.0
EBCS-10 1995
where
I is the earth
fault current in La.ms milliamperes for fault current~ between 4.0mA and 260.0mA.
Note: when the ambient air temperature is less than -SoCor more than 40C, the minimum tripping current may be 3.5mA instead of 4.0mA.
ETHIOPIAN BUilDING
CODE STANDARD
EBCS-10 1995
461
SECTION
26
GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS
26.1
SCOPE
(1) This Section of the Code sets provisions for graphical symbols to be used in electrical installations and degree of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment. 26.2 NORMATIVE REFERENCES
(1) The following references contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard on Electrical Installation of Buildings: a)
mc
529:1989
Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IF Code). Graphical Symbols Installation. for Diagrams Electrical
b) DIN 407117:1983
26.3
DEFINITIONS
(1) For the purpose of this Section of the Code, the following definitions shall apply, in addition to the terms defined in Section 1:
degree of protection
the extent of protection provided by an enclosure against access to hazardous parts, against ingress of solid foreign objects and/or against ingress of water and verified by standardized test methods as specified in mc 529:1989. a coding system to indicate the degree of protection provided by an enclosure against access to hazardous parts, ingress of solid foreign objects, ingress of water and to give additional information in connection with such protection as specified in mc 529:1989.
462
EBCS-10 1995
26.4
SYMBOLS
(1) Symbols for electrical installations and degree of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment (lighting fittings) shall be as indicated in Tables 26.1 and 26.2, respectively.
- " \J'-...
// / ------
Overheadconductors for (PEl Radio line line Signal line Conductor Telephone line Protective Surface conductor Underground DESCRIPTION Flexible line Junction of line surfaceline flush installation In/Under Wiring going down Wiring going passing through vertically Wiring upward Identification of Intended of Installation Conductor, Method Identification Supply lines Application general line Systems SYMBOL
Note:
. EBC$-1 0 1995
463
ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
OF BUILDINGS
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
--0--
Surface mounted (central) main distribution board Flush mounted (central) main distribution Surface mounted sub-distribution Flush mounted sub-distribution Switchgear Fuse, general Three-pole fuse, general Low voltage HRC fuse Fuse disconnector Switch Automatic breaker for line protection trip, e.g board board board
Breaker with thermal over-current Motor circuit break-et Star-delta Motor Starter
o irect-on-I
ine starter
Switches used for installation purposes On-off switch, single-pole On-off switch, double-pole On-off switch, triple-pole Two-circuit Two-way switch, single interruption. switch, single-pole
Push-button
Note:
464
EBCS-10
1995
ETHIOPIAN
BUILDING
CODE STANDARD
SECTION 26:
GRAPHICAL_SYMBOLS
mp -
/,.0\
)( I
rh
EBCS-10 1995
465
-0.
I xI I I I xSYMBOL DESCRIPTION Row of florescent luminaire Water appliance Florescent luminairecooker (post top) symbol Battery machine Inverter Current heater doubleSymbol Rectifier General Voltage (kiluminaire General Indicating Microwavelowatthour-metre) Exterior Metre Washing instruments Kitchen transformer Hotplate(Cell) Electricaltransformer lamp Electric oven general symbol Convertorappliance, Baking range,
Note:
466
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 26:
GRAPHICAL
SYMBOvO
(conte'd)
SYMBOL I Non-automatic DESCRIPTION Call indicator panel Horn detector Electricwasher exchange, exchange (manual fire Bell Motor Freezer fan conditioningfire alarm device panel Generator Masteralarm control & (Number indicates call Siren SmokeClock Dish Clock Telephoneindicating symbol Intercom Automatic Telephone general Fire freezer Deep Air Clothes dryer call point) example 9 stations) stations, for CJ:=:=7 Communication Devices appliances 1** [Q] [*** I ~ E!J ~ Signalling ~ Lf-o-Jlj Appliances(conte'd) Electrical I
U g
Note:
Darkened
symbols indicate
flush [recessed]
installations.
ETHIOPIAN
BUILDING
CODE STANDARD
EBCS-10
1995
467
EJ em
detector (rate of rise) Radio, oJ II I=:::: Television and accessories =:::) 1ZSJ
lr
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION , Antenna setdetector TV speaker Flame detector Loud set,. Radio detector (fixed temperature) Heat Amplifier Optical
----
Note:
468
EBCS-10 1995
SECTION 26:
GRAPHICAL
SYMBOLS
Table 26.2 Graphical symbols for the degree of protection of electrical equipment
(symbols on light fittings)
SYMBOL
Type of rainprotection Coveredsubstance II 1.0mm ~ water coveredsubstances 2.5mm water dust proof IP 22 II1.0mm protection foreign67 substancesagainstDigit - Protection foreign IP 50 inclined IP 43 waterproof 60 splash 54 IP 55 jetno ~ dripping water 65 no waterproof 23 2nd IP 44 53 11s1 Digit - Protection against
-----,
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING
CODE STANDARD
EBCS-10
1995
469
ANNEX
(INFORMATIVE)
Test marks
Lighting fittings for discharge lamps for direct mounting on fixtures and furnitures, which conform in their SYMBOL Lighting fittings mounting premises certifies(dust DESCRIPTION It (VDE 0100) IP 50 the Lighti ng fitti mark suitable for are of the in fire-hazardous sportsinflammabi Iity.The procedure accordi of The VDE-test ngssuitable for mounti ng on association "Vereinlocations andElektrotechiker" (~Association ng Impact interference is the symbol suitable materials with andAllDeutscher fittingsThe tests are made of mounting proof lighting fittings forto VDE 0875. gymnastic unknown prem ises. conform to the interference ?t at 200C, Radio suppressionaccording lighting to specified.for and orG. Byand are not or normallydeformationinternationally specified Nthese materials being varnished,Electrical Engineers.) The approval is with suppression suitable for direct mounting on normal or easily German C-specifications. 18032 inflammation using discharge lamps inflammable materials, although if rules. be reached. for suppression lighting VDE degree veneered. is DI behaviour remain fittings to additional interference this upto this temperature. will and ifNthey coated stable0711. hardly subject to based on sign are device degree
W V WJ @
470
EBCS-10 1995
ANNEX
(INFORMATIVE)
PROTECTION CLASSES
The light fittings are classified in three categories against electrical shocks depending on the type of protection.
allowed. quired. protective has protective wire is not fitting For Iighting fittings with incandescent
lamps for connection to low voltage with insulation, wire required ProtectiveDESCRIPTION
--
EBCS-10 1995
471
APPENDICES
APPENDIX
INITIAL VERIFICATION
1.1
General
(1) Every installation shall, during erection and/or on completion but before being put into service, be inspected and tested to verify,.so far as is reasonably practicable, that the requirements of this Electrical Installation Code have been met. (2) The method of test shall be. such that no danger to persons, livestock or property or damage to equipment can occur even if the circuit tested is defective. 1.2 Inspection
(1) Detailed inspection shall precede testing and shall normally be carred out with that portion of the installation under inspection being disconnected from the supply. (2) The detailed inspection shall be made to verify that the installed electrical equipment
IS:
a) in compliance with this Electrical installation Code; b) correctly selected and erected in accordance with this Electrical Installation Code; and c) not visibly damaged or defective so as to impair safety. (3) The detailed inspection shall include at least the checking of the following items, where relevant to the installation, and, where necessary, during erection:
EBCS-10 1995
A-1
ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
OF BUILDINGS
connection of conductors; identification of conductors; routing of cables in safe zones or mechanical protection; selection of conductors for current carrying capacity and voltage drop in accordance with the design; e) connection of single pole devices for protection or switching in phase conductors only; t) correct connection socket-outlets and lampholders; g) presence of fire barriers and protection against thermal effects; h) methods of protection against direct contact (including measurement of distances, where appropriate); i.e., i) protection by insulation of live parts, ii) protection by barrier or enclosure, ill) protection by obstacles, iv) protection by placing out of reach; i) methods of protection against indirect contact; i.e, i) presence of protective conduqtors, ii) presence of earthing conductors, iii) presence of main equipotential bonding conductors, iv) earthing arrangements for combined protective and functional purposes, v) use of Class II equipment or equivalent insulation, vi) non-conducting location (including measurement of distances, where appropriate), vii) earth-free local equipotential bonding, viii) electrical separation; prevention of mutual detrimental influence; presence of appropriate devices for isolation and switching; presence of under-voltage protective devices; choice and setting of protective and monitoring devices (for protection against indirect contact and/or protection against overcurrent); labelling of circuits, fuses, switches and terminals; selection of equipment and protective measures appropriate to external influences; adequacy of access to switchgear and equipment; presence of danger notices and other warning notices; presence of diagrams, instructions and similar information; erection methods.
a) b) c) d)
j)
k) 1) m) n)
0)
p) q) r) s)
A-2
EBCS-10 1995
1.3
1.3.1
Testing
Tests to be carried out
(1) The following tests, where relevant, shall be carried out in that sequence. a) continuity of protective conductors i) Every protective conductor shall be tested to verify that it is electrically sound and correctly connected.
b) continuity of ring final circuit conductors i) A test shall be made to verify the continuity of each conductor, including the protective conductor, of every ring final circuit.
c)
Insulation resistance The insulation resistance between live conductors shall be measured before the installation is connected to the supply. ii) Particular attention shall be given to the presence of electronic devices connected in the installation and, where necessary, such devices shall be isolated so that they are not damaged by the test voltage and thereafter tested in accordance with (vi) below. iii) The insulation resistance shall also be measured between each live conductor and earth, the PEN conductor in TN-C systems being considered as part of the earth. Where appropriate during this measurement, phase and neutral conductors may be connected together. iv) The insulation resistance measured with the d.c. test voltages indicated in Table 1 shall be considered satisfactory if the main switchboard, and each distribution circuit tested separately with all its final circuits connected but with current-using equipment disconnected, has an insulation resistance not less than the value given in Table 1. v) The testing equipment shall be capable of supplying the test voltage indicated in Table A.1 when loaded with 1.0mA. vi) Where equipment such as electronic devices are disconnected for the tests prescribed in a(i) through c (v) above and the equipment has exposed conductive parts to be connected to protective conductors, the insulation, i)
EBCS-10 1995
A-3
resistance between the exposed conductive parts and live parts of the disconnected equipment shall be measured separately and shall be not less than O.5mega Ohm. Table 1: Minimum values of insulation- resistance
[V]
MinimumOhms) 0.5 resistance 1.0 1000 Circuit nominal voltage [V]0.25 ~O (mega5.0insulation Test voltage d.c. 500 circuit is supplied from a safety Above and including 500.0V with the Up to 500.0V up to 1000.OV
Note:
i)
In the event of any test indicating failure to comply with the requirments of clause (lc) above, that test and those preceding it (the results of which may have been influenced by the indicated fault) 3hall be repeated after the fault has been rectified.
ii) Reference methods of test are described in Guidance Notes on the Wiring Regulations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE); but the use of other methods giving no less effective results is not precluded.
d) Site applied insulation (i) Where insulation applied on site is intended to provide protection against direct contact, it shall be verified that the insulation is capable of withstanding, without breakdown or flashover, an applied voltage test equivalent to that specified in the relevant acceptable Standard for similar type-tested equipment. Where protection against indirect contact is provided by supplementary insulation applied to equipment during erection, it shall be verified by test that: - the insulating enclosure affords a degree of protection not less than IP2X, and
(ii)
A-4
EBCS-10 1995
l
(i) (ii)
- . the insulating enclosure is capable of withstanding, without breakdown or flashover, an applied voltage test equivalent to that specified in the relevant acceptable Standard for similar type tested equipment. e) Protection by separation of circuits Where protection against electric shock is provided by SELV, it shall be verified by inspection and test. Where protection against electric shock is provided by electrical separation, it shall be verified by inspection and test.
g) Insulation of non-conducting floors and walls (i) Where protection against indirect contact is to be provided by a nonconducting location, the resistance of the floors and walls of the location to the main protective conductor of the installation shall be measured at not less than three points on each relevant surface, one of which shall be not less than 1.0m and not more than 12m from any ~xtraneous conductive part in the location. The other two measurements shall be made at greater distances. Any insulation or insulating arrangement of extraneous conductive parts: - when tested at 500.0V d.c. shall not be less than O.5mega ohm; - shall be able to withstand a test voltage of at least 2.0kV r.m.s, a.c. and - shall not pass a leakage 'current exceeding 1.0mA in normal conditions of use. (h) Polarity (i) A test of polarity shall be made and it shall be verified that: - every fuse and single-pole control and protective device is connected in the phase conductor only;
(ii)
EBC~-l 0 1995
A-5
- centre-contact bayanet and Edisan screw lamphalders in circuits having an earthed neutral conductar have the auter ar. screwed contacts connected to. the neutral conductor; and - wiring has been correctly connected to. sacket-autlets and similar accessanes. (i) Earth fault laap impedance i) Where protective measures that require a knawledge af the earth-fault laap, impedances are, the relevent impedances shall be measured.
G)
Earth electrode resistance i) Where pratective measures are used, which require a knawledge af the earth electrode resistance, this shall be measured.
(k) (i)
Operatian af residual-current aperated devices Where pratectian against indirect contact is to. be provided by a resi~ual current device, its effectiveness shall be verified by a test simulating an appropriate fault conditian and independent af any test facility incorparated in the device.
(1) It shall be verified that every alteratian or additian complies with the requirements af this Co.de and that it daes nat impair the safety af an existing installatian. 3 PERIODIC INSPECTION AND TESTING
(1) Inspectian comprising careful scrutiny af an installatian shall be carned aut withaut dismantling or with partial dismantling, as required, supplemented by testing to.provide far: a) the safety af persans and livestack against the effects af electric shack and burns even when the circuit is defective, b) pratectian against damage to. praperty by fire and heat arising from an installatian defect,
A-6
EBCS-10 1995
'"
c) the identification that the installation is not damaged or deteriorated so as to impair safety; d) the identification of installation defects or non-compliance with the requirements of this Code which may give rise to danger. (2) The frequency of periodic inspection and testing of an installation shall be determined by the type of installation, its use and operation, the frequency of maintenance and the external influences to which it is subjected. 4 CERTIFICATION AND REPORTING
4.1
General
(1) Following the initial verification required by Clause 1 or Clause 2 of this Appendix, a Completion & Inspection Certificate in the form set out in Appendix 2 of this Code shall be given to the person ordering the work. (2) Following the periodic inspection and testing described in Clause 3 of this Appendix, report on the findings and the extents of the periodic inspection and. testing of an installation, or any part thereof, shall be recorded on a report and given by the person carrying out the inspection, or by a person authorized to act on his behalf, to the person ordering the work. (3) Dangerous conditions arising from non-compliance with this Code, together with any limitations of the inspection and testing in accordance with Clause 3(1) of this Appendix, shall be recorded.
4.2
Initial Verification
(1) The Inspection shall comply with the requirement of Clause 1 of this Appendix and any defects or omissions revealed by the inspection shall be made good before a Completion & Inspection Certificate is issued. (2) The Completion & Inspection Certificate shall be signed by a competent person or persons stating that the installation has been designed, constructed and inspected and tested in accordance with the provisions of this Code.
EBCS-10 1995
A-7
4.3
(1) The requirements of Clause 4.2 fdr the issuance of a Completion & Inspection Certificate shall apply to all the work of the alterations or additions; any defects or omissions revealed in that work shall be made good before a Completion Report is issued. (2) The Contractor or other person responsible for the new work, or a person authorised to act on his behalf, shall report in writing to the person ordering the work any defects found in related parts of the existing installation.
A-8
EBCS-10 1995
ETHIOP!At'-J BUILDING
CODE STANDARD
APPENDIX
2:
FORMS OF COMPLETION
AND INSPECTION
CERTIFICATE
APPENDIX
1.
Installation
(1) The forms of completion, inspection and testing shall be made out and signed by competent persons in respect of the design, construction, inspection and testing of work. (2) Completed forms shall indicate a responsibility for design, construction, inspection and testing, whether in relation to new work or further work on an existing installation.
ETHIOPIAN
BUILDING
CODE STANDARD
EBCS-10 1995
A-9
I/We, being the person(s) responsible (as indicated by my/our signatures below) for the Design of the electrical installation, particulars of which are described on Page ... of this Form, CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge and belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical , Installations published by except for the departures, if any, stated in this Certificate. The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject this Certificate.
For the
DESIGN
Name (in block letters): For and on behalf of: Address: (2) Signature: CONSTRUCTION (3) Date
I/We, being the person(s) responsible (as indicated by my/our signature below) for the 'Construction of the electrical installation, particulars of which are described on Page.... of this Form CERTIFY that the said wt>rkfor which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge and felief in accordance with the Regulation for Electrical Installations published by .......................................................................................................... except for the departures, if any, stated in this Certificate.
The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject of this '. Certificate. For the CONSTRUCTION of the installation: Name (in block letters): For and on behalf of: Address: (2) Signature: INSPECTION AND TEST
I/We, being the person(s) responsible (as indicated by my/our signatures below) for the Inspection and Test of the electrical installation, particulars of which are described on Page ... of this Form, CERTIFY that the said work for which l/we have been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge and belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by except for departures, if any, stated in this Certificate.
Position:
Reg. No.
(3) Date:
The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject this ~rtificate. For the
INSPECfION AND TEST
that this installation be further inspected and tested after an interval of not more than (3) Date:
NOTE: 1. This document is intended for the initial certification of a new installation or of an alteration or addition to an existing installation and of an inspection. 2. Thesignatures appended are those of the persons authorized by the companies executing the work of design. construction and inspection and testing respectively. A signatory authorized to certify more than one category of work shall sign in each of the appropriate places.
SCHEDULE
OF ADDITIONAL
RECORDS
EBCS-10 1995
A-ll
o TN-C
0 TN-S Resistance
0 TN-CS
0 IT
0 IT ................. ohms
Method of Measurement Type and Location Characteristics of the supply at the origin of the installation: Nominal voltage Frequency Number of Phases ............. Volts
Type
Rating ..... A .
IdB mA.)
o No Cable sheath. of Method of earthing: for ready operation satisfactory 0 o unsatisfactory o on for earth-leakage Buried strip/rod/plate Additional overhead line protection. ich is effective. o Protective multipleoearthing (p.M.E.) operated conductor current Earth-leakage circuit-breaker, voltage
Earth-leakage protection is afforded by a impedance of each earth-continuity conductor is satisfactory: 0 current.-operated.
DYes voltage-operated
DYes DYes DYes oo No No o No Polarity throughout the installation is correct stated below: apparatus tested separately is in good serviceable condition, except as stated below. Each item of parately is not less than 0.5 megao ] llation is not less than 1 megohm is nocords, of overloading of conductors or accessories except as serviceable cop-dition, except as All flexible sign switches, fuses, plugs and socket-outlets are in good stated below. There
m.
Apparatus tested
includes
portable appliances.
Signed
Date:
.....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................
ETHIOPIAN
BUILDING
CODE STANDARD
EBCS-10 1995
A-13
INDEX
A
Accessibility 453 Air blower installation 459 Air conditioning 380 Alarm signals 346 Ambient temperature 353 Audibility of general alarm 355 Audible alarms provided by public address equipment 356 Audio transformer 452 Automatic restarting after overload 264 Auxiliary equipment 326 Available short-circuit current 145 Avoidance offlue -like openiJ).g 358
Control required 266 Control switches 320 Controls 457 Controls location 456 Corrosion 192 Coverings 414
451
B
Ballast protection 327 Bends 376 Bonding 169, 171,451 Bonding conductor size 450,457,458 Bonding medium 450 Box 361 Branch circuit loading and protection 333 Branch circuit overcurrent protection 260
Deep moist clay soil 191 Design 346 Detached building 147 Detector types 350 Discrimination 147 Disruptive electrical influence 358 Driving rode electrode 170 Dry - niche luminaire 453
E
Earth electrode seal for use within a tanked structure Earth fault circuit breaker location 457 . Earth rod connection 190 Earth-fault circuit interrupter 362 Earth-leakage protection 146 Earthed control circuit 267 Earthing and bonding 144 E,arthing conductor be Earthing Conductors/,0 430run in a straight lille 430 Earthing electrode 430 Earthing of shields 414 Electric lifts 383 Enclosed or guarded live parts 144 Equipment 385 Equipment and power supply 346 Excess load 400 Explosive on flarnnlable atmosphere 347 External metal 189 192
c
Capacity of protective gear 147 Car lighting and accessories 380 Ceiling 353 Ceiling outlet box wiring 325 Charging facility 360 Circuit connection 360 Circuit segregation 455 Clothes closets 320 Colour coding 323 Colour rendering 7 Common earth 430 Communication conductors and cables not exceeding 750V 448
Component 459 Concrete - enclosed electrode 169 Conduit type 455 Conductor installation 375 Conductor cross section and Insulation 324 Conductor in building of combustible construction 357 Conductor on movable parts 324 Conductor run 376 Conductors 331 Conductors - two or more motors 258 Conductors attaclunent 331 Conductors cross section 357 Conductors operating at no more than 50 k.v. 448 Conductors to individual motors 257 Conduit seal 148 Conduitto drain 148 Connection of conductors 376 Connection of electrodes 171 Gonnection point 359 Connection to supply 400 Construction 374 Construction and requirements 348 Construction of messenger cable 333 Continuity of earthing and bonding conductors Continuous duty 384 Control location 267 Control 327 Fault signal discrimination 347 Feeder conductors 259 Feeder overcurrent protect 261 Feeding 400 Field - assembled unit 458 Floor openings 353 Floor protective coverings 414 Flue-like openings 351 Forming shell types 454 Fusing 360
G
General 145,188,190,326,328,331,347,348,349,354,360, 373,397,413,448,449,450,452,454,456,457,458,356 Grouping 143 Grouping of motors on a single branch circuit 261
171
INDEX
H
Hazard 327 Heat barrier 354 Height consideration 351 Height of conductor 332 Highest voltag~ 358 Hoistway door interlocking wiring 378 Hydraulic lifts 383 Mechanical and electrical requirements 188 Mechanical protection 430 Metal car frame supported by cables 385 Metal casing of a pump 169 Metal parts 453 Meters instruments and relays 284 Minimum height ofluminaries 322 Monitoring 350 Motor supply conductor insulation, temperature 257 Motors and generators 285,286,287 289, 2~1, 293 Motors and generators 285 Motors and generators 286 Motors and generators 287 Motors and generators 289 Motors and generators 293 Multiple services 142
I
Illuminance 37 Illumination level 387 In hoistway, machine rooms and escalator wellways 379 Independent metal water pipes 168 Installation and bonding 458 Installation 357,375,400,454,458 Installation and type 148 lnstanteneous trip circuit interrupters 262 Insulation 429 Insulation rating 378 Insulation resistance 356 Internal metal 189 Interruption 361
320
Non - continuous duty 384 Number and location of overload devices 263 NUmber of circuit element 347
o
On cars 379 Open core - and soil type transformer Origin of call indication 348 Other wiring 378 Other classes 454 Other factors 354 Outlet boxes to be covered 322 Outlet distance 400 375
J
J~ints 189 Junction box bonding conductor 450
L
Labelling 361 Lamp holders 326, 332 Lantern lights 351,353 Laying 170 Lengt11of cable from transformers 376 Lighting 386 Lighting fixtures 292 Lighting fixtures 285,286, 288,290 Lighting switch 387 Linllts of spacing 352 Live parts 321 Location 145,451,452 Location oflighting equipment 320 Location of the alarm contrast and indicating panel 346 Luminaire 387 Luminaire protection 453 Luminaire as a raceway 323 Luminaire construction 319 Luminaire exposed to flying objects 322 Luminaire in damp or wet location 320 Luminaire support 453 Luminaries 458
Over current protection 146,327,362375 Over load and over heating protection 362 Overcurrent protection marked on equipment 260 Overheating protection required 265 Overheating protection required for motors 265 Overload protection not required 264 Overload protection required 262
p
Pendant conductors 324 Placement 349 Plate electrode 170 Portable motors 257 Position relative to ceiling 351 Protection 452,456 Protection device location 380 Protection ofuninsulated part 374 Provision for bonding of future equipment Protection 319 Public water pipe 168 189
M
Manual call in automatic alarm 349
R
Rated duration of operation 38 Rating and ampacity 257 Rating or trip selection of overload devices Recessed luminaire 322 Recessed luminaire wiring Reinforcing steel 449 Remote location 361 324
Marking 143,374 Material 318,429 Material for bonding conductors 171 Material for system earthing 171 Means of disconnect 146
263
-~
INDEX
Use of insulators
331
s
Sandy or gravely soil 191 Secondary conductors 259 Secondary voltage 374 Sectioned rooms 351 Segregation 358 .Segregation 397 Sequence of control 147 Service equipment 328 Shallow top soil 191 Short circuit protection 362 Show windows 320 Shunting of overload protection during starting 264 Silencing switch 355 Single service 142 Single truss and north-light roofs 353 Siting of safety luminaries in hazardous workspaces 38 Size of protective earth 430 Staircases 351 Sock~ outlet 387,458 Soilless than 0.3m deeps 191 Spacing 170 Spacing and crossing 358 Spacing from combustible material 332 Spacing of conductors 332 Special monitoring 351 Split knobs 331 Starters having different sorting and running positions Stationary motors 257 Storage - battery charging equipment 292 Stricken 349
Use of messenger cables 333 Use permitted 413 Use prohibited 413
v
Ventilation 374
w
Warning sign 454 Wet niche or submersible luminaire 452
Wiring 399 Wiring methods 285,286,287,289,291,293 Wiring methods on poler 328 Wiring methods underground 328 Wiring oflighting equipment 323 wiring ofluminaries 323 Wiring of show-window luminaries 325 Working space 145
267
Submersion qepth 452 Suitability 357 Supply 456 Support 429 Supports 321 Switches, controllers, circuit breakers and fuses 87,289,290,293 Switches, motor controllers, circuit breakers and fuses 284 System heights 414
T
Thermal protection lbickness 374 Times switch 456 Transformer 326 326
293
Transmission circuitry 347 Travelling cables 378 Trouble signal 398 Two - stage alarm 355 Type of insulator 331 Types of conductors 376 Types of overheating protection 265 Types of overload protection 263
u
Undervoltage protection on feeders or branch circuits Undervoltage protection required for motors 265 266